stone is in a boys bladder HItherto wee have shewed by what means it is convenient to draw small stones out of the ureter bladder passage of the urine now will wee briefly shew the manner of takeing of greater stones out of the bladder which is performed by incision and iron instruments and I will deliver the practice thereof first in children then in men and lastly in women First therefore let the Surgeon take the boy upon whom it is determined the work shall bee performed under the armholes Why the boy must bee shaken before cutting How to place the child before dissection and so give him five or six shakes that so the stone may descend the more downwards to the neck of the bladder Then must you caus a strong man sitting uppon an high seat to lay the child upon his back with his face from him-ward haveing his hips lying upon his knees The child must lie somwhat high that hee may breathe the freelier and let not the nervous part bee too much stretched but let all parts bee loos and free for the drawing forth of the stone Furthermore it is fit that this strong man the childe 's legs beeing bended back wish the childe that putting his legs to his hams that hee draw them up as much as hee can and let the other bee sure hee keep them so for this site of the child much conduceth to wel performing of the work Then let the Surgeon thrust two of the fingers of his left hand as far into the childe 's fundament as bee is able but let him with his other hand press the lower bellie first wrapping a cloth about his hand that so the compression may bee the less troublesom and least inflammation should happen rather by this means than by the incision Now the compression hath this use to caus the stone to descend out of the botom of the bladder into the neck thereof under the os pubis whither after it is arrived it must bee there kept and as it were governed by the command of your hand least it should slide from that place whereto you have brought it These things thus don nothing now remaineth but that the Surgeon with a wound som two fingers breadth distant from the fundament cut through all the flesh even to the stone on the left side of the Perinaeum Where to divide the perinaeum But in the interim let him beware that hee hurt not the intestinum rectum for it may and usually doth happen that whil'st the stone is brought out of the bottom of the bladder to the neck thereof this gut is doubled in now if it bee cut with your incision-knife it cometh to pass that the excrements may somtimes com out at the wound Nature verie powrefull in children and the urine by the fundament which thing hath in manie hindred the agglutination and consolidation of the wound yet in som others it hath don little harm becaus in this tender age manie things happen which may seem to exceed nature the incision beeing made the stone must bee plucked forth with the instrument here expressed Hooks to pull stones forth of children's bladders The stone beeing drawn out a small pipe shall bee put into the wound and there kept for som space after for reasons hereafter too bee delivered then his knees shall bee bound together General rules must bee reduced to particular bodies for thus the wound will the sooner close and bee agglutinated The residue of the cure shall bee performed by reduceing the general cure of wounds to the particular temper of the childe 's age and the peculiar nature of the childe in cure CHAP. LII How to cut men for the taking out of the stone in the bladder SEeing wee cannot otherwise help such men as have stones in their bladders What to bee don before dissection wee must com to the extreme remedie to wit cutting But the patient must first bee purged and if the case require draw som blood yet must you not immediately after this or the day following hasten to the work for the patient cannot but bee weakned by purgeing and bleeding Also it is expedient for som daies before to foment the privities with such things as relax and soften that by their yeelding the stone may the more easily bee extracted Now the cure is thus to bee performed How to lay the patient The patient shall bee placed upon a firm table or bench with a cloth many times doubled under his buttocks a pillow under his loins and back so that hee may lie half upright with his thighs lifted up and his legs and heels drawn back to his buttocks Then shall his feet bee bound with a ligature of three fingers bredth cast about his anckles and with the heads thereof beeing drawn upwards to his neck and cast about it and so brought downwards both his hands shall bee bound to his knees as the following figure sheweth The figure of a man lying ready to bee cut of the stone The patient thus bound it is fit you have four strog men at hand that is two to hold his arms and other two who may so firmly straightly hold the knee wish one hand and the foot with the other that hee may neither moov his limbs nor stir his buttocks but bee forced to keep in the same posture with his whole bodie Then the Surgeon shall thrust into the urinarie passage even to the bladder a silver or iron and hollow probe Why the probe must bee slit on the outside anointed with oil and opened or slit on the outside that the point of the knife may enter there into and that it may guide the hand of the workman and keep the knife from pierceing anie further into the bodies lying there under The figure of this probe is here exprest Probes with slits in their ends Hee shall gently wrest the probe beeing so thrust in towards the left side Why the seam of the perinaeum must not bee cut and also hee who standeth on the patient 's right hand shall with his left hand gently lift up his cods that so in the free and open space of the left side of the perinaeum the Surgeon may have the more libertie to make the incision upon the probe which is thrust in and turned that way But in making this incision the Surgeon must bee careful that hee hurt not the seam of the perinaeum and fundament For if that seam bee cut it will not bee easily consolidated for that it is callous and bloodless therefore the urine would continually drop forth this way But if the wound bee made too near the fundament there is danger least by forcible plucking forth of the stone hee may break som of the hemorroid veins whence a bleeding may ensue which is scarce to bee stopped by anie means or that hee may rend the sphincter-muscle or bodie of the bladder so that it never can bee repaired
no mean one which standing on a sandy ground was so undermined by a company of Conies that all the houses tumbling and falling down to the ground the Inhabitants were fain to depart and seek new dwellings Of Wolves The deceits and ambushes of Wolves MEn have learnt the Arts of waging War from the Wolves for they come out by Troops and lye in ambush near the Towns which they have appointed and then one of them runs unto the Town and provokes the Dogs And making as if he run away incites the Dogs to follow him until he hath gotten them unto the place where their ambush lyeth which on a sodain appeareth and rusheth out upon them And so they kill and eat all or as many of the Dogs as they are able to catch Of the Fox The craft of the Fox IN subtilty and craft the Fox exceedeth all other Beasts When in the chase the Dogs are at his heels he berays and bepisses his tail and swings it in the face and eyes of the Dogs that follow him and so blinding them in the mean time gets ground of them To fetch the Hens down from their pearch he hath this device he shakes and swings his tail upwards and downwards as if he meant to throw it at them which they fearing tumble down and he takes up one of them for his prey His wariness when he passeth over a River that is frozen is wonderful for he goes softly to the bank and lays his ear to listen if he can hear the noise of the Water running under the Ice The Fox seems to reason with himself For if he can back he goes and will not venture to pass over The knowledg of which thing he could never meerly by his subtilty and craft attain unto but that of necessity he must have some faculty of reasoning joyned with it which by discourse and by proving one thing by another His Sorites arrives at this Conclusion Whatsoever is liquid and maketh a noise is in motion whatsoever liquid is in motion is not concrete and frozen that which is not concrete and frozen is liquid whatsoever is liquid will not bear a heavier body whatsoever will not bear a heavier body cannot with safety be adventured on and therefore back again must I go and not pass over this River Of Swine SWine if in the Woods they hear any one of the same herd with them crying out they straight make a stand and marshalling their forces haste all as if they had been warned by the sound of a martial Trumpet to the assistance of their fellows Of the fishes Scarus and Anthia The love of fishes one to another PLutarch reports of the Scari that when one of them chances to swallow a hook and be taken the rest of the same kind come to his rescue and shearing the Line with their teeth set him at liberty But the readiness of the Anthiae to the mutual assistance of one another is yet more manifest for by casting the Line upon which the hook hangeth on their back with the sharpness of their sins they cut it asunder and so set free themselves and their captived fellows Of the Pilot-fish THere is great kindness between the Pilot-fish and the Whale For although in bulk of body the Whale so far exceed him yet he leads the Whale and goes alwayes before him as his Pilot to keep him from running himself into any straight or muddy place whence he might not easily get out And therefore the Whale always follows him and very willingly suffers himself to be led by him The Whales pilot or guide it being for his own good And in like manner he gets into the Whales mouth and there lodging himself sleeps when he sleeps and leaves him not either by day or night Of Cranes Cranes orders themselves in ranks CRanes when they are to take a long journey into some Countrey cross the Seas put their company in so good order that no Captain can put his Souldiers in better For before they stir out of any place they have as it were their Trumpets to call them together and encourage them to fly They come together and then fly up on high that they may see afar off choosing a Captain whom they are to follow They have their Serjeants to take care of their rancks and keep their nightly watches by turns The sentinel Crane Plutarch tells us that the Crane which is appointed to stand Sentinel for all the rest holds a stone in her foot to the end that if she chance to give way to nature and sleep she may be waked by the noise of the falling stone The leader lifting up his head and stretching out his long neck looks about him far and wide and gives warning to the rest of any danger that may befall them The strongest lead the way that they may the better with the flapping of their wings break the force of the air and this they do by turns And that they may the easilier prevail against the force and opposition of the winds they dispose their company into a wedg in the form of the Greek letter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or a triangle and being skilful in the Stars they fore-see when tempests are coming and fly down to the ground to keep themselves from the injury of the approaching storm Of Geese THe Geese of Sicilie do with great wariness take care that by their keeking and their noise The care of the Geese that their gagling do them no harm they do not expose themselves to the rapacity of Birds of prey for Plutarch saith that when they are to fly over the hill Taurus for fear of the Eagles that are there they hold stones in their mouths to keep themselves from gagling until that they come unto a place where they may be secure Of Dragons NEither are the Dragons less crafty The craft of Dragons fighting against the Elephant for thus do they overcome those vast and otherwise invincible Beasts the Elephants They lye in ambush and sodainly set upon the Elephants when they fear no such matter and involve their legs with the twines of their tail in such sort that they are not able to go forward and stop their nostrils with their heads so that they cannot fetch their breath they pull out their eyes and wheresoever they find the skin most tender there they bite and suck the bloud until they make them fall down dead Pliny saith Lib. 8. cap. 11. 12. that there are Dragons found in Aethiopia of ten Cubits long but that in India there are Dragons of an hundred foot long that fly so high that they fetch Birds and take their prey even from the midst of the Clouds Of the Fish called the Fisherman This Fish is called the Fisherman because he hunts and takes other Fishes The craft of the Fisherman fish in taking her prey which he doth almost by the same cunning which the
part which is covered with a Coat and the Bone lives and is nourished The Figure of the Thigh-Bone A 1 2 The head of the Thigh going into the cup of the Hip-bone B 2 a Sinus in the head of the thigh into which is inserted a round ligament C 1 2 the conjunction of the appendix of the thigh with the Bone it self D 1 2 3 the neck of the thigh E F the two lower heads of the thigh G 1 2. the conjunction of the lower appendix H 1 12 a Sinus betwixt the two heads of the thigh K 2 a part of the lower head of the thigh from whence the first Muscle of the Foot doth proceed L 2 another part from whence the second and first Muscles arise M 2 another part to which the Tendon of the fifth Muscle of the thigh is infixed N 1 2 a Sinus of the outward side of the head for the fourth muscle of the leg O 2 a Sinus of the inside through which the tendons do pass P 2 a protuberation at which the said tendons are reflected Q 2 the upper process of the thigh and betwixt Q and D is the sinus R 1 2 the union of the process with the thigh SS 2 a rough line from the impression of the external processes T 1 the anterior impression of the internal processes β betwixt T and V another impression higher than the former V 1 2 the fourth impression in the top of the process X 3. Four X shew the four appendices of the thigh Y 3. Three Y shew the three heads of the thigh ZZ 3 two processes of the thigh a 1 the interior process of the thigh b 1 the conjunction of the process with the high cc 2 a line descending obliquely from the inner process dd 2 a line running through the length of the thigh e 2 the largeness of the thigh in this part f 1 a roughness from which the eighth Muscle issueth g h 5 a knub of the Whirl-bone going into the sinus marked with I which is betwixt the heads of the thigh i 5 a sinus fitted for the inner head of the thigh k 5 a sinus agreeing with the external head of the thigh l 5 the lower asperity or roughness m 4 the foreside of the pattel or whirl-bone rough and unequal The other Appendix of the thigh that is the lower is the greatest and thickest rising as it were with two heads which are divided by two cavities the one superficiary and on the foreside whereby it receives the Whirl-bone of the Knee the other deep and on the back-part by which it receives the gristly and as it were bony-ligaments proceeding from the eminencie which is seen between the two cavities of the upper Appendix of the Bone of the Leg which Hippocrates lib. de fracturis calls in his tongue Diaphysis CHAP. XXXV Of the Muscles moving the Thigh THe Muscles of the Thigh are just fourteen in number that is two bend it Their number whereupon they are called Flexores or benders three extend it whereupon they are called Tensores extenders three move it inwards driving the Knee outwards and drawing the heel inwards as when we cross our Legs yet some make these three one and call it the Triceps or three-headed Muscle Six spread it abroad and dilate it as happens in the act of Venery Four of these are called Gemini or Twins by reason of the similitude of their thickness original insertion and action the two other are called Obturatores because they stop the hole which is common to the Share and Back-bone Now one of the two Flexores being round The two Flexores descends on the inside with fibers of an unequal length from all the transverse processes of the loins above the hind-commissure of the Hanch and Share-bones and is inserted into the little Trochanter the other broader and larger from the original passes forth of the whole lip and inner brow of the Hanch-bone and filling the inner cavity thereof is inserted above the fore-part of the head of the Thigh into the little Trochanter by a thick Tendon which it with the fellow Muscle lately described produces even from the fleshy part thereof wherefore you need to take no great pains in drawing or plucking them away The three Tensores or Extenders make the Buttocks of which the first being the thicker The three Tensores larger and external arising from the Rump the Holy-bone and more then half of the exteriour and hinder lip of the Hanch-bone is inserted by oblique fibers some four-fingers bredth from the great Trochanter at the right-line which we said resembled an Asses-back The second which is the middle in bigness and site descends from the rest of the lip and from the fore and out-ward Rib of the Hanch-bone and above the midst of the Bone is inserted into the upper part of the great Trochanter by a triangular insertion above the upper and exterior part thereof The third being lesser shorter and thinner lying hid under these former proceeds from the middle of the external surface of the Hanch-bone and then is inserted into the greater part of the right line of the great Trochanter These three Muscles have a great and large original but a narrow insertion as it were by oblique fibers Then follow those three Muscles which move the Thighs inwards straiten and cross them Three Intromoventes so that the Knee stands forwards or outwards but the heel is drawn inwards as you may understand by their insertion although some think otherwise But these three Muscles by their original partly fleshy and partly membranous arise from the upper and fore-part of the circumference of the Share-bone and thence are inserted into the hind-line of the huckle-bone some higher than othersome for the lesser and shorter stays at the roots of the little Trochanter the middle descends a little deeper the third with the longest of his fibers descends even to the midst of the line This if it be so that is these Muscles proceeding from the fore and upper part to be inserted into the hinder-line of the Huckle-bone whilst they alone perform their action and draw the Thighs together they will turn them outwards just so as when we put them across but they will not draw one heel to another and put the heel outwards for such like motion is performed by the inner vast Muscle of the Thigh moving the Leg. Now follow the six which move the Buttocks The first and higher of the Quadragemini or the four Twin-muscles The movers of the Buttocks passes forth of the commissure of the Holy-bone with the bone of the Rump or rather from the lowest extream of the Holy-bone and thence it is inserted into the cavity of the great Trochanter by a Tendon of a sufficient largeness The second proceeding from the hollow part or fissure which is between the extremity of the Huckle-bone and the tuberosity or swelling out of the same is inserted
in another place observed of two oblique motions concurring in one is made a right motion and besides almost all the motions of the body are thus performed the Muscles which perform such motions are placed and opposed in an oblique life as may be perceived by the motions and site of the Muscles of the Hand taken in general The third called the Rectus or Right because it descends above the Crureus The Rectus alongst the right fore-line of the Thigh between the two vast Muscles comes forth between the extremity of the Appendix of the Hanch-bone and cavity thereof with a very strong Ligament and then is inserted into the fore-part of the Leg passing over the midst of the Whirl-bone of the Knee it extends the Leg with the three following but by accident it may help the bending of the Thigh The fourth and fifth are called Vasti vast or huge Muscles by reason of their largeness The two Vasti the one of these is internal the other external they both arise with right fibers from their original but with oblique at their insertion by reason whereof they both seem to have a compound action from a right and oblique motion the right helping for the extention of the Leg but the oblique to draw one Knee to another or to disjoyn both the Knees the internal comes by its right fibers from the root of the little Trochanter but by its oblique from the inner descendent line of the Thigh The external passes forth by its right fibers from the root of the great Trochanter but by the oblique from the external descendent line of the same bone But all these fibers are in certain places so mixed with the Crureus that they cannot be separated unless you violate the one of them they go into the Leg each on his side above the Whirlbone of the knee alongst the sides of the right Muscle with which it makes an unseparable tendon as you shall presently hear The Crureus The sâ—xt and last of these fore Muscles called Crureus or Thigh-muscle by reason of the strait and firm adhesion which it hath with the Thigh-bone which is by some called Crui from the space between the two Trochanters descends under the right-Muscles and two vast Muscles into the fore-part of the Thigh even to the Whirl-bone of the Knee But we must note that these four last Muscles make a common thick and broad Tendon with which they cover the Patella or Whirl-bone and all the fore dearticulation of the Knee that they cannot be separated without tearing wherefore we must think that this Tendon serves the Knee for a Ligament now all these Muscles performing their action together extend the Leg. The five hind-Muscles follow to be spoken of of which three arise from the tuberosity of the Huckle-bone going into the inner part the fourth from the middle of the Pubis called Biceps that is the two-headed Muscle into the outside of the Leg. The three Internal Of the internal one passing from the fore-mentioned tuberosity descends Ligamentous even into the midst of the Thigh and then becoming fleshy is inserted by its Tendon after the manner we formerly mentioned The other being slender passing forth also from the same place with its Tendon is inserted with the Tendon of the Long-Muscle and ends in the inner part of the Leg which with its companion it draws inwardly and brings to the other which same thing it performs in the Thigh by the help of the three-headed Muscle The third being the inner or hinder descends from the middle part of the Share-bone with a broad and slender Ligament and is inserted with a round Tendon into the inner part of the Leg after the manner of the fore-mentioned The fourth called Biceps takes one of the two Heads of which it consists The Biceps or two-headed Muscle from the last mentioned tuberosity the other from the outer-line of the Thigh but is inserted into the external part of the Leg as we formerly said The fifth and last called the Popliteus descends obliquely fleshy from the external condyle or knot of the Thigh into the inner and hinder part of the Leg The Popliteus or Ham-Muscle at the joyning thereof to the Shin-bone the action thereof is to draw the Leg after a manner inwards CHAP. XXXVIII Of the Bones of the Foot THe Order of Anatomy requires that we now prosecute the Muscles moving the Foot but because we should in vain deliver their insertion the disposition and condition of the Bones of the foot not being first known therefore it first behoves us to set forth their description Therefore the Bones of the Foot are six and twenty in number distinguished into three ranks that is the Bones of the Tarsus or Instep are seven those of the Pedium Their number The bones of the Instep The Asâ—â—â—gâ—lus its 〈◊〉 connexionâ— and their use the After-wrist or Back of the Foot five and those of the Toes fourteen Of the seven Bones of the Instep there are four nanmed and three unnamed The first of the named immediately following the Bones of the Leg is called Astragalus the Pastern or Ankle-bone This hath three connexions one as we said before in the upper and broader part with the Bones of the Leg of which it is received the other in the lower and hind-part by which it receives the upper and inner process of the Bone of the heel the third on the foreside by which it is received in the cavity of the Os Naviculare or Scaphoides that is the Boat-like bone By the first connexion the foot is extneded and bended by the second it is moved with the heel to the sides the two first Connexions are by Diarthrosis the last by Synarthrosis But it is strengthned by strong and broad Ligaments descending and ascending from one Bone into another also they are strengthned by Membranes Muscles and Tendons descending to the Foot above and under these Joynts It s three processes But this Bone hath three processes as three Feet fastned to the Bone of the heel of which the first and least is under the out-Ankle the bigger which Galen saith makes a round head fastned on a long Neck looks towards the fore-part of the foot over against the great Toe and the next Toe to it the middlemost is at the Heel behind the Leg-bone The Figure of the Bones of the Foot properly so called Figure 1 and 2. shew the Bones of the right Foot fastned together their upper Face and their neither Face Fig. 3 4 5 and 6. shew the upper lower inner and outer sides of the Talus or Pastern Fig. 7 8 9. shew the same sides of the Heel Fig. 10 and 11. shew the forward and backward side of the Boat-bone Fig. 12 13. shew the fore and back-part of the Wrist made of four Bones A B C D 3 5 6. The protuberation of the Talus joyned to the appendix of the Leg-bone and of
this protuberation four sides EE 3 a Sinus insculped in the protuberation of the Talus FF 3 two bunching parts of the Talus G 3 the inner side of the proturberation of the Talus crusted over with a gristle joyned to the inner Ankle H 6 the outward Sinus of the protuberation of the Talus covered over with a Gristle receiving the inner Ankle I 5 a rough Sinus of the Talus receiving a gristly Ligament from the inner Ankle K 6 a Sinus of the Talus receiving a gristly Ligament from the outward Ankle L M 5 6 two Sinus in the hinder part of the Talus N 3 4 5 6 the neck of the Talus or Pastern-bone O 3 4 5 6 the head of the Talus going under the Sinus of the Boat-bone P 7 8 9 the head of the Heel crusted over with a gristle and going under the Sinus of the Talus or the Pastern-bone Q 4 a large Sinus of the Talus receiving the head of the Heel R 7 8 9 a Sinus of the Heel whereto the lower part of the head of the Talus is joyned S 4 the lower power of the head of the Talus going into the Sinus of the Heel TT 4 a sharp Sinus of the Heel receiving a gristly Ligament from the Pastern-bone X Y Z 2 the place of the Heel Y Z 2 Y 8 Z 9 a process of the Heel made for the production of Muscles a b 7 8 9 from a to b the distance of the upper part of the heel c 8 9 the hinder-part of the Heel d 2 8 the inner side of the Heel e 8 the place where the Tendons that run to the bottom of the foot are reflected f 7 8 the utter side of the Heel g 1. 7 9 here the Tendons of the seven and eight Muscles of the Foot are stretched out h 7 the fore-part of the Heel which is joyned to the Pastern-bone i 7 that part of the Heel which is joyned to the Cube-bone k 11 the Sinus of the Boat-bone receiving the head of the Talus l m n 10 three surfaces of the Boat-bone lightly prominent which are articulated to the Bones of the Wrist o p 11 the upper part of the Boat-bone regarding the top of the Foot q r 10 and q 11. his lower part q 10 11 a Sinus through which the sixt Muscle of the foot is led s t u 13 the plain surfaces of the three inner-bones of the Wrist whereby they are articulated to the Boat-bone x 13 a shallow Sinus of the Cube-bone whereby it is articulated to the Heel α β 12 the place of the Cube-bone to which that Bone of the After-wrist is joyned which supporteth the last Toe save one γ 12 13 the place of the Cube-bone where the third Bone of the Wrist is articulated δ 12 13 that part of the Cube-bone which respecteth the outside of the foot ◠12 13 the surface of the Cube-bone in the upper part of the Foot ζ 2 13 that part of the Cube-bone which regardeth the earth ε 2 a Sinus of the Cube-bone at which the Tendon of the seventh Muscle of the foot is reflected R 13 a process of the third Bone of the Wrist whereinto the fift Muscle of the Foot is inserted ι 12 the place of the inner-bone of the Wrist to which that Bone of the After-wrist which sustaineth the great is coupled κ 12 the place of the second Bone of the Wrist whereto the Bone of the After-wrist that supporteth the fore Toe is articulated λ 12. the place of the third Bone of the Wrist whereto that Bone of the Afterwrist which supporteth the middle Toe is articulated μ 1 2 a small Bone whereby that Bone of the After-wrist which sustaineth the little one is joyned unto the Cube-bone νν 1 2 the distances betwixt the Bones of the After-wrist ξξ 1 2 the heads of the Bones of the After-wrist which enter into the bosomes of the Toes ο 2 a process of the Bone of the After-wrist wherein the Tendon of the seventh Muscle of the foot is implanted δ 2 a process of the Bone of the After-wrist which sustaineth the little Toe which process receiveth the tendon of the muscle of the Foot s τ υ 1 2 the three Bones of the Fore-toe ◠ο 2 two Seed-bones placed under that Bone of the After-wrist which sustaineth the great Toe * 2 under X a Seed-bone set to the second joynt of the great Toe Γ 1 2 the Talus or Pastern Δ 1 2 the Heel Τ 1 2 the Boat-bone Λ Ξ 1 2 the Bones of the Toes φ X 1 2 Two Bones of the great Toe I II III IV V 1. the five Bones of the After-wrist I pass over in silence many other things as the smoothness and asperity or roughness of the Bone which I had rather you should learn by ocular Inspection than by Book The second bone lying under this is called the Calcaneum or Heel-bone being the biggest of all the Bones of the Foot upon which all the Body relies when we go It hath two upper processes the one great The description of the Calcaneum or Calx the other little The great is received in the hind and outer process of the Astragalus the lesser is received on the inside in the third process of the same bone the which we said had a round head fastned to a long Neck Besides it is round on the hind-part and much disjoyned from the Leg-bone but on the fore and longer part it is knit by Synarthrosis to the Die-bone whose lower and inner part it seems to receive the superficies thereof is wholly unequal and rising up with many swellings On the inner side it makes as it were a channel so to give way as well to the vessels as tendons going to the sole of the foot and toes Lastly we must consider the holes by which the vessels pass into that bone to give it nourishment by reason of which vessels the fracture of this heel-bone is very dangerous because of the pressing and contusion of the Vessels as Hippocrates shews For the ligaments of this heel or heel-bone they are such Why a fracture of the heel is so dangerous Hippocrates Sect. 3. lib. de fracturis The Os Scaphoides or boat-like-bone as these of the Astragalus to wit tendons membranes and ligaments properly so called coming from one Bone to another The third bone of the foot is named Scaphoides or Boat-like from the resemblance it hath to a Boat for on that part which looks towards the Pastern-bone it is hollow but on that part which is next the three Innominata or nameless bones which it sustains and of which it is received as it in the cavity thereof receives the head of the Astragalus it is gibbous like the bottom of a Boat The connexions thereof are by Synarthrosis and they are strengthened by the fore-mentioned ligaments this same Bone is arched on the upper part but somewhat hollowed or flatted below the inner part
the fragments of bones are by a providence of nature glued and sowdred together by a Callus Wherefore broken bones have very much need of rest Rest necessary for the knitting of set bones to the generating of a Callus otherwise the matter thereof flowing down quickly flowes away and nothing is done You may much help forwards the generation of a Callus which is begun about the thirteenth or fifteenth day by applying an emplaister made with the white of an egg having the powder of red rose-leaves and wheat-flour mixed therewith and catagmatick plaisters which shall hereafter be described in speaking of the fracture of a Leg. CHAP. XXI Of the fracture of the Thigh nigh to the joint or the upper or lower head of the bone A Fracture sometimes happens at the joint of the hip in the neck of the thigh-bone A History as I once observed in an honest matron I being called to her when I had observed the hurt thigh to be shorter than the whole with the outward prominency of the Ischium which at the first sight I supposed to proceed from the head of the thigh-bone I presently perswaded my self it was a dislocation and no fracture I then therefore extended the bone and forced as I thought the head thereof into its cavity The equality of both the legs in bigness which followed upon this extension encreased my perswasion that it was a dislocation The next day I visited her the second time and found her in great pain her hurt leg the shorter and her foot wrested inwards Then I loosed all her ligatures and perceived such a prominency as I did formerly Wherefore I endeavoured again to force in the head of the bone as I formerly did But as I was busied therein I heard a little crackling and also I considered that there was no cavity nor depression in the joint by which signs I certainly perswaded my self that the bone was broken and not dislocated Neither only such kind of fractures Another fracture of the thigh resembling a luxation but also the separation of the appendix or head of this bone from its place may induce one to think it a dislocation which thing hath sometimes deceived some heedless Surgeons who have not dreamt of the divulsion or separation of the appendix from the top of the thigh-bone but have judged it only a dislocation Then therefore that I may return to my former narration I set the bone and joined the fragments together laid thereupon splints with compresses made ligations with a rowler having two heads wrapped about the joint and the body cross-wise and I defended her foot with a case that none of the cloths might press it I fastned a rope to a poste and so let it come down into the midst of the bed and tyed many knots thereon for the better taking hold and lifting up her self the which thing you must alwayes doe in fractures and dislocations of the thigh and leg that so your Patients may have some stay whereby they may succour themselves with their hands as oft as they desire to rise or lift themselves up in their beds or go to stool as also that they may give perspiration and as it were ventilation to the loins buttocks rump and other parts compressed and wearied with long lying for want whereof they are molested with heat and pain whence ulcers arise which oft-times torment the Patient with such tormenting heat and pain that he is even consumed by a feaver watchings and want of rest Why the fracture of a bone near a joint is more dangerous This opportunity of raising the body out of the bed is by so much the more needfull in this place by how much the fracture is nearer the joint for there it is more dangerous than in the midst of the thigh and consequently more difficult to dress and heal for that the part is bloodless and by reason of the multitudes of the nerves tendons and ligaments which are obnoxious to many malign symptoms But the Surgeon must have diligent care in this kind of fracture and must look often that the bone which is set doe not fall forth again which easily happens here by any light stirring of the body and the like occasion for that the thigh hath but one only bone Therefore as oft as the Bandages shall be loosed and the fracture dressed he shall attentively view the figure of the bone and the magnitude of the affected part comparing it with the sound for the set and composed fragments of the broken bone can scarce fall asunder but that the one must lye upon the other But before it be knit the part must be extended and restored to its state that so the Patient may not halt during the residue of his life Lib. 3. sent 6. tract 1. c. 14. For I have read it written in Avicen that scarce any do so well recover a fractured thigh that they do not halt thereof therefore the Patient must be carefull that he move himself or his body as little as he can Many of the Ancients have set down the time of the consolidation of this bone to be fifty dayes In what space the thigh-bone may be knit but as I formerly said there can be no certain or determinate time hereof But in what time soever this bone shall be knit the Patient must not stand or go thereon presently upon it for that there remains a weakness in the part a long time after so that the Patients are forced to use crutches to go withall in the mean space while they recover more strength CHAP. XXII Of the fracture of the Patella or Whirle-bone of the knee The Differences THe whirle-bone of the knee is oft-times contused but not so frequently broken yet when that happens it goes into two or three pieces sometimes long-wise sometimes athwart Sometimes it is broken in the midst and some whiles shivered into many splinters and all these either with Signs or without a wound The signs are impotency in going a hollowness in that place and a sensible separation of the fragments of the hurt part and the crackling of these parts under your hand Cure It is set after this manner wish the Patient to stretch forth his leg yea he must keep it extended all the while untill it be knit and therefore lest he should bend it unawares the hollowness of the ham shall be filled with a boulster for by bending of the knee the set fragments of the whirl-bone would again fly in sunder This being done the fragments shall by the hand of the Surgeon be set as is fitting and be kept so set by the application of convenient remedies making ligatures and applying junks as we said must be done in the fracture of the thigh-bone And lastly you must observe and do in this as in the fracture of a leg For the prognostick this I affirm that I have seen none of those who have had this bone fractured
to this or that side The cause hereof may seem to depend upon the different dearticulation of the ell and wand with the hand or wrist For the Wand which is articulated on the lower part with the wrist at the thumb by its upper part whilest it receives the outward swelling or condyle of the Ell in its cavity performs the circular motions of the hands But the Cubit or Ell which in like sort is connected on the lower part by Diarthrosis at the little finger with the Wrist being articulated on the upper part with the shoulder-bone bends and extends or stretches forth the hand There is one way to restore the formerly mentioned dislocations The arm on one side and the hand on another must be extended upon a hard resisting and smooth place so that it may lye flat and you must have a care that the part whence the dislocated bone fell be the lower in its site and place and the part whither it is gone the higher Then to conclude the prominencies of the bones must be pressed down by the hand of the Surgeon untill by the force of compression and site the luxated bones be thrust and forced into their places and cavities CHAP. XXXVI Of the dislocated bones of the Wrist Sign THe Wrist consists of eight bones which cannot unless by extraordinary violence be put or fall out of their places Yet if they shall at any time fall out they will shew it by the tumour of the part whereto they are gone and by the depression of that wherefrom they are fled They may be restored Cure if the diseased hand be extended upon a Table and if the bones shall be dislocated inwards the hand shall be placed with the palm upwards then the Surgeon shall with the palm of his hand press down the eminencies of the bones and force each bone into its place But if the luxation be outwards he shall lay the palm next to the table and press it after the same manner To conclude if the luxation shall be toward either side the luxated bones shall be thrust towards the contrary and the restored bones shall be presently contained in their places with fit remedies binding rowling and carrying the hand in a scarf CHAP. XXXVII Of the dislotaled bones of the After-wrist THere are four bones in the Palm or After-wrist the two middlemost whereof cannot bee dislocated side-waies becaus thay are hindred and kept from falling aside by the opposition of the parts as it were resisting them Celsus lib. 8. cap. 18. Neither can that which answereth to the little finger nor that whereon the fore-fingers rest's bee dislocated towards that side which is next the middle bones whereof wee now spake but onely on the other side free'd from the neighbor-hood of the bones but all of them may bee dislocated inwardly and outwardly They may bee restored as those of the Wrist CHAP. XXXVIII Of the dislocated Finger ALso the bones of the fingers may bee four several waies dislocated inwardly outwardly and at each side To restore them they must bee laid straight upon a table and so put into joint again For thus they may bee easily restored Why the dislocated fingers may bee easily restored by reason their sockets are not deep and their joints are shorter and ligaments less strong In twelv daies space they will recover their strength as also those dislocations that happen to the Wrist and After-wrist CHAP. XXXIX Of a dislocated Thigh or Hip. THe Thigh or Hip may bee disloeated and fall forth towards all the four parts But most frequently inwards next to that outwards Hisp sent 68. sect 3. de art but verie seldom either forwards or backwards A subluxation cannot happen in this joint as neither in the shoulder especially from an external caus contrarie to which it usually happen's in the elbow hand knee and foot The caus hereof is for that the heads of the thigh and shoulder-bone are exactly round and the sockets which receiv them have certain borders and edges encompassing them hereunto may bee added Gal com ad sent 47. sect 4â— de art that strong muscles encompass each dearticulation so that it cannot com to pass that part of the heads of such bones may bee contained in the cavitie and other parts stand or fall forth but that they will quickly bee restored to their places by the motion and wheeling about of the joint and the strength of the encompassiing muscles But a subluxation may seem to happen in these parts from an internal caus For then the ligaments and ties being softned and relaxed cannot draw and carrie back the head of the bone standing forth so far as the edges of the socket If the Hip bee dislocated towards the inner part A subluxation may befal the Thigh from an internal caus that leg beecom's longer and larger than the other but the knee appear's somwhat lower and look's outwardly with the whole foot neither can the patient stand upon his leg To conclude the head of the Thigh-bone bewray's it self lying in the groin with a swelling manifest both to the eie and hand now the leg is longer than that which is sound for that the head of the thigh is out of it's socket or cavitie and situated lower to wit in the groin therefore the leg is made by so much the larger Now the knee stand's forth becaus necessarily the lower head of the thigh-bone stand's contrary to the socket For this is common to all dislocated bones that when as the dislocation happen's to the one side the other end of the bone flie's out to the contrarie Whence it is that if the upper-head of the thigh-bone shall fall inwards then the other head which is at the knee must necessarily look outwards The like happen's in other dislocations The leg cannot bee bended towards the groin for that the dislocated bone hold's the extending muscles of the same part so stiffly stretched out that they cannot yield or applie themselvs to the benders For flexion or bending ought to precede extension and extension flexion CHAP. XL. Prognosticks belonging to a dislocated Hip. Why the thigh bone dislocated is difficultly restored or restored easily fal's out again THere is this danger in the dislocation of the Hip that either the bone cannot bee put into the place again at least unles with very much trouble or els beeing put in that it may presently fall out again For if the tendons of the muscles the ligaments and other nervous parts of the member bee hard and strong they by reason of their contumacie and stifness will hardly suffer the bone to return to its place If that they bee soft loos effeminate and weak they will not contain the restored bone in its place Neither will it bee any better contained if that short but yet strong and round ligament which fasten's the head of the Thigh-bone on the infide in the Socket or Cavitie of the huckle-bone bee broken
Hippocrates wcich is read with a negative in these words Paul Aeg. lib. 6. c. 8. Hip. sent 91 sect 3. lib. de artic Sed neque conflectere quemadmodum sanum crus possunt that they ought to bee read with an affirmative after this manner Sed conflectere c. quin crus ipsum c. But now the lame leg will better sustain the weight of the bodie in an external then in an internal dislocation for then the head of the thigh is more perpendiculary subject to the whole weight of the bodie Therefore when in the success of time it shall by wearing have made it self a cavitie in the neighboring bone which in time will bee confirmed so that there will remain no hope of restoring the dislocation nevertheless the patient shall bee able to goe without a staff for that then no sens of pain will trouble him whence it follow 's that the whole leg also will becom less lean for that going is less painful neither are the vessels so much pressed as in that dislocation which is made inwardly CHAP. XLII Of the thigh-bone dislocated forwards IT seldom happeneth that the thigh is dislocated forwards yet when as it shall happen it is by these signs The head of the thigh lieth towards the share whence the groins swell up and the buttock on the contrarrie is wrinckled and extenuated by reason of the contraction of the muscles the patient cannot extend his leg without paine no verily not so mach as bend it towards the groin for the fore-muscle which ariseth from the hanch-bone is so pressed by the head of the thigh that it cannot bee distended neither can the ham bee bended without very much paine But the same leg is equal at the heel with the other leg yet the patient cannot stand upon the setting on of the toes therfore when hee is forced to go hee toucheth the ground with his heel only yea verily the sole of his foot is less inclined to the fore side neither doth it seldom happen that the urine by this accident Stopping of urine by reason of an internal dislocation of thigh-bone is suppre'st because the head of the thigh oppresse's the greater nervs from whence those arise which are carried to the bladder which through the occasion of this compression is painted and inflamed by consent now when inflammation shall seiz upon the Spinct-muscle the urine can scarcely flow out for that it is hindred by the swelling CHAP. XLIII Of the Thigh-bone dislocated backwards SEldom also is the thigh-bone dislocated backwards Signs becaus the hind-part of the cavitie of the huckle-bone is deeper and more depressed than the fore whence it is that the dislocation of the thigh to the inner part is more frequent than the rest The patient can neither extend nor bend his leg by reason of the much compression and tention of the muscles which encompass the head of the thigh by this kind of luxation But the pain is encreased when hee would bend his ham for that then the muscles are more strongly extended The lame leg is shorter than the sound when the Buttocks are pressed the head of the thigh is perceived hid amongst the muscles of that part but the opposit groin is lax soft and depre'st with a manifest cavitie The heel touche's not the ground for that the head of the thigh is plucked back again by the muscles of the buttocks amongst which it lieth hid but principally by that which is the larger and which is said to make as it were the pillow or cushion of the buttocks for this is much more pressed in this kinde of dislocation than the rest whence it is that the patient cannot bend his knee becaus the extention of the nervous production or large tendon which covers's the knee is so great But if the patient wil stand upon the foot of his luxated leg without a staff hee shall fall down backwards for that the bodie is inclined to that part the head of the thigh being not directly underneath for the propping or bearing up of the bodie wherefore hee is forced to sustain himself upon a crutch on his lame side Having promised these things of the differences signs symtoms and prognosticks it now remaineth that wee briefly describe the different waies of restoring them according to the difference of the parts whither it is fallen First you must place the patient upon a bench or table The general cure groveling or with his face upwards or upon one side laying som soft quilt or coverlid under him that hee may lie the easier Now you must place him so that the part unto which the bone is flown may be higher but from whence it is fled the lower For if the thigh-bone bee dislocated outwards or backwards then must the patient bee laid groveling if inwardly upon his back if forwards then upon his side Then must extention and impulsion bee made towards the cavitie that so it may be forced thereinto but if the dislocation bee fresh and in a soft bodie as a woman childe and such like whose joints are more lax it shall not bee any waies needful to make great extention with strong ligatures for the restoring it the Surgeon's hand shall suffice or a list or towel cast about it In the interim the bone shall bee kept fast with compresses applied about the joint then the Surgeon shall extend the thigh taking hold thereof above the knee in a straight line and so set it directly again the cavitie and then presently thrust it thereinto For thus shall hee restore it if so bee that in thrusting it hee lift up the head thereof somwaht higher lest the lips of the cavitie force it back and hinder it from entring Now becaus unless there bee just extension there can bee no restitution hoped for it is far better in that part Sect. 2. lib. de fract that is to extend in somwhat more then is necessarie yet so that you do not endanger the breaking of any muscles tendon or other nervous bodie For that as Hippocrates write's when as the muscles are strong and large you may safely extend them if so bee that you displace nothing by the force of the extension If your hand will not suffice to make just extension you must use the help of an Engine such as is our Pulley fastned to two posts so much of the rope beeing let forth and drawn up again as shal suffice for the business in hand in the performance whereof it is fit that the patients friends absent themselvs from this sad spectacle and that the Surgeon bee resolute and not deterred from his business by the lamentation neither of the patient nor his friends But for that wee write these things chiefly for the benefit of young practicioners it seemeth meet that haveing delivered these things in general of restoring the thigh-bone that wee run over these generalities in each particular begining with that dislocation which is made
without a passage in their fundament Neither have I seldom seen infants born without any hole in their fundament so that I have been constrained with a knife to cut in sunder the membrane or cunicle that grew over and stopped it And how can such excrements be engendred when the childe being in the womb is nourished with the more laudable portion of the menstrual blood therefore the issue or childe is wont to yeeld or avoid two kindes or sorts of excrements so long as he is in the womb that is to say sweat and urine in both which he swims but they are separated by themselves by a certain tunicle called Allantoïdes as it may be seen in kids dogs sheep and other brute beasts for as much as in mankinde the tunicle Chorion and Allantoïdes or Farciminalis be all one membrane If the woman be great of a man-childe she is more merry strong Aph. 24. sect 5 and better-coloured all the time of her childe-bearing but if a woman-childe she is ill coloured because that women are not so hot as men The males begin to stir within three moneths and an half but females after if a woman conceive a male-childe she hath all her right parts stronger to every work wherefore they do begin to set forwards their right foot first in going and when they arise they lean on the right arm Aph. 47. sect 5. the right dug will sooner swell and wax hard the male-childe stir more in the right side then in the left and the female-children rather in the left then in the right side CHAP. XIII With what travail the Childe is brought into the world and of the cause of this labour and travail WHen the natural prefixed and prescribed time of childe-birth is come the childe being then grown greater requires a greater quantity of food which when he cannot receive in sufficient measure by his navel with great labour and striving he endeavoreth to get forth therefore then he is moved with a stronger violence and doth break the membranes wherein he is contained Then the womb because it is not able to endure such violent motions nor sustain or hold up the childe any longer by reason that the conceptacles of the membranes are broken asunder is relaxed and then the childe pursuing the air which he feeleth to enter in at the mouth of the womb which then is very wide and gapeing Why the infant is born sometimes with his head forwards is carryed with his head downwards and so commeth into the world with great pain both unto it self and also unto his Mother by reason of the tenderness of his body and also by reason of the nervous neck of h s mothers womb In the time childe-birth the bones of Ilium and Os sacrum are drawn and extended one from another and separation of the bone called Os Ilium from the bone called Os sacrum For unless those bones were drawn in sunder how could not only twins that cleave fast together but also one childe alone come forth at so narrow a passage as the neck of the womb is Not only reason but also experience confirmeth it for I opened the bodies of women presently after they have died of travail in child-birth in whome I have found the bones of Ilium to be drawn the bredth of ones finger from Os sacrum and moreover in many unto whom I have been called being in great extremity of difficult and hard travail I have not only heard but also felt the bones to cracle and make a noise when I laid my hand upon the coccyx or rump by the violence of the distention Also honest matrons have declared unto me that they themselves a few dayes before the birth have felt and hard the noise of those bones separating themselves one from another with great pain Also a long time after the birth many do feel great pain and ach about the region of the coccyx and Os sacrum so that when nature is not able to repair the dissolved continuity of the bones of Ilium they are constrained to halt all the dayes of their life after But the bones of the share called Ossa pubis An Italian fable I have never seen to be separated as many do also affirm It is reported that in Italy the coccyx or rump in alâ— Maidens is broken that when they come to be married they may bear children with lesser travail in childe-birth but this is a forged tale for that bone being broken is naturally and of its own accord repaired and joyned together again with a Callus whereby the birth of the childe will be more difficult and hard CHAP. XIV Of the situation of the infant in the womb The situation of the infant in the womb is diverse REason cannot shew the certain situation of the infant in the womb for I have found it altogether uncertain variable and diverse both in living and dead women in the dead by opening their bodies presently after they were dead and in the living by helping them by the industry of my hand when they have been in danger of perishing by travail of childe-birth for by putting my hand into the womb I have felt the infant comming forth sometimes with his feet forwards sometimes with his hands and sometimes wish his hands and feet turned backwards and sometimes forwards as the figure following plainly describeth I have often found them coming forth with their knees forwards and sometimes with one of the feet and sometimes with their belly forwards their hands and feet being lifted upwards as the former figure sheweth at large Sometimes I have found the Infant coming with his feet downwards striding a wide somtimes headlong stretching one of his arms downward out at length and that was an Hermaphrodite as this figure plainly declareth One time I observed in the birth of twins that the one came with his head forwards and the other with his feet according as here I have thought good to describe them In the bodies of women that died in travail of childe I have sometimes found children no bigger then if they had been but four moneths in the womb situated in a round compass like a hoop with their head bowed down to their knees with both their hands under the knees and their â—eels close to their buttocks And moreover I protest before God that I sound a childe being yet alive in the body of his mother whom I opened so soon as she was dead lying all along stretched out with his face upwards and the palms of his hands joyned together as if he were at prayer CHAP. XV. Which is the legitimate and natural and which the illegitimate or unnatural time of childe-birth TO all living creatures except Man the time of conception and bringing forth their young is certain and definite but the issue of Man commeth into the world Mankinde hath no cerâ—tin time to bringing forth young sometimes in the seventh sometimes in
of the length of ones hand plain from the crown even to the beak the beak being divided to the middle region of the eye being roundish at the end thereof B. The neck a yard long consisting of seventeen Vertebrae each whereof on each side is furnished with a transverse process locking downwards of some fingers length excepting the two which are next the head as which want these and are joyned together by Ginglymos C. The back is of a foots length consisting of seven Vertebrae D. The holy-bone of two foot long in whose top there is a transverse process under which there lies a great hole E. Three more but less F. G. H. After which there follows the cavity or socket whereinto the head of the thigh bone is received and hid This externally and on the side produceth a perforated bone noted with the letter I perforated I say at the beginning for it is presently united at the letter K. then it is forked and divided into two other bones whereof one is bigger then the other The less is noted with the letter L. then they are both united at the letter M. each of them is half a foot and four inches long But from that part whereas they first begun to be divided to what whereas they are united there is a hole some four fingers broad but the length of ones hand or more and it is noted with the letter N. The residue of the bone is like to a pruning knife three inches broad but six in length the end whereunder is the letter O. it is joyned by coalition P. The rump consisting of nine Vertebrae like to a mans The thigh bones are two whereof that which is noted with the letter Q. is of the length of a foot and of thickness equal to a horses thigh The other next under which peradventure you may call the leg-bone noted with R. is a foot and half long it hath joyned thereto the Fibula or lesser focil of the length but which grows smaller as it comes lower S. Is the leg to which foot adheres being one foot and a half long divided at the end into two claws the one bigger the other less whereof each one consists of three bones T. Eight ribs which are inserted into the Sternon the three middlemost of these have a bony production like to a hook V. Is the Sternon consisting of one bone of some foot 's length representing a buckler to this there is joyned another bone which stretched over the three first ribs is in stead of clavicles or collar-bones X. The fi st bone of the wing which is one foot and half long Y. Two bones under this equivalant to the ell and wand under which there are six other bones composing the point of the wing noted with Z. This whole Sceleton is seven foot long and so many foot or more high from the feet to the beak there are many other observable things in his composure but I have thought fit to omitt them for brevitie sake The effigies of a Manucodiata or bird Paradise Tom. 2. l. 21. cap. 22. We have read in Thevets Cosmography that he saw a bird in America which in that country speech is called Touca in this very monstrous and deformed for that the beak in length and thickness exceeds the bigness of the rest of the body it feeds on pepper as the black-birds and felfars with us do upon Ivie-berries which are not less hot then pepper A certain Gentleman of Provence brought a bird of this kinde from that country ro present it to King Charls the ninth but dying in the way he could not present it alive Wherefore the King wished the Mareschal de Rets to give her to me that I might take forth her bowels and embalm her that she might be kept amongst the Kings rarities I did what I could yet not long after she rotted she resembled a crow in body and feathers but had a yellowish beak clear smooth and toothed like a saw and of such length and thickness as we formerly mentioned I keep it yet as a certain monstrous thing Tom. 1 cap 11. lib. 4. Thevet writes that in the Island Zocotera there is frequently found a certain wilde beast called Hulphalis of the bigness of an Ethiopian Monky It is a very monstrous creature but in nothing more then that it is thought to live upon the air only the skin as if it were died in grain is of a scarlet colour yet it is in some places spotted and variegated it hath a round-head like to a boul with feet round broad and wanting hurtful nails The Moors kill it and use to eat the flesh of it being first bruised that so it may be the more tender Thevet tom 1. lib. 11. cap. 13. In the Realm of Camota of Ahob of Benga and other mountains of Cangipa Plimatiq and Catagan which are in the inner India beyond the river of Ganges some five degrees beyond the Tropick of Cancer is found a beast which the Western Germans call Giraff This beast in head ears and cloven feet is not much unlike our Doe it hath a very slender neck but is some six foot long and there are few beasts that exceed him in the length of their legs his tail is round but reacheth no further them his hams his skin is exceeding beautiful yet sowewhat rough having hair thereon somewhat longer then a Cow it is spotted and variegated in some places with spots of a middle colour between white and chesnut so as Leopards are for which cause by some Greek Historians it is called Cameleopardalis it is so wilde before it be taken that with the good-will it will not so much as be seen Therefore it inhabits lives only in desert and secret places unknown to the rest of the beasts of that region she presently flies away at the sight of a man yet he is taken at length for that he is not very speedy in running away once taken he is as easily and speedily tamed as any wilde beast whatsoever He hath above his crown two strait horns covered with hairs and of a foot length When as he holds up his head and neck he is as high as a-Lance He feeds upon herbs and the leaves and boughs of trees yea he is also delighted with bread The effigies of a Giraffa Such as sail in the red sea along the coast of Arabia meet with an Island called by the Arabians Cademota in that part thereof where the river Plata runs is found a wilde beast called by the barbarous inhabitants Parassoupi being of the bigness of a Mule headed not unlike one yet rough and haired like to a Beat but not of so dark a colour but inclining to yellow with cloven feet like a Hart she hath two long horns on her head but not branched somewhat resembling those to much magnified horns of Unicorns For the natives of the place bitten by the venomous tooth of either beast or fish are
presently helped and recovered by drinking the water wherein such horns have been infused for six or seven dayes space as Thevet in his Cosmography reports In one of the Islands of the Moluccas there is found a beast living both on land and water like as a Crorodilâ— it is called Campurch it is of the bigness of an Hart it hath one horn in the forehead moveable after the fashion of the nose of a Turky-cock it is some three foot and a half long and never thicker then a mans arm his neck is covered over with an ash colour he hath two feet like to a gooses feet wherewith he swims both in fresh and in salt waters His fore-feet are like to a stags he lives fish Many have perswaded themselves that this beast is a kinde of Unicorn and that therefore his horn should be good against poysons The King of the Island loves to be called by the name of this beast and so also other Kings take to themselves the names of the wilde beasts fishes or fruits that are most precious and observable in their dominions as Thevet reports Mauritania and Aethiopia and that part of Africk that is beyond the deserts and Syrtes The Indian Elephants are bigger then the Affrican bring forth Elephants but those of India are far larger Now although in the largness of their body they exceed all four-footed beasts yet may they be more speedily and easily tamed then other beasts For they may be taught to do many things above the common nature of beasts Their skin is somewhat like to a Buffles with little hair upon it but that which is is ash-coloured his head large his neck short his ears two handfuls broad his nose or trunk very long and hanging down almost to the ground hollow like as a trumpet the which he useth in stead of an hand his mouth is not far from his breast not much unlike a swines from the upper part whereof two large teeth thrust forth themselves his legs are thick and strong not consisting of one bone as many formerly have falsly beleived for they kneel to admit their Rider or to be laden and then rise up again of themselves his feet are round like a quoit some too or three hands bredth and divided into five clefts How they keep flies form them He hath a tail like a Buffle but not very rough some three hands bredth long wherefore they would be much troubled with flies and wasps but that nature hath recompenced the shortness of their tails by another way for when they finde themselves molested they contract their skin so strongly that they suffocate and kill these little creatures taken in the wrinkles thereof they over-take a man running by going only for his legs are proportionable to the rest of his body The figure of an Elephant They feed upon the leaves and fruits of trees neither is any tree so strong and well rooted which they cannot throw down and break They grow to be sixteen handfuls high wherefore such as ride upon an Elephant are much troubled as if they went to sea They are or so unbrideled a nature that they cannot endure any head-stall or reins therefore you must suffer them to take the course and way they please Yet do they obey their country-men without any great trouble for they seem after some sort to understand their speech wherefore they are easily governed by their known voices and words They throw down a man that angers them first taking him up with theit trunk and lifting him aloft and then letting him fall they tread him under foot bLi 9 de hist anim cap. 28. and leave him not before he be dead Aristotle writes that Elephants generate not before they be twenty years old they know not adultery neither touch they any female but one from which they also diligently abstain when they know she hath once conceived It cannot be known how long they go with young the reason is for that their copulation is not seen for they never do it but in secret It is not known how long an Elephâ—nt goes with young The females bring forth resting upon their hind legs and with pain like women they lick their young and these presently see and go and suck with their mouths and not with their trunks You may see Elephants teeth of a monstrous and stupendious bigness at Venice Rome Naples and Paris they term it Ivory and it is used for Cabinets Harps Combs and other such like â—â—es We have read in Thevet that in Florida there are great Bulls called in that country tongue Beautrol they have horns of a foot long a bunch on their backs like a Camel Tom. 2. lib. 23. cap. 2. their hair long and yellow the tail of a Lion there is scarce any creature more fierce or wilde for it can never be tamed unless it be taken from the dam. The Salvages use their hides against the cold Their horns good against poyson Tom. 1 lib. 2 cap. 10. and their horns as an Antidote against poyson The same author affirms that whilst he sayled in the red sea he saw a monster in the hands of a certain Indian Merchant which in the bigness and shape of his limbs was not unlike a Tiger yet had the face of a man but a very flat nose besides his fore feet were like a mans hands but the hinde like the feet of a Tigre he had no tail he was of a dun colour to conclude in head ears neck and face it resembled a man but in the blackish and curled hair a Moor for the other parts they were like a Tiger they called it Thanacth The figure of a beast called Thanacth This following monster is so strange that it will scarce be believed but by those that have seen it it is bred in America and by the Salvages called Haiit of the bigness of a Monky with a great belly almost touching the ground and the head and face of a childe being taken it mourns and sighs like to a man that is troubled and perplext it is of an ash-colour hath the feet divided into three claws four fingers long and sharper then those of a Lion it climbes trees and lives there more frequently then upon the ground the tail is no longer then the bredth of three fingers It is strange and almost monstrous that these kinde of creatures have never been seen to feed upon or eat any thing for the Salvages have kept them long in their houses to make trial thereof wherefore they think them to live by the air The figure of the beast called Haiit I have taken this following monster out of Leo's Affrican history it is very deformed being round after the manner of a Tortoise too yellow lines crossing each other at right angles divide his back at every end of which he hath one eye and also one ear so that such a creature may see on every side with his four eyes as also
brute Beasts as Pliny affirmeth The infallible vertue of the herb Dictammus in drawing darts out of the flesh was taught us by the Hart who wounded with the Huntsman's darts or arrows by means hereof draws out the weapons which remain sticking in her Which is likewise practised by the Goats of Candy as Aristotle writeth The wonderful effect which Celandine hath upon the sight was learnt by the practice of Swallows who have been observed with it to have besmeared and so strengthened the eyes of their young Serpents rub their eye-lids with fennel and are thought by that means to quicken and restore the decaying sight of their eyes The Tortois doth defend and strengthen her self against the biting of Vipers by eating of savory Bears by eating of Pismires expel that poison that they have contracted by their use of Mandrakes And for correction of that drousiness and sloth which grows upon them by their long sleep in their dens The craftiness of Bears they eat the herb of Aron i. Cuckopint But the Art they use in the enticing and catching of Pismires is very pretty they go softly to the holes or hils of the Pismires and there lay themselves all their length upon the ground as if they were dead hanging out their tongue wet with their foam which they draw not again into their mouth before they feel them full of Pismires which are enticed by the sweetness of the foam And having taken this as a purging medicine they expel by the guts those ill humors wherewith they were offended We see that Dogs give themselves a vomit by eating a kind of grass which is from thence called Dog-grass Swine when they find themselves sick will hunt after smalt or river-lobsters Stockdoves Blackbirds and Partridges purge themselves by Bay-leaves Pigeons Turtles and all sort of Pullen disburden themselves of gross humors by taking of Pellitory of the wall The bird Ibis the first inventer or shewer of Clysters The invention of removing a Cataract The invention of Phlebotomy The Bird Ibis being not much unlike the Stork taught us the use of Clysters For when he finds himself oppressed with a burden of hurtful humors he fills his bill with salt-water and so purgeth himself by that part by which the belly is best discharged The invention of the way of removing the Cataract of the eye we must yield unto the Goat who by striking by chance against the thorny bushes pulls off the Cataract which hinders the sight and covers the ball of the eye and so recovers his sight The benefit of Phlebotomy we owe unto the Hippotamus or River-horse being a kind of horse and the Inhabitant of the River Nilus who being a great devourer when he finds himself surcharged with a great deal of blood doth by rubbing his thigh against the sharp sands on the bankside open a vein whereby the superfluous bloud is discharged which he stoppeth likewise when it is fit by rowling himself in the thick mud The Tortois having chanced to eat any of the flesh of a Serpent doth make Origanum and Marjoram her Antidote The Ancients found help from brute beasts A preservative against thunder even against the dreadful and non-sparing force of lightning for they were of opinion that the wings of an Eagle were never struck with lightning and therefore they put about their heads little wreaths of these feathers They were perswaded the same thing of the Seal or Sea-calf and therefore were wont to encompass their bodies with his skin as a most certain safe-guard against lightening It were a thing too long and laborious to speak of all those other muniments of life and health observed here and there by Aristotle and Pliny which we have learnt of brute beasts I will therefore end this Chapter after that I have first added this That we are beholding to Beasts not only for the skill of curing diseases and of preservation of health but for our food our rayment and the ornament and beautifying of our bodies Of the Faculty of brute Beasts in presaging THe first knowledg and skill of Prognostication and observation of weather by the Air was first delivered unto us from Beasts of the land and water and from Fowl What the butting of Rams signifies For we see in dayly observation that it is a sign of change of weather when Lambs and Rams do butt at one another with their horns and playing wantonly do kick and keep up their heels The same is thought to be presaged when the Ox licks himself against the hair and on the sodain fils the Air with his lowing and smels to the ground and when he feeds more greedily than he used to do But if the Pismires in great multitudes fetch their prey so hastily Presages of rain that they run and tumble one upon another in their narrow paths it is thought a sign of rain As is also the busie working of Moals and the Cats rubbing and stroaking of her head and neck and above her ears with the bottom of her feet Also when Fishes play and leap a little above the water it is taken for a sign of rain But if the Dolphins do the same in the Sea and in great companies The sign at Sea of a storm at hand it is thought to presage a sodain storm and tempest Whereby the Mariners fore-warned use all care possible for the safety of themselves and their ships and if they can cast Anchor And it is sufficiently known what the louder croaking of Frogs than ordinary portends But the faculty of Birds in this kind of presaging is wonderful If Cranes flie through the air without noise it is a sign of fair weather and of the contrary if they make a great noise and flie straglingly As also if Sea-fowl flie far from the Sea and light on the land The cry or scrieching of Owls portends a change of the present weather whether foul or fair Plutarch saith that the loud cawing of the Crow betokens winds and showers as also when he slaps his side with his wings Geese and Ducks when they dive much and order and prune and pick their feathers with their beaks and cry to one another fore-tel rain and in like manner Swallows when they flie so low about the water that they wet themselves and their wings And the Wren when he is observed to sing more sweetly than usual and to hop up and down And the Cock when he chants or rather crows presently after the setting of the Sun And Gnats and Fleas when they bite more then ordinary If the Hern soar aloft into the air it betokeneth fair weather if on the contrary he flie close by the water rain If Pigeons come late home to the Dove-house it is a sign of rain If Bats fly in the evening they fore-shew wet weather And lastly the Crocodile lays her egs in that place The Crocodile by laying her egs shews the bounds of the River Nilus which must be
motive-faculty Lib. 6. Epidem Hippocrates seems to have confirmed the same where he writes Those who have a thick and great head have also great bones nerves and limbs And in another place he saith those who have great heads and when they stoop shew a long neck such have all their parts large but chiefly the Animal Not for that Hippocrates would therefore have the head the beginning and cause of the magnitude and greatness of the bones and the rest of the members but that he might shew the equality and private care or government of Nature being most just and exact in the fabrick of man's body as if she hath well framed the head it should not be unlike that she idly or carelesly neglected the other parts which are less seen I thought good to dilate this passage lest any might abuse that authority of Hippocrates and gather from thence that not only the bones membranes ligaments grisles and all the other animal parts but also the veins and arteries depend on the head as the original But if any observe this our distinction of the parts of the body he will understand we have a far other meaning What parts are called Vital By the Vital parts we understand only the heart arteries lungs wind-pipe and other particles annexed to these But by the Natural we would have all those parts understood which are contained in the whole compass of the Peritonaeum or Rim of the body and the processes of the Erythroides the second coat of the Testicles For as much as belongs to all the other parts which we call Containing they must be reckoned in the number of the Animal which notwithstanding we must thus divide into principal sensitive and motive and again each of these in the manner following The division of the animal parts For first the principal is divided into the Imaginative which is the first and upper part of the brain with its two ventricles and other annexed particles into the Reasoning which is a part of the brain lying under the former and as it were the top thereof with its third ventricle into the Memorative which is the cerebellum or after-brain with a ventricle hollowed in its substance Secondly the Sensitive is parted into the visive which is in the eyes the auditive in the ears the smelling in the nose the tasting in the tongue and palat the tactive or touching which is in the body but most exquisite in the skin which invests the palms of the hands Thirdly the motive is divided into the progressive which intimates the legs and the comprehensive which intimates the hands Lastly into simply-motive which are three parts called bellies The division of the vital parts for the greatest part terminating and containing for the vital the instrument of the faculty of the heart and dilatation of the arteries are the direct or streight fibers but of the constrictive the transverse but the three kinds of fibers together of the pulsifick or if you please you may divide them into parts serving for respiration as are the lungs and weazon and parts serving for vital motion as are the heart and arteries furnished with these fibers which we formerly mentioned The division of the natural parts The division of the natural parts remains which is into the nourishing auctive and generative which again are distributed into attractive universal and particular retentive concoctive distributive assimilative and expulsive The attractive as the gullet and upper orifice of the ventricle the retentive as the Pylorus or lower passage of the stomach the concoctive as the body of the ventricle or its inner coat the distributive as the three small guts the expulsive as the three great guts we may say the same of the liver for that draws by the mesaraick and gate-veins retains by the narrow orifices of the veins dispersed through the substance thereof it concocts by its proper flesh distributes by the hollow vein expels by the spleen bladder of the gall and kidnies We also see the parts in the Testicles divided into as many functions for they draw by the preparing vessels retain by the various crooked passages in the same vessels they concoct the seed by the power of their proper substance and faculty they distribute by the ejaculatory at the glandules called Prostatae and the horns of the womb supplying the place of prostates Lastly they expel or cast forth by the prostates horns and adjoyning parts For as much as belongs to the particular attraction retention concoction distribution assimilation of each part that depends of the particular temper and as they term it occult property of each similar and simple part Neither do these particular actions differ from the universal but that the general are performed by the assistance of the three sorts of fibers but the special by the several occult property of their flesh arising from their temperature which we may call a specifick property Now in the composition of mans body nature principally aims at three things The first is to create parts necessary for life as are the heart brain and liver The second to bring forth other for the better and more commodious living as the eyes nose ears arms and hands The third is for the propagation and renewing the species or kind as the privy parts testicles and womb And this is my opinion of the true distinction of mans body furnished with so many parts for the performance of so many faculties which you if you please may approve of and follow If not you may follow the common and vulgar which is into three bellies or capacities the upper middle lower that is the head breast The vulgar division of mans body and lower belly and the limbs or joints In which by the head we do not understand all the Animal parts but only those which are from the crown of the head to the first vertebra of the neck or to the first of the back if according to the opinion of Galen Lib. de ossibus where he makes mention of Enarthrosis and Arthrodia we reckon the neck amongst the parts of the head By the breast whatsoever is contained from the coller bones to the ends of the true and bastard or short ribs and the midriff By the lower belly the rest of the trunk of the body from the ends of the ribs to the share-bones by the limbs we understand the arms and legs We will follow this division in this our Anatomical Discourse because we cannot follow the former in dissecting the parts of mans body by reason the Animal parts are mutually mixed with the vital and natural and first of the lower belly Nature would not have this lower belly bony Why the belly is not bony because the ventricle might be more easily dilated by meat and drink children might grow the better and the body be more flexible It is convenient we begin our Anatomical Administration from this because it is more subject to
cupping-glasses to bring down womens courses 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 R R. The knee genu 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 S S. The leg tibia 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 T T. The calf of the leg sura 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 V V. The instep tarsus X X. The top of the foot Dorsum pedis 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Y Y. The inner Anckles 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Z Z. The outward Ankles αα The toes of the feet β The place under the inward Ankle where the Vein called Saphena is opened The Figure of the back-parts of a Man A. The forepart of the head synciput 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 B. the top or crown of the head vertex 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 C. the hinder-part of the head occiput 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From D. to D. the face facies 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 E. the eyebrows supercilia 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 F. the upper eyelid 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 G. the tip of the nose called globulus nasi H. the back-part of the neck called cervix 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the nuke or nape of the neck There is a hollowness at the top of this cervix where we apply Seatons I. the back-part of the Shoulder top called axilla 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 K K. the shoulder-blades scapulae 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 1 2 3. On this place we set Cupping-glasses 4 5 6 7. the back dorsum 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 8 9. the ridg spina dorsi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 L. the armhole ala 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 * The elbow gibber brachii M M M M. the sides latera N N. the loins lumbi or the region of the Kidneys 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 O O. the place of the hips coxendices where we apply remedies for the Sciatica P. the place of the Holy bone or Os sacrum where we apply remedies in the disease of the right gut Q. the place of the rump or Coccyx R R. the buttocks nales 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 S S. the back parts of the thigh femur T T. the ham poples 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 V V. the calf of the leg sura X X. the foot or parvus pes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Y Y. the outer ankle malleolus externus Z Z. the heel calx or calcaneus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a a. the sole of the foot planta pedis 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 b. the inside of the lower part of the arm called ulna 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. the outside of the same cubitus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 d d. the wrist carpus e e. the back-part of the hand dorsum manus g. the forefinger index 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 h. the thunb pollex 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 i. the middle finger medius 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 k. the ringfinger annularis medicus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 l. the little finger auricularis minimus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 CHAP. II. Of the containing parts of the Epigastrium and the preparation to Anatomical Administration THe containing parts of the Epigastrium are the Epidermis or thin outward skin The containing parts of the belly the true skin the fleshy or fatty Pannicle the eighth muscle of the Epigastrium with their common coat the Rim of the belly the five vertebra's of the loins all the holy-bone the hanch-bone share-bone the white line and midriff Of these parts some are common to the whole body as the three first the other proper to the parts contained in the Epigastrium taken in general Which that you may see in their order first you must cut round about the navel to the upper superficies of the muscles that so we may keep it till such time as occasion shall offer it self to shew the umbilical vessels lying in that place which are one vein two arteries and the Urachus if it be there Which being done you must draw a streight line from the chest over the breast-blade even to the share-bone which may divide the common-containing parts even to the white line Then presently it will be convenient to draw two other lines a-cross or overthwart of the like depth on each hand from the circumference of the navel even to the sides that so on each part we may draw the skin more commodiously from the parts lying under it the sight of which otherwise it would hinder These things being done the skin must be divided from the parts lying under it from the designed circumference left about the navel We must teach how the skin is twofold the true and false and render a reason of the name which we will every where do as far as the thing will suffer and it shall lie in our power And in doing or examining these things it will be convenient diligently to enquire into the nine things mentioned in the Preface We will begin with the Skin because that part is first obvious to our senses CHAP. III. Of the utmost Skin or Cuticle THe skin being the first part and spred over all the body is twofold that is the true and bastard skin The skin twofold From what parts the skin cannot be separated The true is called by the Greeks Derma which may almost every where be pulled from the parts lying under it which it invests except in the face ears the palms of the hands soles of the feet fingers and privities where it sticks so close that it cannot be separated The bastard skin which first of all we will declare because it first presents it self to our sight is by the Greeks called Epidermis because it covers the true skin they term it commonly the Cuticle The substance of it is excrementitious and as it were a certain dry flouring or production of the true skin That it draws not its substance from the Seed is apparent by this that as it is easily lost The matter of the Cuticle so it is easily repaired which happens not in parts truly spermatical This outmost thin skin or Cuticle may two manner of wayes be made apparent by it self and separated from the other as by burning with fire or ardent heat of the Sun in some delicate bodies and such as are not accustomed to be conversant in Sun shine The quantity in thickness is very small but the extent is most large The quantity because it covers all the skin The figure of it is round and long like those parts which it invests The composure of it is obscure yet because this Cuticle is the excrement of the true skin The figure The composure we say it hath its matter from the excrementitious superfluity of the Nerves Veins Arteries and substance of the true skin The number It is in number one like as the true skin which it outwardly covers that it might be a medium between the object and fixed faculty of Touching diffused over all the true skin which every where lies under it The temperature For the temperature by the
branches By this difference of the spermatick vessels you may easily understand why women cast forth less seed than men For their Testicles they differ little from mens but in quantity For they are lesser In what their testicles differ from mens and in figure more hollow and flat by reason of their defective heat which could not elevate or lift them up to their just magnitude Their composure is more simple for they want the Scrotum or cod the fleshy coat and also according to the opinion of some the Erythroides but in place thereof they have another from the Peritonaeum which covers the proper coat that is the Epididymis or Dartos Silvius writes that womens Testicles want the Erythroides yet it is certain that besides their peculiar coat Dartos they have another from the Peritonaeum which is the Erythroides or as Fallopius calls it the Elythroides that is as much as the vaginalis or sheath But I think Lib. 14. de usu partium that this hath sprung from the mis-understanding that place in Galen where he writes that womens testicles want the Epididymis For we must not understand that to be spoken of the coat Site but of the varicous parastats as I formerly said They differ nothing in number but in site for in men they hang without the belly at the share-bone above the Peritonaeum women have them lying hid in their belly neer the bottom at the sides of the womb but yet so as they touch not the body of the womb But these testicles are tied to the womb both by a coat from the Peritonaeum Connexi-on as also by the leading vessels descending to the horns of the womb but to the rest of the body by the vessels and the nerves arising from the Holy-bone and Costal nerves They are of a colder Temper than mans Temper The ejaculatory or leading vessels in women differ thus from mens Their ejaculatory Vessels they are large at the beginning and of a veiny consistence or substance so that you can scarce discern them from the coat Peritonaeum then presently they become nervous and wax so slender that they may seem broken or torn though it be not so but when they come nearer to the horns of the womb they are again dilated in their own conditions they agree with mens Why they have more intricate windings Their site but that they are altogether more slender and short They have a round figure but more intricate windings than mens I believe that these windings might supply the defect of the varicous Parastats They are seated between the testicles and womb for they proceed out of the head of the testicle then presently armed with a coat from the Peritonaeum they are implanted into the womb by its horns CHAP. XXIII Of the Womb. THe Womb is a part proper only to women given by nature instead of the Scrotum as the neck thereof and the annexed parts instead of the yard Wherein the privy parts in women differ from those in men so that if any more exactly consider the parts of generation in women and men he shall find that they differ not much in number but only in situation and use For that which man hath apparent without that women have hid within both by the singular providence of nature as also by the defect of heat in women which could not drive and thrust forth those parts as in men The womb is of a nervous and membranous substance that it may be more easily dilated and contracted as need shall require The magnitude thereof is divers according to the diversity of age the use of venery The substance and magnitude of the Womb. the flowing of their courses and the time of conception The womb is but small in one of unripe age having not used venery nor which is menstrous therefore the quantity cannot be rightly defined The figure of the womb is absolutely like that of the bladder Figure The Horns of the womb if you consider it without the productions which Herophilus called horns by reason of the similitude they have with the horns of Oxen at their first coming forth It consists of simple and compound parts The simple are the veins arteries nerves and coats The veins and arteries are four in number Composure two from the preparing spermatick vessels the two other ascend thither from the Hypogastrick after this manner The Veins and Arteries First these vessels before they ascend on each side to the womb divide themselves into two branches from which othersome go to the lower part of the womb othersom to the neck thereof by which the menstruous blood if it abound from the conception may be purged Nerves come on both sides to the womb both from the sixth conjugation Nerves descending by the length of the back-bone as also from the holy bone which presently united and joyned together ascend and are distributed through the womb like the veins and arteries The utmost or common coat of the womb proceeds from the Peritonaeum The Coats on that part it touches the Holy-bone but the proper it hath from the first conformation which is composed of the three sorts of fibers of the right on the inside of the attraction of both seeds the transverse without to expel if occasion be the oblique in the midst for the due retention thereof The womb admits no division unless into the right and left side by an obscure line or seam such as we see in the scrotum but scarce so manifest No Cells in the Womb. neither must we after the manner of the ancients imagine any other cels in the womb For by the law of nature a woman at one birth can have no more than two An argument hereof is they have no more than two dugs If any chance to bring forth more it is besides nature and somewhat monstrous because nature hath made no provision of nourishment for them The site Nature hath placed the Womb at the bottom of the belly because that place seems most fit to receive the seed to carry and bring forth the young It is placed between the bladder and right gut and is bound to these parts much more straitly by the neck than by the body thereof but also besides it is tied with two most strong ligaments on the sides and upper parts of the sharebone on which it seems to hang but by its common coat from the Peritonaeum chiefly thick in that place it is tied to the hollow bone and the bones of the hanch and loins By reason of this strait connexion a woman with child feeling the painful drawings back and as it were The temper and action convulsions of those ligaments knows her self with child It is of a cold and moist temper rather by accident than of it self The action thereof is to contain both the seeds and to cherish preserve and nourish it so contained until the
Tibiaea ΠΦ the lower and backer Tibiaea running unto the upper side of of the foot at Φ. Ψ a propagation of the crural artery going to the inner and upper side of the foot and sprinkling a branch unto the ankle Ω a propagation unto the lower part of the foot which affordeth surcles to each toe 4. Musculosa Fourthly passing out of the Chest from the Back-part of the Chest it sends forth the musculosa whereby it gives life to the hind-muscles of the neck even to the Back-part of the head 5 Humeraria duplex Fifthly having wholly left the Chest it sends forth the two Humerariae or shoulder-arteries the one whereof goes to the muscles of the hollow part of the shoulder-blade the other to the joynt of the arm and muscles situate there and the gibbous part of the shoulder-blade 6 Thoracica duplex The distribution of the right subclavian artery The Carotides or sleepy arteries Their division The distribution of the internal branch of the sleepy arteries Sixthly and lastly it produces the Thoracica which is also twofold for the one goes to the fore-muscles of the Chest the other to the Latissimus as we said of the vein the remnant of it makes the Axillaris of that side The other greater branch likewise ascending by the right side even to the first rib of the Chest makes also the subclavian of that side which besides those divisions it makes on this side like those of the left side hath also another which makes the right and left Carotides or sleepy arteries which ascending undivided with a nerve of the sixth conjugation and the internal jugular vein by the sides of the Asperia Arteria or wind-pipe when they come to the Pharinx they are divided on each side into two branches the one internal the other external The internal and greater is sent to the Pharinx Larinx and Tongue then entring into the head by the long hole and Back-part of the upper jaw it sends many Branches to the nose eyes the inside of the temporal muscles and to the Crassa meninx or Dura mater the remainder of this Branch going by the side-holes of the same that it might there make the Plexus admirabilis as we see And then it is spent upon the basis of the brain abundantly diffused over the tenuis meninx or Pia mater and then the membrane or Plexus Choroides To what par s the external branch of the sleepy artery arrives The external or lesser Branch of the sleepy arteries goes to the cheeks the temples and behind the ears lastly it sends a Branch into the long muscle of the neck with which the internal Jugular-vein insinuates it self into the Dura mater entring by the hole of the nerves of the sixth conjugation But we must note that there be more veins in a mans Body then arteries and besides that the veins are far thicker For there is no need for preserving the native heat in the parts themselves either of so many or so large instruments of that kind Therefore you may often find veins without arteries but never arteries without veins But we understand that an artery is companion to a vein not only when it touches it or adheres to it by common membranes as usually it happens but also when it is appointed together with the vein for the use of the same part CHAP. XVI Of the Thymus THe Thymus is a glandule of a soft rare and spongious substance of large bigness What the Thymus is situate in the furthest and highest part of the Chest amongst the divisions of the subclavian or Jugular veins and arteries as yet contained in the Chest for this use The use that it might serve these vessels for a defence against the bony hardness of the Chest and besides that as it were by this prop or stay the distributions of these vessels might become the stronger for so we see that nature hath provided for others especially such as are the more noble and worthy The magnitude This glandule appears very large in beasts and young men but in such as have attained to full growth it is much less and scarce to be seen CHAP. XVII Of the Aspera Arteria the rough Artery or Weazon THe Aspera Arteria or Weazon seeing it is the instrument of voice and respiration The Substance is of a gristly ligamentous and wholly various substance For if it had been one rough and continued Body with the Larinx or throttle it could not be neither dilated nor compressed opened nor shut neither could it order the voice according to our desire The Figure of the Aspera Arteria or Weazon A The orifice of the great Artery cut from the heart aa The coronal arteries of the heart B C D The division of the great artery into two trunks the descending C the asce ndng D. E The left axillary or subclavian artery F. The right axillary or subclavian artery G The right Carotis or sleepy artery H The left Carotis I The trunk of the rough artery or weazon K L The division of the rough artery into two branches of which the right goes into the right and left into the left side of the lungs which branches are again subdivided into many other M The head of the Rough Artery called the Larinx or Throttle N N Certain Glandules or Kernels at the root of it OO The right and left nerves of the sixth and seventh conjugation P A revolution of small branches of the right nerve to the right Axillary Artery QQ The right Recurrent Nerve R A revolution of small branches of the left nerve unto the descending of the great Artery SS The left recurrent Nerve It is composed of veins from the internal Jugular Composure of arteries arising from the Carotides and of nerves proceeding from the Recurrent Branch of a double membrane of which the external comes from the Peritonaeum the internal which is the stronger and woven with right fibers from the inner coat of the mouth the which is common with the inner coat of the oesophagus or gullet And also it consists of round gristles yet not drawn into a perfect circle composed in manner of a channel and mutually joyned together in order by the ligaments that proceed from their sides and ends Why the back part of the Weazon is ligamentous These same ligaments perfect the remnant of the circle of this Aspera Arteria on that part next the gullet which is thought to be done to this end that that softness of a ligament might then give place when we swallow harder and greater gobbets of meat Of the two sorts of ligaments which are annexed to the gristles of the Weazon some tie and fasten together the rings or circles which give means both to it and these circles to be drawn in length othersome bring these gristles into a perfect circle Why the fore-part is gristlely which also yield them means of dilatation These
ligaments cover the inner superficies but the gristles are placed without to resist the incursion of external injuries But we must note that by this communion of the inner coats of the Weazon and Gullet we reap this benefit in the commodiousness of the action that one of these parts being depressed the other is lifted up like a rope running in a wheel or pully For thus whilest the Gullet is deprest to swallow any thing the Weazon is lifted up and on the contrary when the Stomach rises up in vomitting The number and site the Weazon is deprest It is only one and that seated between the Larinx from which it takes its beginning and the Lungs in which it ends first dividing it self into two large branches The division of the Weazon through the Lobes of the Lungs the right and the left and besides each of these entring into the substance of the Lungs is again divided into two others to each of the Lobes one and to conclude these be subdivided into infinite others through the substance of the Lobes All these branches are gristlely even to the ends They are situate between the ends of the Arteria venosa and the Vena arteriosa that the entrance of the air into the Heart by the Arteria venosa might be speedier as also the passage out of the vapour by the Vena arteriosa Thus it hath connexion with these in the ends or utmost parts thereof but by the other parts compassing it with the members from whence it takes them The temperament thereof is cold and dry The action is to carry the air to The temper and action and vapours from the Lungs that by dilating but this by pressing the gristles together CHAP. XVIII Of the Gullet The substance THe OEsophagus or Gullet which is the passage of the meat and drink is of a middle substance between flesh and sinews because it consists of one nervous membrane and another fleshy The nervous is placed the innermost and is continued to the inner coat of the mouth even to the Lips whereby it comes to pass that the Lips tremble in diseases which are ready to be judged by a critical Vomitting and to the inner part of the Aspera Arteria Attractive force thereof it consists of right Fibers for the attraction of the meat which we see is sometimes so quick and forcible in hungry people that they have scarce time to chaw it before they find it to be pluckt down The composure as it were with a hand The fleshy Coat placed without is woven with transverse fibers to hasten the going of the meat into the Stomach and for expulsion in vomitting and breaking of wind These two Coats are continued with the two Coats of the Stomach and have the like site Besides the Gullet hath these parts composing it as a vein from the Gate and Hollow ascendent vein a nerve from the sixt Conjugation an Artery from that which creeps alongst the bottom of the Stomach with the Vena Gastrica or else from the Arteries ascending the hollow part thereof but also besides all these vessels it may have a third Coat from the Membrane investing the Ribs or Pleura The magnitude The Figure Site The magnitude of the Gullet is large enough yet some be bigger some less according to the variety of bodies The figure of it is round that so it might be more large to swallow meat and less subject to offence It is placed between the Back-bone and Weazon from the roots of the Tongue even to the Stomach But as it descends alongst the Back-bone when it comes to the fourth Vertebra of the Chest it turns to the right side to give way to the great Artery Aorta and the descendent Artery then it turns to the leftside to the Stomach or mouth of the Ventricle Nature hath fastened it to the Diaphragma with strong membranous ties lest that if it had lain upon the Artery it should have hindered the passage of the vital spirit to the lower parts It is only one and that tyed to the fore-mentioned parts both by its Vessels and Membranes It is of temper rather cold than hot as all those parts which are more nervous than fleshy are The Action thereof is to draw and carry down the meat Temper and action Why we cannot sup and blow at one time and to cast forth such things by vomit as trouble the Stomach Here you must note that whilest we swallow down the Gullet is drawn downwards and the Weazon upwards which is the cause that we cannot sup and blow swallow and breathe together at the same instant which we must think to happen by Gods singular Providence to whose Name be glory for everlasting Amen The End of the Fourth Book The Fifth BOOK Of the Animal parts contained in the HEAD CHAP. I. A General Description of the Head HAving hitherto declared two general parts of mans Body that is the Natural and Vital it is now fit to betake our selves to the last that is the Animal beginning with the Head Wherefore we will first define the Head then divide it into its parts thirdly describe each of these parts fourthly demonstrate them after the order they offer themselves to our sight in dissection The Head therefore is the seat of the senses the Palace and habitation of reason and wisdom What the head is Why seated in the highest place from whence as from a fountain infinite actions and commodities arise It is seated above the rest of the body that the Animal spirit from thence as from a Tower may govern and moderate the whole body and perform all actions according to the prescript of nature By the Head we understand all that which is contained from the Crown of the head to the first vertebra of the neck The best figure of the head is round lightly flatted on each side The figure extuberating something to the fore and hind-part thereof For from hence is taken an argument of the goodness of the senses on the contrary those which are exactly round or acuminate and sharp towards the top are not thought good The Head is divided into the face forehead temples the forepart the crown The division thereof and hind-part By the Face we understand whatsoever is contained between the Eye-brows and the lower part of the chin By the Forehead all the space from the eye-brows even to the Coronal Suture By the Temples whatsoever is hollowed from the lesser corner of the ey even to the ears By the Forepart of the Head whatsoever runs in length from the top of the forehead or the Coronal Suture even to the Suture Lambdoides and on each side to the Ossa petrosa the stony Bones or scaly Sutures By the Crown we signifie a certain point exquisitely in the midst of the Sagittal Suture which is sufficiently known By the Occiput or hind-part of the head that which is terminated by the Suture Lambdoides
and the first vertebra of the neck Of all these parts there be some simple some compound besides some are containing some contained Of the containing some are common to all the parts of the head as the skin The containing parts of the Head the fleshy pannicle and pericranium others are proper to certain parts as the fleshy pannicle to the neck face forehead and skin covering the Cranium the common coat of the muscles to the fat and face the skull and both the Meninges to the Brain The parts contained are the substance of the brain the four ventricles The parts contained and the bodies contained in them the nerves the mamillary processes the Plexus Choroides or Rete admirabile the Glandula basilaris and others of which we will speak hereafter We must now speak of the containing parts beginning with the Skin for the order of teaching requires that we take our Exordium from the more simple but first we will say something of the Hair The hair is nothing else then an excrement generated and formed of the more gross and terrene portion of the superfluities of the third concoction What the hair is The use thereof which could not be wasted by insensible transpiration The benefit of it is that consuming the gross and fuliginous or sooty excrements of the Brain it becomes a cover and ornament for the head This hair of the head and eye-brows have their original from the first conformation of the infant in the womb the rest of the hairs of the body arise and grow forth as the body grows and becomes more dry of which sort are the hairs which cover the chin armholes groins and other parts of our bodies CHAP. II. O the musculous skin of the Head commonly called the hairy scalp and of the Pericranium THe skin which covers the skull and is covered with the hair is far more fleshy thick What the hairy scalp is hard and dry than any other part of the body especially which wants hair The skin hath almost the like condition of quality as those parts have which it doth simply cover but is as it were lost in them or grown into one with them as in the lips and forehead with the fleshy pannicle wherefore it is there called musculous in other places it adheres to the grisles as on the sides of the nostrils and corners of the Eyes whereupon it is there called grislely It hath connexion with the Pericranium because joyned to it it receives nerves from the first and second Vertebra of the neck and from the third conjugation of the brain It s connexion which are disseminated through all its substance whereby it comes to pass that the wounds contusions and imposthumes that happen in or upon this skin are not to be neglected The * Our Author with Fallopius Laurentius confounds the pericranium and periostium but Vesalius Baubinus and Bartheolinus distinguish them making the pericranium thin and soft and the periostium most thin and nervous and of most exquisite sense Pericranium but I suppose it should be the Periostium is a most thin membrane which next and immediatly covers all the Bones of the Body and this on the head is called by a peculiar name the Pericranium by reason of the excellency of the Cranium or skull in other Bones it is termed the Periostium And as the Pericranium takes its original from the Crassa meninx propagating it self by certain strings or threds sent forth by the sutures and holes of the skull so all other membranes of the Body have their original either from this Pericranium or Crassa meninx sending forth their productions as well by the holes or passages of the head as by those of the spinal marrow or back-bone it self even to the Holy bone Why the wounds thereof must not be neglected The Perecranium and periostium of the same nature Whence all the membranes proceed Why when any membranous part is hurt in any part of the body the head is affected by consent Of which this is an argument for in what part soever of the Body a membrane is hurt presently the hurt or sense thereof comes to the Crassa meninx For so those who have but their little Toe hurt when they sneese or cough perceive an increase of their pain by the passage thereof to the Brain * The use of the Pericranium The use of this Pericranium is to cover the skull and to give notice of things hurtful by the power of the quick sense which it is endued withal and the Periostium doth the like in other Bones Besides it sustains and fastens by the sutures the Crassa meninx to the skull lest it should fall by reason of its weight upon the Pia mater and so hurt it and hinder the pulsation of the brain and arteries that are plenteously spred through both the Meninges Wherefore the Pericranium hath most strait connexion with the Crassa meninx because it takes the original from thence We must think the same of the other membranes of the Body which thing is very notable in the solution of the continuity of the membranes CHAP. III. Of the Sutures Their use and number THe Sutures do sew or fasten together the Bones of the skull these be five in number Three are true and legitimate two false and spurious The Coronal the first of the true Sutures is seated in the forepart of the head descending downwards overthwart the fore-part of the head to the midst of the temples it is so called because Corolla that is wreaths crowns or garlands are set upon that place The second is called the Sagittalis or right Suture as that which running through the Crown divides the Head into two equal parts as with a straight line running the length of it from the Coronal to the Lambdoides or hind-Suture But this third Suture Lambdoides is so called because it represents the Capital greek letter Lambda Λ. You must understand this description of the Sutures not as always but as for the greater part Some skulls want Sutures to be thus For there be some skulls that want the foremost Suture othersome the hind and sometimes such as have none of the true Sutures but only the false and spurious And also you shall sometimes find the Sagittal to run to the nose And oft-times there be three or four Sutures in the back-part of the head so that indeed the number of the Sutures is not certain Cels lib. Cap. 40. Which also we find observed by Cornelius Celsus where he writes that Hippocrates was deceived by the Sutures by chance for that he conjectured that the Bones of the back-part of the head were broken because his Probe thrust to the roughness of the second suture Lambdoides staied as at a cleft made in the Bone by a stroak The other two are called the false stony and scaly Sutures by reason they are made by a scaly conjunction of the Bones but not
define what the Neck is then prosecute the parts thereof as wel proper as common especially those of which we have not as yet treated For it were superfluous to speak any more of the skin the fleshy pannicle the veins arteries nerves gullet weazon and muscles ascending and descending to the parts into which they are inserted alongst the neck wherefore you must not expect that we should say any thing of the Neck more than to describe the Vertebrae or Rack-bones being the proper parts thereof and the Ligaments as well those proper to the Neck as those which it hath in common with the head and lastly the muscles as well those it hath in common with the head and chest as those of its own What the neck is Therefore the Neck is nothing else then a part of the head which is contained between the Nowl-bone and the first Vertebra of the back First in the Neck the Vertebra's must be considered and we must shew what they have proper and peculiar and what common amongst themselves that we may the more easily shew the original and insertion of the muscles growing out of them and ending in them The Neck consists of seven Vertebrae or rack-bones in which you must consider their proper body and then the holes by which the Spinal-marrow passes thirdly the Apophyses or processes of the Vertebrae fourthly the holes through which the nerves are disseminated into other parts from the spinal marrow VVhat to be considered in the vertebrae of the neck and besides the perforations of the transverse productions by which the Veins and Arteries which we call Cervicales ascend alongst the Neck and lastly the connexion of these same vertebrae or Rack-bones For the first by the body of the vertebra we understand the fore-part thereof upon which the Gullet lies For the hole that is not alwayes the largest in those vertebrae which are nighest the head but it is alwayes encompassed with the body of the vertebrae and besides with three sorts of processes except in the first Rack-bone that is right transverse and oblique By right VVhich be the right processes of the vertebrae we understand those extuberancies in the Rack-bones of the Neck which are hollowed directly in the upper part of them and rise up crested on each side to sustain and receive the basis of the Rack-bone which is set upon it VVhich the oblique By the oblique processes we understand the bunchings out by which these Rack-bones are mutually knit together by Ginglymos these are seated between the transverse processes By the transverse we understand the protuberations next the body VVhich the transverse which divide the vertebra or Rack-bone in a straight-line These processes are perforated that they may give way to the before described Veins and Arteries which entring the Spinal-marrow by the holes of the nerves nourish the Rack-bones and parts belonging to them Besides you must note that the perforations of the Rack-bones of the Neck by which the nerves proceed from the Spinal-marrow to the outward parts are under the transverse process that is growing or made by the upper and lower vertebra contrary to all other which are in the rest of the Rack-bones The connexions of the vertebrae of the neck For the connexion of the Rack-bones you must know that all the Vertebrae of the Spine have six connexions two in their own bodies and four in their oblique processes By the two first connexions they are so mutually articulated in their own bodies that each are joyned with other both above below But by the four other by their oblique ascendent and descendent processes on each side two they are so mutually inarticulate that as the fourth Rack-bone of the Neck by its oblique ascendent processes is received of the descendent processes of the third Rack-bone so it receives the oblique ascendent processes of the first by its oblique descendents for always the oblique ascendents are received and the descendents receive Yet we must except the first Rack-bone of the Neck which is contained with four connexions by his lower oblique processes and by its upper by which it receives the oblique processes both of the Nowl-bone and of the second Rack-bone The second vertebra or Rack-bone must also be excepted which is holden by five connexions that is to say four by its oblique processes and the fift by its own body by which it is knit to the body of the third Vertebra But we must note that whereas Nature hath not given a Spine to the first Rack-bone yet it hath given it a certain bunch or extuberancy The process called the tooth in stead thereof in like manner seeing it makes no common passage with the second Vertebra for the passing forth of the nerve it is perforated at its sides of the body and it is made very thin on the fore-side as if it were without body that it might receive the fore-process raised in the upper body of the second Rack-bone which Hippocrates calls the tooth to which the principal Ligament of the head is fastened which descends within from the hind-part of the head under the Apophyses Clinoides or processes of the wedg-bone By what articulation the head is bended backwards and forwards And by this articulation the head is bended forwards and backwards as it is moved to the sides by the articulation of the first rack-bone with the second That process is bound by two ligaments the first of which being greater and broader is external comprehending in the compass thereof all the upper articulation ascending from the Rack-bones to the Head or rather descending from the Head to them as any other Ligament going from one Bone to another The other is the stronger and also incompasses the articulation mixing it self with the gristle which by its interposition binds together all the Rack-bones the first excepted as you may see in pulling asunder the Rack-bones of a Swine and the whole Spine or Rack-bone is tyed together and composed throughout with such Ligaments The Vertebrae of the Holy-bone The Holy-bone is composed of 4. Vertebrae or rather of five or six as in the figure following besides the Rump-bone it receives and holds fast the Ossa Ilium or Hanch-bones and is as a Basis to all the Rack-bones placed above it whereby it comes to pass that the Rack-bones from the Head to the Holy-bone grow still thicker because that which supports ought to be bigger than that which is supported There is a certain moisture tough and fatty put between the Rack-bones as also in other joynts to make them glib and slippery that so they may the better move Whilst this motion is made the Rack-bones part one from another The manifold uses of the back-bone The commodities or uses of the Spine are said to be four The first is that it is as it were the seat and foundation of the composure and construction of the whole body as the Carkass is in a
Ship The second that it is a way or passage for the marrow The third is because it contains and preserves the same The fourth is that it serves for a wall or bulwark to the entrails which lye and rest upon it on the inside And because we have fallen into mention of Ligaments it will not be amiss to insert in this place that which ought to be known of them First therefore we will declare what a Ligament is then explain the divers acceptions thereof and lastly prosecute their differences VVhat a Ligament is Therefore a Ligament is nothing else than a simple part of mans body next to a bone and Gristle the most terrestrial and which most usually arises from the one or other of them either mediately or immediately and in the like manner ends in one of them or in a muscle or in some other part VVhy it is without sense whereby it comes to pass that a Ligament is without blood dry hard cold and without sense like the parts from whence it arises although it resemble a Nerve in whiteness and consistence but that it is somewhat harder A Ligament is taken either generally or more particularly in general VVhat parts may be called Ligaments in a general signification for every part of the body which tyes one part to another in which sense the skin may be called a Ligament because it contains all the inner parts in one union So the Peritonaeum comprehending all the natural parts and binding them to the Back-bone so the Membrane investing the Ribs that is the Pleura containing all the vital parts thus the membranes of the Brain the Nerves Veins Arteries Muscles Membranes and lastly all such parts of the body which bind together and contain other may be called Ligaments because they bind one part to another as the Nerves annex the whole Body to the Brain the Arteries fasten it to the Heart and the Veins to the Liver But to conclude the name of a Ligament more particularly taken signifies that part of the Body which we have described a little before Table 20. Figure 1. sheweth all the Rack-bones of the back knit together Figure 2. sheweth the fore and upper face of the neck c. See D. Crook p. 398. From A to B the seven vertebra's of the neck From C to D the twelve vertebra's of the chest From E to F the five rack-bones of the Loins From G to H the Os sacrum or Holy-bone consisting commonly of six vertebrae From I to K the bone Coccyx or the Rump-bone according to the late Writers LL the bodies of the vertebrae M the transverse processes of the vertebrae N the descendent processes OO the ascendent processes PP the backward processes QQ the holes that are in the sides of the vertebrae through which the nerves are transmitted RR a gristly ligament betwixt the vertebrae A 2 3 4 the hole whereout the marrow of the back issueth B 2 3 the cavity which admitteth the root of the second rack-bone C 3 4 a cavity or Sinus in the same place crusted over with a gristle D 2 a prominence in the outward region of this Sinus EF 2 3 the Sinus or cavity of the first rack-bone which admitteth the two heads of the Nowl-bone GG 2 3 4 the transverse process of the first Vertebra H 1 the hole of this transverse process I 3 the Sinus which together with the cavity of the nowl-bone marked with E maketh a common passage prepared for the nerves K 3 4 a rough place where the Spine of the first rack is wanting LL 4 two cavities of the first rack receiving the two bunches of the second rack marked with MN MN 5 6 the 2. bunches of the second rack which fall into the cavities of the first O 7 the appendix or tooth of the second rack P 5 a knub of this appendix trusted over with a gristle Q 6 the back-side of the tooth R 6 the Sinus or cavity of the same about which a transverse Ligament is rowled containing the said tooth in the cavity of the first rack ST 6 Certain cavities at the sides of the tooth whence the roots issue of the fore-branch of the second pair of sinews V 5 the point of the tooth X 3 an asperity or roughness where is a hole but not thrilled through Y 6 a cavity of the second rack which together with the cavity marked with Z maketh a hole through which the nerves do issue Z 4 the Sinus of the first rack a 5 6 7 the double spine of the second rack b 5 6 7 the transverse process of the second rack c 7 the hole of the said transverse process d 6 7 the descending process of the second rack whose cavity is marked with d in the 6. figure e 6 7 the place where the body of the second rack descendeth downward f gg 8 the lower side of the body of the third rack at f the two eminent parts of the same at gg hi 8 the ascending processes l m 8 the two descending processes nopq 8 the transverse processes r 8 9 the spine or backward process st 8 the two tops of the spine u 9 the descending process of the third rack x 9 the ascending process y the transverse process of the third rack α 8 9 the hole of this transverse process β 9 the upper hollowed part of the body of the third rack δ 9 the Sinus or cavity which maketh the lower part of a hole through which the conjugations of the nerves are led ε 7 the upper part of the same hole The differences of Ligaments properly so called The differences of Ligaments are many for some are membranous and thin others broad othersome thick and round some hard some soft some great some little some wholly gristly others of a middle consistence between a bone and gristle according to the nature of the motion of the parts which they bind together in quickness vehemency and slowness We will shew the other differences of Ligaments as they shall present themselves in dissection CHAP. XVII Of the Muscles of the Neck Their number THe Muscles of the Neck as well proper as common are in number twenty or else twenty two that is ten or eleven on each side of which seven only move the head or the first vertebra with the head the other three or four the neck it self Of the seven which move the head and with the head the first Vertebra some extend and erect it others bend and decline it others move it obliquely but all of them together in a successive motion move it circularly and the like judgment may be of the Muscles of the Neck The fourth Figure of the Muscles This Figure sheweth the cavities of the middle and lower bellies the bowels being taken out but most part of the Bones and Muscles remaining AB The first muscle bending the neck called Longus CC the second bender of the neck called Scalenus DDDD the
outward intercostal muscles EEEE the inner intercostal muscles FFF the second muscle of the chest called serratus major G the first muscle of the shoulder-blade called serratus minor separated from his original H the first muscle of the arm called Pectoralis separated from his original I the second muscle of the arm called Deltoides K the bone of the arm without flesh L the first muscle of the cubit called Biceps M the second muscle of the cubit called Brachicus N the clavicle or coller-bone lent backward O the first muscle of the chest called subclavius P the upper process of the shoulder-blade Q the first muscle of the head called obliquus inferior R the second muscle of the head called Complexus S the fourth muscle of the shoulder-blade called Levator TV the two bellies of the fourth muscle of the bone Hyois XX aa the fift muscle of the back whose original is at aa YY bb cc the sixth muscle of the thigh called Psoae whose original is at cc and tendomat bb ZZ the seventh muscle of the thigh d the holy-bone ooo the holes of the Holy-bone out of which the nerves do issue e a portion of the fifth muscle of the thigh arising from the share-bone f the share-bone bared k the ninth muscle of the thigh or the first circumactor The fifth Figure of the Muscles In which some Muscles of the Head Chest Arm and Shoulder-blade are described I The process of the shoulder-blade called the top of the shoulder O the fourth muscle of the arm or the greater round muscle to which Fallopius his right muscle is adjoyned which some call the lesser round muscle QQ the sixt muscle of the arm or the upper blade-rider X the second muscle of the shoulder-blade or the Levator or Heaver Z the second muscle of the chest or the greater Saw-muscle Y the fift muscle of the chest or muscle called Sacrolumbus αβ his place wherein he cleaveth fast to the longest muscle of the back γγ the tendons of the muscle obliquely inserted into the ribs ΔΔ the first pair of the muscles of the head or the splinters Ch. 8 9. their length whose beginning is at 8 and insertion at 9. 10 11 the sides of this muscle 12 that distance where they depart one from the other 13 the two muscles called Complexi near their insertion φ the second muscle of the back or the Longest muscle Ω the fourth muscle of the back or the Semi-spinatus δ the shoulder-blade bare Ï a part of the transverse muscle of the Abdomen The sixth Figure of the Muscles shewing some of the Muscles of the Head Back Chest Shoulder-blade and Arm. AD The second pair of the muscles of the head or the two Complexi the first part is at AD. BC the second part EF the third part rising up under G and inserted at F. G the fourth part of this muscle or the right muscle of the head according to Fallopius which Vesalius made the fourth part of the second GG Betwixt the ribs the external intercostal muscles L the original of the 2. muscles of the back M his tendons at the rack-bone of the neck The upper O the fourth muscle of the arm or the greater round muscle OO the lower the sixth muscle of the chest or the Sacrolumbus hanging from his original Q the sixth muscle of the arm or the upper Blade-rider inverted V the third ligament of the joynt of the arm X the fourth muscle of the shoulder-blade or the Heaver Z the second muscle of the Chest or the greater Saw-muscle Ξ the three muscles of the neck called Transversalis Î the fourth muscle of the neck called Spinatus Σ the first muscle of the back or the Square muscle φ the two muscles of the back or the Loâ—gest whose original is at L and his tendons at the Vertebrae at MM. Ω the fourth muscle of the back called Spinatus δ the back of the shoulder-blade flayed Which may be truly called the proper muscle of the Neck The two motions of the head Wherefore when the first oblique moves the head obliquely forwards the second puls it back by the first Vertebra this with his associate of the other side may be truly termed the proper muscles of the neck because they belong to no other part whereas it is contrary in other muscles But we must note that the head according to Galen's opinion hath two motions one directly forwards and backwards as appears in beckning it forwards and casting it backwards the other circular The first in Galen's opinion is performed by the first Vertebra moved upon the second the second by the head moved upon the first Vertebra for which he is reproved by the latter Anatomists who teach that the head cannot be turned round or circularly upon the first Vertebra without putting it out of joynt For the last which bends the head it ascends from the upper and side part of the Sternon and the next part of the clavicle obliquely to the Apophysis Mastoides or mamillary process of the hind part of the head The Mastoideus whence it is called the Mastoideus You may divide this by reason of its manifold original rather into two than into three muscles But it had been better that the head might have been moved every way equally backwards and to the right and left sides but thus it would often have been strained to our great damage and danger of life neither could there have been such facility of motion without a loosness of the joynt Therefore Nature had rather bestow upon the head an harmless faculty of fewer motions than one furnished with more variety but with a great deal more uncertainty and danger Wherefore it hath made this juncture not laxe or loose but stiffe and strong The seventh Figure of the Muscle shewing some Muscles of the Head and Chest the Trapezius or Table-Muscle being taken away as also of the Blade and Arm. A The prominent part of the fourth muscle of the chest called Serratus posticus superior Δ the first muscle of the head called Splenius EE the insertion of the muscle of the head called Complexus I the coller-bone bared M the back-part of the second muscle of the arm called Deltois ζ H his backward original θ his implantation into the arm NN the fourth muscle of the arm called Latissimus S μ his original from the spines of the rack-bones and from the holy-bone Ï€ the connexion of this muscle with the hanch-bone which is led in the inside from μ to Ï€. ω the place where it lyeth upon the lower angle of the Basis of the shoulder-blade O the four muscles of the arm called Rotundus major e some muscles of the back do here offer themselves P the fift muscle of the arm called super-scapularis Inferior Q the sixt muscle of the arm called Super-scapularis Superior S the beginning of the third muscle of the arm called Latissimus V the third muscle of the blade called Rhomboides φ
Χ his original from the spines of the Rack-bones ψ ω his insertion into the basis of the shoulder-blade χ the fourth muscle of the blade called Levator * a part of the oblique descendent muscle of the Abdomen After the shewing of these muscles we must come to three or four of the neck of which number two which some reduce to one extend another bends and the last moves side-wayes and all of them with a motion succeeding each other turn it about as we said of the muscles of the head The first of these which extend taking its original from the six transverse processes of the six upper rack-bones of the back or rather from the root of the oblique ascends directly to the Spine of the second vertebra of the Neck and the oblique process thereof some call it the Transversarius that is the transverse-muscle This if you desire to take it away The Transversarius it is best first to separate it from the Spine then to turn it upwards to the transverse processes unless you had rather draw it a little from its partner and companion in that place where their originals are distinct seeing it is the last and next to the bones Marvel not if you find not this distinction of their original so plain and manifest The Spinatus for it is commonly obscure For the muscle Spinatus as it most commonly comes to pass arising from the roots of the seven upper Spines of the back and the last of the neck is inserted into other spines of the neck so that it might easily be confounded with the former by Galen The third bends the Neck and arising within from the Body of the five upper Vertebrae of the Back though with a very obscure original specially in lean Bodies it ascends under the Gullet alongst the Neck even to the Nowl-bone into whose inner part it is obscurely inserted Wherefore it is likely that it helps not only to bend the Neck but also the Head This Muscle is made of oblique fibers proceeding from the body of the Vertebrae all the way it passes to the transverse processes of the other Vertebra But it seems with its copartner which is opposite to it to make a certain hollow path upon the bodies of the Vertebra to the Gullet The Longus The Scalenus and it is called the Long-muscle The fourth and last which we said moves the Neck to one side is called Scalenus from the figure thereof it ascends from the hinder and upper-part of the first rib of the Chest inserting it self into all the transverse processes of the Neck by its fibers which as it were for the same purpose it hath sufficiently long that it may fasten it self from the furthest and lowest process of the Neck into the first or highest thereof The passage of the Nerves through this to the Arm makes this Muscle seem double or divided into two For the Veins and Arteries pertaining to the Neck they have been declared in the proper Chapters of the distribution of the Vessels it remains that you note All these Muscles receive Nerves from the Vertebrae whence they arise The eighth Figure of the Muscles especially those of the Chest Head and Shoulder-blade the Trapezius Latissimus and Rhomboides being taken away A The fourth Muscle of the Chest or the upper and hinder Saw-muscle B the five Muscles of the Chest or the lower and hinder Saw-Muscle a b a membranous beginning of the Muscle of the Abdomen descending obliquely down from the Spine of the back C the first Muscle extending the Cubit at c his original is from the neck of the Arm and from the lower basis of the blade at d. E the Original of the fourth Muscle of the Bone Hyois from the Blade GG the Outward Intercostall Muscles I the Clavicle or Coller-bone bared N the upper the second Muscle of the Arm called Deltois char 4 5. the beginning of this Muscle N the third Muscle of the Arm or the broad Muscle separated O the fourth muscle of the arm or the lower Super-scapularis or blade-rider 1 2 3. Char. his original at the basis of the shoulder-blade at 12. and his insertion into the joynt of the Arm at 3. Q the sixt Muscle of the Arm or the upper Super-Scapularis X the fourth Muscle of the blade called Levator or the Heaver Z the second Muscle of the Chest or the greater Saw-muscle 7.7 Char. the ribs r the sixt Muscle of the Chest or the Muscle called Sacrolumbus E Λ the first Muscle of the Head or the Splinter EE the second Muscle of the Head or the insertion of the Muscles called Complexi Φ the second Muscle of the Back or the Longest Muscle Ω the fourth Muscle of the Back called Semi-spinatus The ninth Figure of the Muscles shewing the Muscles of the Head and Neck AB the third pair of the Muscles of the head called Recti Majores C the Mammillary process D the transverse process of the first Rack-bone E the process of the second Rack-bone of the Neck FG the fourth pair of Muscles of the head called Recti Minores HI the fift pair of Muscles of the head called Obliqui Superirores KL the sixt pair of Muscles of the head called Obl qui inferiores X the fourth pair of Muscles of the Shoulder-blade Λ the second Muscle of the neck called Scalenus which Fallopius maketh the eighth Muscle of the Chest Î the fourth Muscle of the neck called Spinatus Σ the first Muscle of the back called Quadratus Φ the second Muscle of the back called Longissimus a the Sinus or bosom of this Muscle whereby it giveth way unto the third Muscle of the Back called Sacer. b his Original ψ the third Muscle of the back called Sacer. γ his Original δ his end Ω the fourth Muscle of the back called Semi-spinatus ι his upper end under the fourth Muscle of the Nâ—ck CHAP. XVIII Of the Muscles of the Chest and Loyns WE must now speak of the Muscles both of the Chest which serve for respiration In what the Vertebrae of the neck and loins agree and disagree as also of the Loins But first we must know that the hind-part of the Chest called the Metaphrenum or back consists of twelve Vertebrae the loins of five all which differ not from the Vertebrae of the Neck but that they are thicker in their bodies than these of the Neck neither are they lesser in holes neither have they their transverse processes perforated or parted in two as the Rack-bones of the Neck have Besides each of these Rack-bones alone by it self on each side in the lower part thereof makes a hole through which a Nerve hath passage from the Spinal-marrow to the adjacent parts when on the contrary in the Vertebrae of the Neck such holes or passages are not made but by meeting together of two of them Concerning the processes of the Rack-bones of the Chest whether transverse right or oblique they differ nothing
written that the Internal-muscles whether Intercostal or Intercartilaginei ascend from the upper-side of the lower rib forwards and backwards Muscles alwayes receive their nerves in their heads The Midriff The Muscles of the Loins They are three pair Triangulus But if this were true it would follow that these Muscles admitted their Nerves in their Tail and not in their Head seeing the Nerve alwayes goes under the Rib and not above it The last Muscle of the Chest that is the Diaphragma or Midriffe is sufficiently described before wherefore it remains we describe the Muscles of the Loins These are six in number on each side three equal in thickness strength and situation one of these bends and the other two extend the Loins it is called by reason of the figure the Triangulus or Triangular which bends the loins it ascends from a great part of the hind-side of the hanch-bone into the transverse processes of the loins and the last of the chest on the inside for which cause it is made of fibers short long and indifferent answering to the nearness or distance of the said processes The first of the extenders is called Semispinatus Semi-spinatus because even to the middle of its body it takes the original from the Spines of the Holy-bones and Loins this with its oblique fibers ascends from all the said Spines to the transverse processes Sacer. as well of the loins as chest The other is called Sacer the Holy-muscle because it takes its orignial from the Holy-bone or the sides thereof it ascends with its oblique fibers to the Spines of the Loins and of the eleven lower Rack-bones of the Chest CHAP. XIX Of the Muscles of the Shoulder-blade NOw we must describe the Muscles of the extreme parts and first of the Arm taking our beginning from those of the Shoulder-blade But first that we may the better understand their description we must observe the nature and condition of the Shoulder-blade Therefore the Blade-bone on that part which lies next unto the Ribs is somewhat hollowed The description of the blade-bone or Shoulder-blade wherefore on the other side it somewhat bunches out It hath two Ribs one above another below by the upper is meant nothing else than a border or right-line which looking towards the Temples is extended from the exterior angle thereof under the Collar-bone even to the Process Coracoides which this Rib produces in the end thereof By the lower the underside which lies towards the Lower-belly and the Short-ribs Besides in this Shoulder-blade we observe the Basis Head and Spine The basis of the Blades By the basis we understand the broader part of the Shoulder-blade which looks towards the Back-bone By the Head we understand the narrower part thereof in which it receives the head of the Arm in a cavity The head of the Shoulder-blade inned ferently hollow which it produces both by it self as also by certain Gristles which there fast-encompass that cavity This kind of cavity is called Glene This receives and contains the Bone of the Arm by a certain strong Ligament encompassing and strengthening the Joynt which kind of Ligament is common to all other Joynts this Ligament arises from the bottom of the cavity of the Shoulder-blade and circularly encompasses the whole joynt fastning it self to the head of the Arm there are also other Ligaments beside this which encompass and strengthen this articulation By the Spine is meant a process The Spine of the blade which rising by little and little upon the gibbous part of the blade from the basis thereof where it was low and deprest becomes higher until it ends in the Acromion or upper part thereof The processes Nature hath made two productions in this Bone that is to say the Acromion from the Spine Acromion and Coracoidesâ— The Muscles of the Shoulder-blade and the Coracoides from the upper side for the strengthening of the articulation of the Arm and Shoulder-blade that is lest the Arm should be easily strained upward or forwards besides it is fastned to the clavicle by the process Acromion The Muscles which move the Shoulder-blade are six in number of which four are proper and two common The first of the four proper seated in the fore-part ascends from the bones of five or six of the upper Ribs to the Coracoides which it draws forwards and is called Serratus minor Serratus minor i. e. the lesser Saw-muscle which that you may plainly shew it is fit you pull the pectoral Muscle from the the Collar-bone almost to the middle of the Sternon The other first opposite against it is placed on the fore-side and draws its original from the three lower Spines of the Neck and the three upper of the Chest from whence it extends it self and ends into all the gristly basis of the Shoulder-blade drawing it backwards It is called the Rhomboides The third from its action Rhomboides is called the Levator or the Heaver or lifter up seated in the upper-part Levator it descends from the transverse processes of the four first Vertebrae of the Neck into the upper Angle and Spine of the blade The fourth called Trapezius or the Table-muscle is seated in the back-part Trapezius and is membranous at the original but presently becomes fleshy it arises from almost all the back-part of the head from all the Spines of the Neck and the eight upper Vertebrae of the Chest and then is inserted by his nervous part almost into the whole basis of the blade extending it self above the Muscles thereof even to the midst of the Spine where being fleshy it is inserted even to the Acromion the upper part of the Clavicle and in some sort to the upper-rib This Muscle hath a threefold action by reason of its Triple original The first is to draw the Shoulder-blade towards its original that is to the Nowl and Spine of the Neck the other is to draw it towards the Back because of the contraction of the middle or transverse fibers which lead it directly thither and the other to draw it downwards by reason of the original it hath from the fifth sixth seventh and eighth Spine of the Vertebrae of the Chest But we must note that these divers actions are not performed by this Muscle by the assistance of one only Nerve but by more which come into it by the Spinal-marrow by the holes of the Vertebrae as well of the Neck as the Chest from whence it takes the original For the two other which are the common Muscles of the Blade and Arm or Shoulder we will describe them with the Muscles of the Shoulder or Arm for one of these which is called the Latissimus that is Latissimus the broadest ascends from the Holy-bone to the Shoulder-blade and Arm. The other named the Pectoralis comes from the Sternon and Collar-bone Pectoralis to the Shoulder-blade and Arm. CHAP. XX. The description of
there proceeds seven pair of Nerves the first of which proceeds from the Nowl-bone and the first Vertebra of the Neck as also of the first pair of the Back from the last Vertebra of the Neck and the first of the Chest But all these Nerves divided into two or more branches of the first pair that is to say on each side go the one to the small right Muscle ascending from the first Rack-bone of the Neck to the Nowl-bone the other to the long Muscle on the fore-side of the Neck The second pair The branches of the second pair are distributed some with a portion which they receive from the third pair over all the skin of the head the two others go as well to the Muscles which are from the second Vertebra to the back-part of the Head and from the same to the first Vertebrae as also to the long Muscle before-mentioned The third pair One of the third pair of sinews is communicated to the Head as we said before but others to the Muscles which extend or erect the Head and the Neck there is also one of these distributed into the neighbouring side-Muscle and part of the long The fourth pair The Nerves of the fourth pair go one to the Muscles as well of the Neck as the Head and to the broad Muscle the other after it hath sent some portion thereof into the long Muscle and the side Muscles of the Neck it descends with a portion of the fift and sixt pair to the Midriffe One of the branches of the fift pair is bestowed on the hind-Muscles of the Neck and Head The fift pair the other upon the Long-muscle and Midriffe the third is communicated to the Levatores or Heaving-Muscles of the Arm and Shoulder The sixt pair One of the Nerves of the sixt pair goes to the hind-muscles of the Neck and Head another to the Midriffe the third with a portion of the seventh pair of the Neck and of the first and second of the Chest go to the Arms and heaving-Muscles of the Shoulder-blade The seventh pair One of the branches of the seventh pair runs to the broad-Muscle and to the neighbouring Muscles both of the Neck and Head another encreased with a portion of the fift and sixt pair of the neck and a third joyned to the second and third pair of the Chest descending into the Arm go to the hand But you must note that the Muscles which take their Original from many Vertebrae whether from above downwards or from below upwards admit Nerves not only from the Vertebrae from whence they take their Original but also from them which they come neer in their descent or ascent The 12. pair of nerves of the chest There pass twelve Conjugations of Nerves from the Rack-bones of the Chest The first pair The first entring forth from between the last Rack-bone of the Neck and the first of the Chest is divided that is on each side each Nerve from his side into two or more portions as also all the rest Therefore the branches of this first Conjugation go some of them to the Arms as we said before others to the Muscles as well these of the Chest as others arising there or running that way The second pair The branches of the second Conjugation are distributed to the same parts that these of the first were The other pairs But the branches of all the other Conjugations even to the twelfth are communicated some to the intercostal Muscles running within under the true ribs even to the Sternon and under the Bastard-ribs even to the right and long Muscles and the costal Nerves of the sixt Conjugation are augmented by meeting these intercostal branches by the way as they descend by the roots of the Ribs Other particles of the said Nerves are communicated to the Muscles as well of the Chest as Spine as the same Muscles pass forth or run alongst by the Vertebrae from whence these Nerves have either their original or passage forth Having thus therefore shewed the original of the sinews of the Arm The nerves which are carryed to the arms it remains that we shew their number and distribution Their number is five or six proceeding from the fifth sixth and seventh Vertebra of the Neck and the first and second of the Chest The first of which not mixed with any other from the fifth Vertebra of the Neck goes to the muscle Deltoides and the skin which covers it The other four or five when they have mutually embraced each other not only from their first original but even to the shoulder where they free themselves from this convolution are distributed after the following manner The first and second descending to the Muscle mentioned a little before and thence sometimes even to the hand is by the way communicated to the Muscle Biceps and then under the said Muscle it meets and is joyned with the third Nerve Thirdly it is communicated with the longest Muscle of the cubit in the bending whereof it is divided into two branches descending alongst the two bones of the cubit until at last born up by the fleshy pannicle it is spent upon the skin and inner side of the hand The third lower than this is first united with the second under the Muscle Biceps and then straightway separated from it it sends a portion thereof to the Arm which lies under it and to the skin thereof lastly at the bending of the cubit on the fore-side it is mingled with the fift pair The fourth the largest of all the rest coming down below the third branch under the Biceps with the internal Axillary Vein and Artery is turned towards the outward and back-part of the Arm there to communicate it self to the Muscles extending the cubit and also to the inner skin of the Arm and the exterior of the cubit the remainder of this branch when in its discent it hath arrived at the joynt of the cubit below the bending thereof it is divided into two branches the one whereof descending alongst the cubit is spent on the outside of the wrist the other associating the wand is on the outside in like manner in two branches bestowed upon the thumb and in as many upon the fore-finger and by a fift upon the middle finger though more obscurely The fift branch being also lower than the rest sliding between the Muscles bending and extending the cubit when it comes behind the inner protuberation of the cubit in which place we said before the third branch meets with this it is communicated to the Internal Muscles of the same and then divided into three portions one of which on the outside alongst the middle of the cubit goes in two sprigs to the little finger and so many to the middle finger and one to the ring-finger the other two the one without and the other within the Ring go to the hand where after each of them hath bestowed what was
requisite on the Muscles of the hand they are wasted into other five small portions of which these which are from that portion which descends without the Ring send two sprigs to the little two to the fore and one to the middle finger but those which come from that which passes under the Ring by such a distribution communicates it self to other fingers as two sprigs to the thumb two to the fore and one to the middle-finger The sixth the lowest and last runs between the skin and fleshy pannicle by the inner protuberation of the Arm and then is spent upon the skin of the Cubit CHAP. XXV The description of the Bone of the Arm and the Muscles which move it BEcause we cannot perfectly demonstrate the original of the Muscles of the Arm especially of the two Arm-muscles not knowing the description of this Bone first therefore we will describe it then return to the original of the Muscles arising from thence The bone of the Arm is the greatest of all the bones in the body except the Thigh-bone it is round The greatness and figure hollow and filled with marrow with a great Appendix or Head on the top thereof having an indifferent Neck to which it is knit by Symphysis The Appendix of the Arm. for appendices are no otherwise united to their Bones In the lower part thereof it hath two processes or protuberations one on the fore-side The processes of the arm another on the hind between which swellings there is a cavity like to half the compass of a wheel about which the cubit is moved The extremities of this cavity ends in two holes of which one is the more external the other more internal these cavities receive the heads of the cubit that is the fore or internal receives the fore process when the arm is bended inwards but the external or hinder the exterior as it is extended For the head of the Arm it hath a double connexion the one with its own Neck by Symphysis that is a natural union of the bones without any motion the other with the lightly ingraven cavity of the Shoulder-blade which we call Glene by that kind of de-articulation which is called Arthrodia this connexion is made firm and stable by the Muscles descending into the Arm from the shoulder-blade as also by the proper ligaments descending from the circle and brow of the cavity of the Acromion and Coracoides to this head of the Arm this same head of the Arm is as it were more cleft and open on the inner side than on the fore-side that so it may give way to one of the ligaments coming from the Shoulder-blade to the Muscle Biceps Forasmuch as belongs to the lower end of the Bone of the Arm which we said hath two processes we may say that it is fastened to the bones of the cubit by two sorts of articulation that is by Ginglymos with the Ell or proper Bone of the cubit and by Arthrodia with the Radius or Wand which in a lightly engraved cavity receives the fore process of the Arm and is turned about it for the motion of the hand The hinder-process is chiefly added for the safety and preservation of the Veins Arteries and Nerves The figure of the Arm. These things thus shown it is worth our labour to know the figure of the Arm it self as it lies between the fore-mentioned appendices and processes that in the case of a fracture we may know how conveniently to restore it therefore first we must understand that this bone is somewhat bended and hollowed on the inside under the cleft of the head thereof but bunching out on the out and fore-side The 8 muscles thereof Wherefore seeing it must be moveable forwards and backwards upwards and downwards Nature for the performance of so many motions hath furnished it with eight Muscles which are six proper and two common with the Shoulder-blade Of which number two move it forwards two backwards two upwards two downwards Which must not be understood so as that these two Muscles should move it directly forwards inclining neither upwards nor downwards and the other two should move it so upwards as it should incline neither forward nor backwards but thus That it cannot be moved neither to this nor that part unless by the help and proper action of this or that Muscle Thus therefore if the pectoral with his associate perform their duty or action the Arm is alwayes moved forwards as it is lifted up by the action of the Deltoides and his companion and so of the rest Table 24. sheweth the Brain together with the After-brain the Spinal Marrow and the Nerves of the whole Body A That part of the brain that is next the nostrils B that part which is at the side of the ventricles C the back part of the brain D the Cerebellum or After-brain F the mamillary process in the right-sidâ— F the original of the Optick-nerve G their conjunctions H the Coat into which the Optick-nerve is extended I the second pair of the sinews of the brain K the lesser root of the third conjugation L the thick root of the same conjugation according to the common opinion M the fourth conjugation of the sinews N the lesser root of the fift pair O the bigger root of the same pair P the small membrane of the ear which they call the Tympany Q the lower branch of the bigger root of the fifth conjujugation S the sixth pair of sinews T the seventh pair V the beginning of the spinal marrow out of the middle of the basis of the brain X the right sinew of the midriffe cut off Y a branch from the fift pair creeping to the top of the shoulder Z the first nerve of the arm from whence there goeth a branch to the skin A the second nerve of the arm and a branch therefrom into the first muscle of the cubit B the third nerve of the arm and a branch going to the skin on the outside C a branch from the third nerve to the second muscle of the cubit D the congress or meeting of the second nerve with the third E a small branch from the third nerve to the second muscle of the Radius F the distribution of the second nerve into two branches * the lesser branch of this division lengthened out to the skin as far as the thumb a the place of the spinal marrow where it issueth out of the brain 1 2 3 c. Thirty pair of nerves arising from the spinal marrow are here noted by their Char. that is to say 7. of the neck 12. of the Chest 5. of the Loins and 6. of the holy-bone b the thicker branch of the second nerve divided into two parts c branches of the the third nerve sprinkled here and there d nerves from the third pair to the thumb the fore-finger and the middle-finger ee the fourth nerve of the arm f the passage hereof through the inside of the
cord in the wheel of a Pulley and this is called the Olecranen What the Olecranum is Here truly we use this word cubit in the first signification Wherefore we say the Cubit is composed of two Bones the one of which we call the Radius or Wand or the lesser Focile of the Arm The two Bones of the Cubit the other we properly call the Cubit or Ell. These two Bones stick together at their ends being firmly bound together by strong ligaments but the middle-parts of them are a pretty way distant from each other and chiefly towards their lower ends for the better situation and passage of the Muscles and Vessels from the inner side to the Exterior as shall be shewed in fit place The Wand hath two Epiphyses or Appendices the one at the upper end the other at the lower The two Appendices of the Wand The upper is round and hollowed on the surface like a Bason it receives the fore process of the Bone of the Arm bound to the same by strong ligaments descending as well from that process of the Arm as the Olecranon into the circumjacent parts of this Appendix of the Wand The figure and site of the Wand This connexion is made for this use that we may turn our Hand upwards and downwards by the Cubit turned and twined about this process But the lower Appendix of this Wand is hollowed on the inside that so it might more commodiously receive the Bones of the Wrist but gibbous without that it might be safer now this Wand is softer and thicker at the lower end but lesser and harder above where on the inside it hath a swelling out whereby to receive the Muscle Biceps besides on the out-side of the middle thereof it is somewhat gibbous and round so to become more safe from the injuries of external bodies but it is hollowed or bended on the inside for the better taking and holding any thing in the Hand But that side which lies next to the Ell is flatted for the fitter original and seat of the Muscles lastly it is seated upon the bone of the Cubit or Ell just against the Thumb But the Ell or Bone of the Cubit properly and particularly so called The Appendices of the Bone of the Cubit hath in like manner two Appendices the one above the other beneath The upper which also is the greater is fitted to the Orb of the Arm in which it goes to and again for the extention and bending of the Arm no otherwise than a Rope runs in a Pulley but that it turns not absolutely and perfectly round which is caused by the two processes of unequal bigness the which are therefore stayed in the holes or cavities of the Bone of the Arm the greater process which we called Olecranon is letted by the exterior hole that so the extension of the Arm can be no further but the lesser process by the inner hole makes the bending thereof the less perfect The composure of these Bones is by Ginglymos and it is strengthned not only by common ligaments coming from the Muscles which move the Bones themselves but also by proper Ligaments descending from the processes of the Arm and the Lips of the holes and cavities standing about the Appendix of the Cubit The other lower and lesser Appendix is in some sort hollow on the inside for the fitter receiving the Bones of the Wrist but the outside is round and ends in a point The figure of the Cubit-bone or Ell. when it is called by the Greeks Styloides But now this Ell contrary in this to the Wand is thicker towards the Arm but slenderer towards the Wrist And besides in the thicker part thereof it is hollowed or bended towards the inside and in the same place is gibbous or bunching forth on the outside but it is round and straight unless on that side which lies next the Wand for the rest it is hollow and full of marrow like the Wand The site of the Radius or Wand is oblique but that of the Cubit or Ell is right that the Arm might be the better and more easily moved because the motion by which the Arm is extended and bended is according to a right-line but that by which the inside of the hand is turned upwards and downwards is performed obliquely and circularly Wherefore it was expedient that the Wand should be oblique and the Cubit streight for the Cubit-bone is appointed for to extend and bend the Arm but the Wand to perform the wheeling and turning about thereof and this is the cause that it was fitting there should be a different connexion of these Bones with the Arm. These things were fitting to be spoken concerning the nature of these Bones that in the cure of fractures we may work the more safely and happily taking indication from that which is agreeable to Nature wherefore now it remains that we come to the description of the Muscles which are seated in the Arm the Cubit-bone The Muscles moving the Cubit or Ell. These are four in number two extending it and two bending it The first of the benders is called Biceps by reason of its two heads the one whereof descends from the Coracoides The Biceps or two-headed Muscle the other from the lip of the cavity of the Shoulder-blade by the fissure or clift of the Head of the Bone of the Arm. These two Heads under the Neck of this Arm becoming fleshy are firmly united at the Belly and midst of the Arm and thus united are at the length implanted by a strong Tendon to the inner protuberation of the Wand The Brachiaeus The other is called the Brachiaeus by reason of the strait coherence thereof with the Bone of the Arm this fastened under the Biceps descends obliquely on the Back and upper part of the Bone of the Arm into the top of the Wand and the inner side of the Ell. The Longus But the first of the Extenders is called the Longus or long-Muscle this descends from the lower Rib of the Shoulder and cleaving to the Bone of the Arm goes thither fastned and as it were alwayes straitly joyned with his fellow-Muscle specially neer the Cubit whereof you shall presently hear The Brevis The other termed the Brevis or short Muscle being the companion of the Long descends on the hind-part of the Neck of the Bone of the Arm as it were growing to and lying under the former Long-Muscle so that making one common broad Tendon outwardly fleshy inwardly nervous they are inserted into the Olecranum so by mutual assistance to extend the Cubit CHAP. XXVII The Description of the Bones of the Wrist After-wrist and Fingers WE said before that the Hand taken more particularly and properly What the Hand properly so called is is divided into the Wrist After-wrist and Fingers and that the Hand in this signification is bounded by the ends of the Bones of the Cubit and Fingers All
it the Hand seven on the inside of the Hand and lastly the six Interosses Some encrease this number saying there are nine on the external part of the Cubit and eleven on the inside of the Hand CHAP. XXX A Description of the Leg taken in general AFter the Hand follows the description of the Leg. Wherefore to take away all doubtfulness we will first define the Leg then divide it into the parts more and less compound thirdly we will prosecute all things common to all these parts fourthly those which are peculiar to each The diverse acception of the leg and then God willing we will give an end to our Anatomy Now this word Crus or leg is used two manner of wayes that is either generally or specially and specially again after two sorts that is either absolutely and simply so or with an adjunct It is simply taken for all that which is between the knee and foot But with an adjunct for the greater bone thereof The thigh The leg or shank The foot But the leg taken in general is the instrument of going containing all whatsoever is from the hips to the very ends of the toes It is divided into three great parts that is to say the thigh the leg or shank and the foot By the thigh we mean that which lies between the hip and the knee By the leg properly so called or shank that which is contained between the knee and the foot The division of the foot The inâ—tep The top of the foot The toes By the foot all from thence to the ends of the toes Again they divide the foot into three parts that is the Tarsus or instep the Pedion or top of the foot and the Digiti pedum or toes We understand by the instep that which is contained in the first seven bones which answers in proportion to the wrist of the hand By the top of the foot that which is comprehended in the five following bones which is answerable to the after-wrist That which remains we call the toes But because all these parts have other common and proper parts we will only follow the distribution of the veins arteries and nerves seeing we have sufficiently explained the rest when we described the containing parts of the body in general CHAP. XXXI A Description of the Crural-vein THE Crural-vein begins then when the Hollow-vein passing forth of the Peritonaeum The beginning of the Crural-vein Tee two branches thereof and stretched to the Hanch-bone and the sides of the Pubis in the Groin is first divided into two large branches the one of which descends on the inside alongst the Bones of the whole Leg together with the Artery and Nerve the other runs down outwardly and superficially alongst the Leg between the fat lying under the skin and the Muscles even to the Foot and is spent in the skin thereof This because it is alwayes apparent and manifest is called properly by the Greeks Sapheia but commonly Saphena This Vein by the way presently at its original is divided into two branches the one internal By what Veins the matter causing those tumors called Bubones flow down the other external of which the internal is spent upon the Bubones and other glandules of that place and the skin and by this branch come the defluxions called Bubones the other branch is wasted in the fore and utter skin of the upper part of the thigh then a little lower that is about the breadth of three or four fingers it is gathered again into one branch made of many little ones which is spent in the fore and hind skin of this thigh Thirdly a little below the middle of the thigh it is again divided into two other branches of which the one goes into the skin on the fore-side and the other on the hind-side Fourthly it is distributed by two other small sprigs into the skin on the fore and hind-part of the Knee which oftentimes are not found especially when the Poplitea or Ham-vein is somewhat larger than ordinary Fiftly a little below the Knee it produces two other branches lying upon each other in their passage out into the fore and hind-skin of that place You must note that branch which runs into the skin of the hind-part is carryed by certain other sprigs which it produces into a branch of the Poplitea passing forth of the two twin-muscles Sixtly in the bigger part of the calf of the leg it is divided into two other branches which in like manner are distributed into the skin as well in the foreside as the backside of the leg At length after many divisions which for brevity sake I omit Where and in what diseases the Sapheia must be opened when it arrives at the fore and inner side of the Ankle where it is commonly opened in the diseases of the parts below the Midriffe which require blood-letting it is parted into two other branches the lesser of which descends to the Heel the other in many sprigs is spent upon the skin of all the upper and lower parts of the foot and toes The second branch of this Crural-vein To what places and by how manifold divisions the internal branch of the crural vein goes Ischiadica vena which we said descends within together with the Artery and Nerve even into the foot is divided first piercing somewhat deep in it produces four divarications one internal descending below the original of the Saphia into the Muscle called Obturator externus and into certain other external Muscles The three other run outwardly the first towards the Huckle-bone by which the Ischias is made the two other into the four Muscles of the thigh neither are these sprigs far remote from one another Secondly all that branch is divided into two other branches the one above the other below an Artery alwayes accompanying it the lower of which is spent upon many of the hinder muscles of the thigh ending nigh the ham The upper besides Muscula vena that it bestows many branches upon the fore and inner muscles of the thigh descending to the ham it produces the Poplitea or ham-vein made sometimes of two branches the one proceeding from above and the other from below Poplitea vena This Poplitea descending by the bending of the ham is spent one while upon the skin of the calf of the Leg another while upon the Knee otherwhiles increased with branches of the Sapheia it goes on the outside of the Ankle to the skin on the upperside of the foot and sometimes on the lower Thirdly a little below the original of the ham-vein and under the bending of the knee it brings forth the Suralis which is bestowed upon the Muscle of the Sura or Calf of the Leg Suralis vena and upon the skin of the inner side thereof and of the foot continued sometimes even to the inner part of the great toe Fourthly under the head of the hinder appendix of the Bones of
bone and the Os Ilium or Hanch-bone to the Thigh bestows certain sprigs to the hind-muscles thereof proceeding from the protuberation of the Ischium or Huckle-bone and in like sort it gives othersome to the skin of the Buttocks and also to the skin covering the fore-mentioned Muscles A little after it is parted into two branches descending undivided even to the bending of the Knee they both are communicated by divers surcles of the Muscles of the Leg yet so as the lesser produces another branch from the rest of the portion thereof descending on the fore-part of the Leg alongst the Shin-bone unto the top of the Foot where it is divided into ten surcles scarce apparent to the sight two running to each of the Toes The other greater descending in like manner in the remainder of its portion by the hind-part of the Leg into the sole of the Foot casts it self with the Veins and Arteries between the Heel and Leg-bone were first divided into two Branches each of which presently parted into five send two sprigs to the sides of the Toes And these are the most notable and necessary distributions of the Vessels and Nerves we purposely omit others which are infinite and of which the knowledg is impertinent CHAP. XXXIV Of the proper parts of the Thigh HAving explained the common parts of the Leg in general now we must come to the proper beginning at the Thigh The proper parts of the Thigh are Muscles Bones and Ligaments But because the demonstration of the Muscles is somewhat difficult if we be ignorant of the description of the Bones from whence they arise and into which they are inserted therefore we judg it worth our labour first to shew the Bones and the dearticulation of these of the Thigh beginning with those Bones which are knit with the upper part of the Holy-bone And they are two in number on each side one commonly called the Ossa Ilium Of how many Bones the Ossa Ilium consist each of these is composed of three Bones of which one is the upper another the lower and anterior and the third the middle and after a manner the posterior The upper by a particular name is called the Os Ilium the Hanch-bone and it is the largest and biggest What the Os Ilium strictly taken is having a gristly Appendix in the compass thereof even to the connexion it hath with the other neighbouring Bones whose upper part we term the right line thereof but the basis which is adjoyned to it by Symphysis we call the lip or brow thereof because it stands both somewhat out and in after the manner of the brow But that which lies between the basis and straight line we name the Rib What the line lip brow and rib of the Os Ilium are this same upper bone hath two hollow superficies the one internal the other external The connexion thereof by Symphysis is two-fold the one with the upper part of the Holy-bone the other with that Bone we called the middle and after some sort the posterior which taking its beginning from the narrower part of the Os Ilium makes that cavity in which the head of the Thigh is received this cavity the Greeks call Cotyle the Latins Acetabulum The Os Ischium or Huckle-bone and it is ended by the side of the hole common to it and the Share-bone this middle and in some sort posterior-bone is called properly and particularly the Os Ischii or Huckle-bone and contains nothing else but the fore-mentioned cavity but that on the hind and lower part thereof it brings forth a proccess which adjoyns it self to the Share-bone at the lower part of the common hole in which place it appears very rough and unequal and it is called the tuberosity of the Huckle-bone at whose extremity also it brings forth a little head somewhat resembling the process of the lower Jaw called Corone The Os pubis or Share-bone The third bone named Os pubis or the Share-bone stretches it self even to the highest part of the Pecten where meeting with the like Bone of the other side it is united to it by Symphysis after which manner also all these three Bones are united It is reported that this Bone opens in women in their travel yet hitherto I can find no certainty thereof You may perceive a manifest separation of these three Bones in the Sceleton of a Child for in those who are of more years the Gristles which run between these connexions turn into Bones Now follows the Thigh-bone the biggest of all the Bones of the Body it is round The description of the Thigh-bone and so bended that it is gibbous on the exterior and fore-part thereof that so it might be the safer from external injuries but on the hind and inner part it is hollow or simous like to the Back of an Ass whereby the Muscles might have a more commodious original and insertion That simous part a little below the midst thereof is divided into two lines the one whereof goes to the internal tuberosity the other to the external of the lower appendix of the same thigh These are chiefly to be observed because the oblique fibers of the vast Muscles thence take their original Besides this Bone hath two appendices in the ends thereof as easily appears in a childs thigh The two Appendices of the Thigh-bone the upper appendix makes the round head of the Thigh it self which as every other appendix seated upon a long Neck is received in the cavity of the Hanch-bone by Enarthrosis it is stayed and fastned there by two sorts of ligaments of which the one is common proceeding from the Muscles which descend from above about the Neck thereof the other is proper which is twofold that is one membranous and broad proceeding from the whole cavity of the Orb or Cup descending about all the head of the Thigh above the Neck thereof the other thick and round descending from the second cavity of the Cotyle it self which is extended even to the common hole at the top of the head thereof Besides under this head that Bone hath two processes the one great and thick The two processes of the Thigh-bone make the two Trochanters the other little and short The greater seated in the hind-part is called the great Trochanter the lesser situate in the inner part is named the little Trochanter But you must note that the greater Trochanter on the higher and hind-part thereof which looks towards the Head of this Bone makes a certain small sinus or bosom into which the Twin-muscles and others whereof we shall hereafter speak are implanted we must also consider the multitude of holes encompassing this Neck Whence the Marrow becomes partaker of sense between the Head and the two Trochanters which yield a passage to the vessels that is the veins arteries and nerves into the Marrow of the Bone it self whence the marrow it self becomes partaker of sense especially on that
thereof it is extended into the first and greater bone of the Pedium so to extend the great toe drawing it inwards to the other foot The Toe-stretcher is two-fold And this muscle with the precedent bends the foot if they both perform their part at once but if severally each draws the foot towards his side The third which is the Digitum-tensor or Toe-stretcher is twofold the one takes its original from the top of the leg and running alongst the Shin-bone and passing under the Ring carries it self into the foot in which it ends by five tendons going to all the joynts of the toes and by a sixth at that bone of the Pedium which sustains the little toe whereby as we formerly said it helps the bending of the foot The other descends into the midst of the Shin-bone and somewhat fastned thereto by one tendon passing under the ring it goes to the great toe But you must note that all these tendons have nervous ligamentous and fleshy fibers so separated from each other that they can equally alone perform their function as if they were more distinct muscles And we must think the same of the rest which have distinct tendons presently from their fleshy part The six hind-muscles The six hind-muscles follow of which the two first are called the Gemelli or twins by reason of the similitude of their thickness original insertion and action The third is called the Plantaris because it is spent upon the sole of the foot as the Palmaris upon the palm of the hand The fourth is termed the Soleus or sole-muscle by reason of the resemblance it hath to the fish of that name The fift the Tibiaeus pâ—sticus or hind-leg muscle which descends alongst the back-part of the leg-bone The sixth and last the Digitum-flexor or Toe-bender equivalent to the deep muscle of the hand Some make but one muscle of this and the Tibiaeus posticus which produces three tendons others had rather make three as thus that one should be the Tibiaeus the other the bender of four toes the third the bender of the great toe The two Gemelli or Twin-muscles Now for the two Gemelli or twins the one is internal the other external the internal passes forth from the root of the inner Condyle of the thigh but the external from the external Condyle and from this their original presently becoming fleshy especially on the outside they meet together a little after in their fleshy parts and with the Soleus they make the thick and great tendon at the midst of the leg In what place the kibes breed which from thence is inserted into the back-part of the heel in this very tendon breed painful kibes The action thereof is to help our going by putting forth the foot whilst it draws the heel towards its original The Plantaris The Plantaris the least and slenderest of them all passes forth fleshy from the outward head of the leg-bone and from thence the space of some four fingers bredth it ends in a strong and slender tendon which it sends between the twin and sole muscles to the sole of the foot there to produce a membrane which covers the sole of the foot and a Muscle equivalent to the upper bender of the Hand The Soleus or sole-muscle the thickest of them all and seated under the Twin-muscles The Soleus descends from the Commissure of the Leg and Shin-bones and about the midst of the Leg after it hath mixed his tendon with that of the twin-muscles it runs into the foresaid place that it may extend the foot for the foresaid use The Tibiaeus posticus descends from the hinder appendix of the Leg and Shin-bones The Tibiaeus posticus and adhering to them almost as far as they go by a strong tendon being as it were bony at the end thereof it is inserted into the Boat-like bone and the two first nameless bones so to help the oblique extention of the foot The last being the Digitum-flexor or Toe-bender is twofold for one arises from the Leg-bone The Digitum-flexor twofold in that place where the Poplitaeus ends and inserted into that same bone it goes even to the back-side of the inner Ankle and from thence into the joynts of four of the toes The other draws his original from almost the middle of the Shin-bone and somewhat inserted into it it goes by the heel and pastern-bone to the great Toe mixed with the precedent their action is to bend the first joynt of the Toes rather by the force of the common ligament than by the small portion of the tendon which ends there But it is their action to bend the last dearticulation of the Toes by their proper insertion CHAP. XL. Of the Muscles moving the Toes of the Feet NOw follow the Muscles moving the Toes these are eight in number Their number one on the upper and seven on the lower side The first proceeds from the Pastern Heel and Die-bones below the external Ankle or the ligament of these Bones with the Leg-bone and obliquely stretched to the top of the foot is parted into five small tendons to the sides of the five Toes so to draw them outwards towards it original The Abductor of the Toes of Pediosus The Flexor superior whereupon it is called the Abductor of the Toes and also Pediosus because it is stretched over the Pedium or back of the foot The first of the seven of the lower side called the flexor superior or upper-bender arises from the heel and stretched alongst the foot under the strong membrane which from the heel is straitly fastned to the extremity of the bones of the Pedium to strengthen the parts contained under it is inserted by four tendons at the second joint of the four toes which it bends Here you must note that neer the insertion thereof this muscle divides its self like that muscle of the hand which is called sublimis that so it may give way to the deep which as we said descends alongst the fingers to which a certain common membranous ligament adjoyns it self which involves and fastens it to the bone all alongst the lower part of the fingers even to the last dearticulation The second equivalent to that muscle of the Hand which is called Thenar The muscle equivalent to the Thenar seated on the inner side of the foot arises from the inner and hollow part of the Heel and Pastern-bones and ends in the side and inner part of the great Toe which it draws from the rest inwards This may be divided into two or three muscles as the Thenar of the hand to draw the great Toe to the rest as much as need requires just as we said of the Hand The third answerable to that of the hand which is named the Hypâ—thenar passes from the outer part of the Heel and ascending by the sides of the foot it is in like manner inserted into the side of the little
Toe so to draw it from the rest to which same action a certaine flesh contained under the sole of the feet may serve which is stretched even to these Toes that also it may serve to hollow the foot The four Lumbrici The 4 Lumbrici or Wormy-muscles follow next which from the membrane of the deep Toe-bender are inserted into the inner and side part of the four toes so to draw them inwards by a motion contrary to that which is performed by the Pâ—diosus The Interosses or bone-bound Muscles of the Pedium or back of the foot remain to be spoken of These are eight in number four above and as many below The description of the upper and lower Interosses different in their original insertion and action for the upper because they draw the foot outwards with the pediosus arise from the fore and inner part of that bone of the Pedium which bears up the little toe and so also the rest each in its order are inserted into the outward and fore-part of the following bone The lower on the contrary pass from the fore and outer part of that bone of the Pedium which bears up the great Toe and so each of the rest in its order but are inserted into the inner and upper part of the following bone so with the wormy-muscles to draw it inwards or to hollow the foot outwards or to flat the foot as we said of the Interosses of the hand CHAP. XLI An Epitome or brief recital of the Bones of a Man's Body THe whole Head which hath the least consists of 60 bones but that which hath most of 63. that is 14 of the Cranium or Skull 14 or 17 of the Face and 32 Teeth The bones of the Scull 14. Of the bones of the Skull there be 8 containing and 6 contained the containing are the Os frontis or Fore-head bone the Nowl-bone the two bones of the Synciput the two Stony-bones the Wedg-bone and the Sive-like or Spongy-bone But the contained are six shut up in the cavity of the Ears the Anvil Hammer and Stirrop The bones of the face 15. For the bones of the Face there are six within or about the Orb of the Eye that is on each side three two Bones of the Nose two lesser Jaw-bones and two bigger which are alwayes in beasts seen distinguished by a manifest difference but it is so rare in men that I have not found it as yet therefore these only are distinguished by manifest difference two which contain all the upper teeth the two inner of the palate the two of the lower Jaw in children and last of all the Os Cristae whence the middle gristle or partition of the Nose arises The teeth 32. The two and thirty Teeth are equally distributed in the upper and lower Jaws and of these there be eight Shearers four fangs or Dog-teeth and twenty Grinders The bone Hyoides And there is another Bone at the root of the tongue called Os Hyoides alwayes composed of three bones sometimes of four The bones of the Spine 34. 2 Collar-bones The ribs 24. The bones of the Sternon 3. The bones of the whole arm 62. Now follow the Bones of the Spine or Back-bone which are just four and thirty that is seven of the Neck twelve of the Chest five of the Loins six of the Holy-bone and four of the Rump Besides there are two Bones of the Throat or Collar-bones The Ribs are twenty four that is fourteen true and ten bastard-ribs The bones of the Sternon or Breast-bone most frequently three otherwhiles seven as sometimes in young bodies Hence coming to the Arms there are reckoned 62. beginning with the Shoulder-blade as there are two Shoulder-blades two Arm-bones four Bones of the Cubit that is two Ell-bones and two Wands sixteen of the Wrist eight of the After-wrist and thirty of the Fingers into this number also come the Sesamâ—idea or Seed-bones of which some are internal and these always twelve at the least although sometimes there may be more found a great part of which rather merit the name of gristles than bones there are others external if we believe Silvius The first sheweth the fore-part of the Sceleton of a Man c. The Declaration of these three figures put into one A 3 The Coronal Suture called in Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 B 2 3 the Suture like the letter λ called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 C 2 the sagittal suture called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 D 2 3 the scale-like Conjunction called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 α 2 3 Os verticis or Syncipitis the bone of the Synciput called Os 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 1 3 the forehead bone that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 λ 2 3 the bone of the number 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 δ 2 3 the bones of the temples 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Ξ 3 an appendix in the temple-bone like a Bodkin 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 ζ 1 2 3 a process in the Temple-bone like thâ— teat of a dug called therefore Mâ—millaris and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 E 2 3 the 〈◊〉 bone 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 ε 3 the stâ—â—â— part of the Sku◠θ 3 a prâ—cess of the â—edg-bone much like the wing of a Bat and therefore called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The bones of the whole Leg 66. Now remain the bones of the Leg which if we reckon the Ossa Ilium on each side three as in young bodies it is fit they should they are sixty six besides the Seed-bones that is to say two Haunch-bones two Share-bones two Huckle-bones two Thigh-bones two Whirlbones of the Knees four of the Leg that is two Leg-bones and two Shin-bones Fourteen of the Instep as two Heel two Pastern two Boat-like two Die and six Nameless bones Ten of the Pedium or back of the foot that is five in each foot and twenty eight of the Toes and as many seed-bones in the feet as the hands enjoy But I have thought good to add these figures for the better understanding of what hath been spoken hereof The 2 and 3 Figure sheweth the back-side of the Sceleton and the lateral part of the Sceleton F 1 2 3 the yoak-bone 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 G 1 3 the lower jaw I K L M N 1 2 3 the back or the spine 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From I to K the neck 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From K to L the Rack-bones of the Chest From L to M the Rack-bones of the Loins From M to N the holy-bone 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 N the Rump-bone 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 O 1 3 the Brest-bone 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 P 1 3 the Sword-like gristle of the brest 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Char. 1 3 as far as to 12. in all three Tables shew the twelve ribs of the Chest 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Q 1 the clavicles or Collar-bones 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 R 1 2 3 the Shoulder-blade 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 λ
eight are common and twelve proper Of the common there are two above two below and two at the sides of the first gristle to which we may add those two which serve for the opening of the Epiglottis which are alwayes found in great four-footed Beasts for to press down the Epiglottis The proper are twelve which almost all of them come from the second gristle so to be inserted into the first and third of which some are before others behind the Thyroides Besides these are the Mastoidei which bend the head The head is moved by 14. Muscles But in the back part of the Neck there are twelve muscles also appointed for to move the head so that in all there are fourteen muscles serving for the motion of the head the two fore Mastoidei and the twelve hind-muscles that is to say the two Splenii two Complexi four Right and so many oblique which are very short so that they pass not beyond the first and second vertebra The 8. Muscles of the Neck The Neck hath eight Muscles of which two are called the long lying before upon the bodies of the Vertebrae the two Sculeni which are at the sides the two Spinati which run alongst the Spine the two transverse which go to the transverse process of the Chest The Muscles of the Chest 81. The Chest hath 81 Muscles of which some are on the fore-part some on the hind others on the sides they are all combined and coupled together except the Midriffe Now of these there are the two Subclavii the two great Saw-muscles which proceed from the basis of the Shoulder-blade the four little Rhomboides or Squar-muscles that is two above and two below the two Sacrolumbi the two binders of the Gristles within the Chest Besides there are twenty and two external and as many internal Intercostal Muscles twenty four Intercartilaginei that is twelve external and as many internal so that the Intercostal and Intercartilaginei are 68 which with the twelve before mentioned make the number of 80 Muscles Add to these the Midriff being without an associate and you shall have the number formerly mentioned to wit 81. But also if you will add to these the Muscles of the lower belly I will not much gain-say it because by accident they help inspiration and exspiration The 8. Muscles of the Lower-belly Wherefore of the eight Muscles of the Epigastrium there are four oblique of which two are descendent and so many ascendent two right to which you may add the two Assisting or Pyramidal Muscles which come from the Share-bone if it please you to separate them from the head of the right Muscles The 6. or 8. of the loins There are six or eight Muscles of the Loins of which two bend the Loins which are the triangular the two Semispinati two Sacri two are in the midst of the back which for that cause we may call the Rachitae or Chin-muscles Now that hereafter we may severally and distinctly set down the Muscles of the extreme parts we will come to the Privities Where for the use of the Testicles there are two Muscles called the Cremasteres The two Cremasters of the Testicles or Hanging-muscles At the root of the Yard or Peritonaeum there are four others partly for the commodious passing of the urin and seed and partly for erecting the yard The Sphinctâ—r-muscle is seated at the Neck of the Bladder At the end of the right gut are three Muscles two Levatores Ani The three of the fundament or Lifters up of the Fundament and one Sphincter or Shutting-muscle Now let us prosecute the Muscles or the extremities or limbs But it will be sufficient to mention only the Muscles of one side because seeing these parts of the body are double those things which are said of the one may be applyed to the other Wherefore the Muscles or the Arm beginning with these of the shoulder-blade at the least The muscles of the Arm in generall 32. are 42. for there are four of the Shoulder-blade of the Arm properly or particularly so called seven or eight and there are three four or five proper Muscles of the Cubit that is appointed for the performance of the motions thereof in the inner part of the Cubit are seven and as many in the outer but those of the hand are reckoned thirteen at the least The four of the Shoulder-blade are the Trapezius resembling a Monks Cowl which moves it upwards and downwards and draws it backwards the second is the Levator or lifter-up the third the great Rhoimboides lying under the Trapezius The fourth the lesser Saw-muscle which is inserted into the Caracoides The Arm is moved forwards backwards upwards downwards and circularly The Pectoral Muscle arising from the Clavicle Brest-bone and neighbouring Ribs draw it forwards the Humilis or Low-muscle coming from the Lower-rib of the Shoulder-blade draws it backwards the Delteides upwards and the Latissimus downwards and somewhat backwards But the three seated about the Shoulder-blade move it about or circularly The Epomis or Scapularis upwards the Superscapularis which may seem two backwards and downwards the Subscapularis which is in the Cavitie of the Shoulder-blade forwards so that by a certain vicissitude and succession of action they move it circularly Two Muscles bend the Cubit the one named Biceps or two-headed and the other Brachiaeus or the Arm-muscle but one two or three Muscles extend it for if you have respect to the original this muscle hath two or three heads but one only insertion In the inside of the Cubit are seven Muscles one Palmaris two Wrist-benders two Pronatores one square another in some sort round two finger-benders and one Abductor or Drawer aside These fourteen internal and external Muscles of the Cubit do not indeed move the Cubit but only seated there move the Wand and with it the Hand These are the thirteen Muscles of the Hand the Thenar which may not only be divided into two but into six not only by the divers actions it performs but also by the branches divided by a manifest space between them the second is called the Hypothenar which lies under the little finger as the Thenar doth under the Thumb the third is the Abductor of the Thumb then follow the four Lumbrici and six Interosses although eight may be observed The whole Leg hath at the least 50 Muscles The muscles of the leg in general 50. for we reckon there are fourteen Muscles in the Thigh there are eleven made for the use of the Leg there are nine seated in the Leg three before and six behind which serve for the use of the Foot and Toes in the Foot are seated sixteen Therefore of the fourteen muscles serving the Thigh to bend it one called the Lumbaris the other arising from the cavity of the Hanch-bone but the three which make the Buttocks and the Triceps or Three-headed Muscle which if you please you may divide
by accident by reason of the humor contained therein moistening and relaxing all the adjacent parts the humor contained here lifts up the skull somewhat more high especially at the meetings of the Sutures which you may thus know because the Tumor being pressed the humor flies back into the secret passage of the Brain To conclude the pain is more vehement the whole head more swollen the fore-head stands somewhat further out the eye is fixt and immoveable and also weeps by reason of the serous humor sweating out of the Brain Vesalius writes that he saw a Girl of two years old A History whose head was thicker than any man's head by this kind of Tumor and the skull not bony but membranous as it useth to be in Abortive-births and that there was nine pound of water ran out of it Abucrasis tells that he saw a child whose head grew every day bigger by reason of the watery moisture contained therein till at length the tumor became so great that his neck could not bear it neither standing nor sitting so that he died in a short time I have observed and had in cure four children troubled with this disease one of which being dissected after it died had a Brain no bigger than a Tennis Ball. But of a Tumor and humor contained within under the Cranium or Skull I have seen none recover but they are easily healed of an external Tumor Therefore whether the humor lye under the Pericranium or under the musculous skin of the head it must first be assailed with resolving medicines but if it cannot be thus overcome you must make an Incision taking heed of the Temporal Muscle and thence press out all the humor whether it resemble the washing of flesh newly killed or blackish bloud or congealed or knotted bloud as when the tumor hath been caused by contusion then the wound must be filled with dry lint and covered with double boulsters and lastly bound with a fitting ligature CHAP. II. Of a Polypus being an eating disease in the Nose The reason the name THe Polypus is a Tumor of the Nose against Nature commonly arising from the Os Ethmoides or Spongy-Bone It is so called because it resembles the feet of a Sea Polypus in figure and the flesh thereof in consistence This Tumor stops the Nose intercepting and hindering the liberty of speaking and blowing the Nose Lib. 6. cap. 8. Celsus saith the Polypus is a caruncle of excresence one while white another while reddish which adhere to the Bone of the Nose and sometimes fills the Nostrils hanging towards the lips sometimes it descends back through that hole by which the spirit descends from the Nose to the Throttle it grows so that it may be seen behind the Uvula The differences hereof and often strangles a man by stopping his breath There are five kinds thereof the first is a soft membrane long and thin like the relaxed and depressed Uvula hanging from the middle gristle of the Nose being filled with a phlegmatick and viscid humor This in exspiration hangs out of the Nose but is drawn in and hid by inspiration it makes one snaffle in their speech and snort in their sleep The second hath hard flesh bred of Melancholy bloud without adustion which obstructing the nostrils intercepts the respiration made by that part The third is flesh hanging from the Gristle round and soft being the off-spring of Phlegmatick bloud The fourth is a hard Tumor like flesh which when it is touched yields a sound like a stone it is generated of Melancholy bloud dryed being somewhat of the nature of a Scirrhus confirmed and without pain The fifth is as it were composed of many cancrous ulcers spred over the transverse surface of the gristle Which of them admit no manual operation Of all these sorts of Polypi some are not ulcerated others ulcerated which send forth a stinking and strong smelling filth Such of them as are painful hard resisting and which have a livid or leaden colour must not be touched with the hand because they savour of the Nature of a Cancer as into which they often degenerate yet by reason of the pain which oppresses more violently you may use the Anodyne medicines formerly described in a Cancer such as this following An Anodyne â„ž Olei de vitell ovorum â„¥ ij Lytharg auri Tuthiae praep an â„¥ i succi plat solani an â„¥ i ss Lapid haematit camphorae an â„¥ ss Let them be wrought a long time in a Leaden Mortar and so make a medicine to be put into the nostrils Those which are soft loose and without pain are sometimes curable being plucked away with an Instrument made for that purpose or else wasted by actual cauteries put in through a pipe so that they touch not the sound part or by potential cauteries as Egyptiacum composed of equal parts of all the simples with Vitriol which hath a faculty to waste such like flesh Why it must be taken clear away Aqua fortis and Oyl of Vitriol have the same faculty for these take away a Polypus by the roots for if any part there remain it will breed again But Cauteries and acrid medicines must be put into the Nostrils with this Caution that in the mean time cold repelling and astringent medicines be applyed to the Nose and parts about it to asswage the pain and hinder the inflammation Such as are Unguentum de bolo and Unguentum nutritum whites of Eggs beaten with Rose-leaves and many other things of the like nature CHAP. III. Of the Parotides that is Certain swellings about the Ears What it is THe Parotis is a Tumor against Nature affecting the Glandules and those parts seated behind and about the Ears which are called the Emunctories of the brain for these because they are loose and spongy The differences are fit to receive the excrements thereof Of these some are critical the matter of the disease somewhat digested being sent thither by the force of Nature Others Symptomatical Their Signs and Symptoms the excrements of the Brain increased in quantity or quality rushing thither of their own accord Such abscesses often have great inflammation joyned with them because the biting humor which flows thither is more vitiated in quality than in quantity Besides also they often cause great pain by reason of the distention of the parts indued with the most exquisite sense as also by reason of a Nerve of the fifth Conjugation spread over these parts as also of the neighbouring membranes of the Brain by which means the Patient is troubled with Head-ach and all his face becomes swoln Yet many times this kind of Tumor useth to be raised by a tough viscous and gross humor This Disease doth more grievously afflict young men than old Prognostick it commonly brings a Feaver and watching It is difficult to be cured especially when it is caused by a gross tough and viscid humor sent
lib. ss mellis ros syr rosar sic an Detergent Gargarisms â„¥ i fiat gargarisma Also the use of oenomel that is Wine and Hony will be fit for this purpose The Ulcer being cleansed by these means let it be cicatrized with a little Roch-Alum added to the former Gargarisms The Figure of an Incision-Knife opened out of the hast which serves for a sheath thereto CHAP. IX Of the Bronchocele or Rupture of the Throat The reason of the name THat which the French call Goetra that the Greeks call Bronchocele the Latins Gutturis Hernia that is the Rupture of the Throat For it is a round tumor of the Throat the matter whereof comming from within outwards is contained between the skin and weazon it proceeds in women from the same cause as an Aneurisma The differences But this general name of Bronchocele undergoes many differences for sometimes it retains the nature of Melicerides other-whiles of Steatoma's Atheroma's or Aneurisma's in some there is found a fleshy substance having some small pain some of these are small others so great that they seem almost to cover all the Throat some have a Cist or bag others have no such thing all how many soever they be and what end they shall have may be known by their proper signs these which shall be curable may be opened with an actual or potential cautery or with an Incision-knife The Cure Hence if it be possible let the matter be presently evacuated but if it cannot be done at once let it be performed at divers times and discussed by fit remedies and lastly let the ulcer be consolidated and cicatrized CHAP. X. Of the Pleurisie What it is THe Pleurisie is an inflammation of the membrane investing the ribs caused by subtile and cholerick bloud springing upwards with great violence from the hollow vein into the Azygos Of a Pleurifie coming to suppuration and thence into the intercostal veins and is at length poured forth into the empty spaces of the intercostal muscles and the mentioned membrane Being contained there if it tend to suppuration it commonly infers a pricking pain a Feaver and difficulty of breathing This suppurated bloud is purged and evacuated one while by the mouth the Lungs sucking it and so casting it into the Weazon and so into the mouth otherwhiles by Urin and sometimes by Stool Of the change thereof into an Empyema But if nature being too weak cannot expectorate the purulent bloud poured forth into the capacity of the chest the disease is turned into Empyema wherefore the Chirurgeon must then be called who beginning to reckon from below upwards may make a vent between the third and fourth true and legitimate ribs Of the apertion of the side in an Empyema and that must be done either with an actual or potential cautery or with a sharp knife drawn upwards towards the back but not downwards lest the vessels should be violated which are disseminated under the rib This apertion may be safely and easily performed by this actual cautery it is perforated with four holes through one whereof there is a pin put higher or lower according to the depth and manner of your Incision then the point thereof is thrust through a plate of Iron perforated also in the midst into the part designed by the Physitian lest the wavering hand might peradventure touch and so hurt the other parts not to be medled withall The same plate must be somewhat hollowed that so it might be more easily fitted to the gibbous side and bound by the corners on the contrary side with four strings Wherefore I have thought good here to express the figures thereof The Figure of an actual Cautery with its Plate fit to be used in a Pleurisie But if the Patient shall have a large Body Chest and Ribs you may divide and perforate the Ribs themselves with a Trepan howsoever the apertion be made the pus or matter must be evacuated by little and little at several times and the capacity of the Chest cleansed from the purulent matter by a detergent injection of vi ounces of Barley-water and â„¥ ij Honey of Roses and other the like things mentioned at large in our cure of Wounds CHAP. XI Of the Dropsie THe Dropsie is a Tumor against nature by the aboundance of waterish humor What the Dropsie is of statulencies or Phlegm gathered one while in all the habit of the body otherwhiles in some part and that especially in the capacity of the belly between the Peritonaeum and entrails From this distinction of places and matters there arise divers kinds of Dropsies First that Dropsie which fils that space of the belly is either moist or dry The moist is called the Ascites by reason of the similitude it hath with a leather-bottle or Borachio The differences thereof because the waterish humor is contained in that capacity as it were in such a vessel The dry is called the Tympanites or Tympany by reason the belly swollen with wind sounds like a Tympanum that is a Drum But when the whole habit of the body is distended with a phlegmatick humor it is called Anasarca or Leucophlegmatia In this last kind of Dropsie the lower parts first swell as which by reason of their site are most subject to receive defluxions The Symptomes and more remote from the fountain of the native heat wherefore if you press them down the print of your finger will remain sometime after the patients face will become pale and puffed up whereby it may be distinguished from the two other kinds of Dropsie For in them first the belly then by a certain consequence the thighs and feet do swell There are besides also particular Dropsies contained in the strait bounds of certain places such are the Hydrocephalos in the head the Bronchocele in the throat the Pleurocele in the Chest the Hydrocele in the Scrotum or Cod The Causes and so of the rest Yet they all arise from the same cause that is the weakness or defect of the altering or concocting faculties especially of the liver which hath been caused by a Scirrhus or any kind of great distemper chiefly cold whether it happen primarily or secondarily by reason of some hot distemper dissipating the native and inbred heat such a Dropsie is uncurable or else it comes by consent of some other higher or lower part for if in the Lungs Midriff or Reins there be any distemper or disease bred it is easily communicated to the gibbous part of the Liver by the branches of the hollow vein which run thither But if the mischief proceed from the Spleen Stomach Mesentery How divers diseases turn into Dropsies Guts especially the jejunum and Ileum it creeps into the hollow side of the liver by the meseraick veins and other branches of the Vena porta or Gate-vein For thus such as are troubled with the Asthma Ptisick Spleen Jaundise and also the Phrensie fall into a Dropsie
so the venenate matter may flow forth more freely for which purpose also medicines which are of a thin and liquid consistence but of a drying and digestive faculty shall be powred in to call forth and dissolve the virulency as Treacle and Mithridate dissolved in Aqua vitae with a little of some mercurial powder for this is a noble antidote A worthy Alexipharmacum oâ— Antidote Also cupping glasses and scarifications will be good Lastly the condition of all dolorifick causes shall be oppugned by the opposition of contrary remedies as if pain by reason of a pricked nerve or tendon shall cause a Convulsion it must presently be resisted by proper remedies as oyl of Turpentine of Euphorbium mixt with Aquae vitae and also with other remedies appropriated to punctures of the nerves If the pain proceed from excess of cold because cold is hurtful to the brain the spinall marrow and nerves the patient shall be placed in a hot air such as that of a hot-house or stoave all the spine of his back and convulsed parts must be anointed with the hot liniments above mentioned for that is much better than suddenly to expose him from the conceived convulsifick cause to a most hot fire or warm Bath In the mean time the Chirurgion must take diligent heed that as soon as the signs of the Covulsion to come or already present You must hinder the locking of the teeth or at hand do shew themselves that he put a stick between the patients teeth lest they be fast locked by the pertinacious contraction of the Jaws for many in such a case have bit off their tongues for which purpose he shall be provided of an instrument called Speculum Oris which may be dilated and contracted according to your mind by the means of a screw as the figures underneath demonstrate the one presenting it open and somewhat twined up and the other as it is shut The Figure of a Speculum Oris to open the teeth when they are locked or held fast together CHAP. XII Of the Palsie What a Palsie is The differences thereof THe Palsie is the resolving or mollification of the nerves with privation of sense and motion not truly of the whole body but of the one part thereof as of the right or left side And such is properly named the Palsie for otherwise and less properly the resolution of some one member is also called the Palsie for when the whoâ—â— body is resolved it is an Apoplexy Therefore the Palsie sometimes takes half the body otherwhiles the upper parts which are between the navel and the head otherwhiles the lower which are from the navell to the feet sometimes the tongue gullet bladder yard eyes and lastly any of the particles of the body How it differs from a Convulsion It differs from a Convulsion in its whole nature For in a convulsion there is a contention and contraction of the part but in this a resolving and relaxation thereof besides it commonly happeneth that the sense is either abolished or very dull which usually remains perfect in a Convulsion There are some which have a pricking and as it were great pain in the part The causes The causes are internal or external the internal are humors obstructing one of the ventricles of the brain or one side of the spinal marrow so that the animal faculty the worker of sense and motion cannot by the nerves come to the part to perform its action The external causes are a fall blow and the like injuries by which oft-times the joints are dislocated the spinal marrow wrested aside and constrictions and compressions of the Vertebrae arise which are causes that the animal spirit cannot come to the Organs in its whole substance But it is easy by skill in Anatomy perfectly to understand by the resolved part the seat of the morbifick cause for when there is a Palsie properly so called that is when the right or left side is wholly seized upon then you may know that the obstruction is in the brain or spinal marrow but if the parts of the head be untoucht either of the sides being wholly resolved the fault remains in the original of the spinal marrow if the armes be taken with this disease we may certainly think that the matter of the disease lies hid in the fifth sixth and seventh Vertebrae of the neck But if the lower members languish we must judge the Paralytick cause to be contained in the Vertebrae of the Loins and Holy bone Which thing the Chirurgeon must diligently observe that he may alwaies have recourse to the original of the disease The Palsie which proceeds from a nerve cut or exceedingly bruised is incurable because the way to the part by that means is shut against the animal spirit Old men scarce or never recover of the Palsie because their native heat is languid and they are oppressed with abundance of excrementitious humors neither doth an inveterate Palsie which hath long possest the part neither that which succeeds an Apoplexy yeeld us any better hope of cure It is good for a feaver to come upon a Palsie for it makes the dissipation of the resolving and relaxing humor It is good for a feaver to happen upon a Palsie to be hoped for When the member affected with the palsie is much wasted and the opposite on the contrary much encreased in quantity heat and colour it is ill for this is a signe of the extream weakness of the afflicted part which suffers it self to be defrauded of its nourishment all the provision flowing to the sound or opposite side CHAP. XIII Of the Cure of the Palsie The decoction of Guaiacum is good for a palsie Things actually hot good for to be applied to paralytickâ— members IN the cure of the Palsie we must not attempt any thing unless we have first used general remedies diet and purging all which care lyeth upon the learned and prudent Physitian The Decoction of Guaiacum is very fit for this purpose for it procures sweat and attenuates digests and drieth up all the humidity which relaxeth the nerves but when sweat doth not flow it shall not be unprofitable to put about the resolved members bricks heated red hot in the fire and quenched in a decoction of Wine Vinegar and resolving herbs or also stone bottles or Ox and Swine bladders half-filled with the same decoction for such heat which is actual resuscitateth and strengthneth the heat of the part which in this disease is commonly very languid Then the patient shall go into a bathing-tub which is vailed or covered over just as we have described in our Treatise of Baths that so he may receive the vapour of the following decoction â„ž fol. Salviae Lavend Lauri major Absinth Thym. Angelicae Rutae ana M. ss Florum Chamaem Melil Anethi Anthos ana P ij Baccar Laur. Juniper Conquassatar ana â„¥ j. Caryophyl â„¥ ij Aquae fontanae Vini albi ana lb iv
and Sanies may pass and be drawn forth lest that matter being suppressed may corrupt the Bone and cause an inflammation in the Brain But the broken Bone must be taken forth within three days You may use the Trepan after the tenth day if it be possible especially in Summer for fear of inflammation Yet I have often taken forth with a Trepan and with Scrapers the Bones of the Skull after the seventeenth day both in Winter and Summer and that with happy success Which I have the rather noted lest any should at any time suffer the wounded to be left destitute of remedy for it is better to try a doubtful remedy than none Yet the By-standers shall be admonished and told of the danger for many more dye who have not the broken bones of the Skull taken out than those that have But the Instruments with which the wounded or cleft Bones may be cut out are called Scalpri or Radulae of which I have caused divers sorts to be here decyphered that every one might take his choyce according to his mind and as shall be best for his purpose But all of them may be scrued into one handle the figure whereof I have exhibited Radulae or Scalpri i. Shavers or Scrapers Radulae of another form for the better cutting of the greater Bones To conclude When the Skull shall be wounded or broken with a simple Fissure It is sufficient in a simpâ—e fissure to dilate it with your Scalpri only and not to Trepan it the Chirurgeon must think he hath done sufficient to the Patient and in his Art if he shall divide the Bone and dilate the Fissure or cleft with the described Instruments though he have used no Trepan although the Fissure pierce through both the Tables But if it doth not exceed the first Table you must stay your scrapers assoon as you come to the second according to the opinion of Paulus but if the bone shall be broken and shivered into many pieces they shall be taken forth with fit Instruments using also a Trepan if need shall require after the same manner as we shall shew you hereafter CHAP. V. Of a Contusion which is the second sort of Fracture AN Ecchymosis that is effusion of bloud What an Ecchymosis is presently concreting under the musculous skin without any wound is oft caused by a violent contusion This Contusion if it shall be great so that the skin be divided from the Skull it is expedient that you may make an Incision whereby the bloud may be evacuated and emptied How a contusion of the skull must be cured For in this case you must wholly desist from suppurative medicines which otherwise would be of good use in a fleshy part by reason that all the moist things are hurtful to the Bones as shall be shown hereafter But if the Bone shall bee too strong thick and dense so that this Instrument will not serve to pluck it forth then you must perforate the Skull in the very center of the depression and with this threefold Instrument or Levatory put into the hole lift up and restore the Bone to its natural site for this same Instrument is of strength sufficient for that purpose It is made with three feet that so it may be applyed to any part of the head which is round but divers heads may be fitted to the end thereof according as the business shall require as the figure here placed doth shew A three-footed Levatory But if at any time it comes to pass that the Bone is not totally broken or deprest but only on one side it will be fit so to lift it up as also to make a vent for the issuing out of the filth to divide the Skull with little Saws like these which ye see here expressed for thus so much of the Bone as shall be thought needful may be cut off without compression neither will there be any danger of hurting the Brain or Membrane with the broken Bone The figures of Saws fit to divide the Skull But if by such signs as are present and shall appear we perceive or judg that the contusion goes but to the second Table or scarse so far the baring or taking away of the Bone must go no further than the contusion reaches for that will be sufficient to eschew and divert inflammations and divers other symptoms And this shall be done with a scaling or Desquamatory Trepan as they term it with which you may easily take up as much of the Bone as you shall think expedient And I have here given you the figure thereof A Desquamatory or Scaling Trepan A Delineation of other Levatories A A. Shews the point or tongue of the Levatory which must be somewhat dull that so it may be the more gently and easily put between the Dura Mater and the Skull and this part thereof may be lifted up so much by the head or handle taken in your hand as the necessity of the present operation shall require B. Intimates the body of the Levatory which must be four square lest the point or tongue put thereon should not stand fast but the end of this Body must rest upon the sound bone as on a sure foundation The use thereof is thus put the point or tongue under the broken or depressed Bone then lift the handle up with your hand that so the deprâ—ssed bone may be elevated C. Shews the first Arm of the other Levatory whose crooked end must be gently put under the depressed Bone D. Shews the other Arm which must rest on the sound Bone that by the firm standing thereof it may lift up the depressed Bone CHAP. VI. Of an Effracture or depression of the Bone being the third kind of Fracture BEfore I come to speak of an Effracture I think it not amiss to crave pardon of the curteous and understanding Reader for this reason especially that as in the former Chapter when I had determined and appointed to speak of a Contusion I inserted many things of a Depression so also in this Chapter of an Effracture What a Consion is I intend to intermix something of a Contusion we do not this through any ignorance of the thing it self for we know that it is called a Contusion when the Bone is deprest and crusht but falls not down But an Effracture is What an Effracture is when the Bone falls down and is broken by a most violent blow But it can scarse come to pass but that the things themselves must be confounded and mixt both as they are done and also when they are spoken of so that you shall scarse see a Contusion without an Effracture or this without that Therefore the Bones are often broken off and driven down with great and forcible blows The cause of Effractures with clubs whether round or square or by falling from a high place directly down more or less according to the force of the blow kind of weapon and condition of the
blows as with Stones Clubs Staves the report of a peece of Ordnance or crack of Thunder and also a blow with ones hand Lib. 5. Epidem Thus as Hippocrates tells that beautiful Damosel the daughter of Nerius when she was twenty yeers old was smitten by a woman a friend of hers playing with her with her flat hand upon the fore-part of the head and then she was taken with a giddiness and lay without breathing and when she came home she fell presently into a great Feaver her head aked and her face grew red The seventh day after there came forth some two or three ounces of stinking and bloudy matter about her right Ear and she seemed somewhat better and to be at somewhat more ease The Feaver encreased again and she fell into a heavy sleepiness and lost her speech and the right side of her face was drawn up and she breathed with difficulty she had also a convulsion and trembling both her tongue failed her and her eyes grew dull on the ninth day she dyed But you must note that though the head be armed with a helmet yet by the violence of a blow the Veins and Arteries may be broken not only these which pass through the Sutures The vessels of the brain broken by the commotion thereof but also those which are dispersed between the two Tables in the Diploe both that they might bind the Crassa meninx to the Skull that so the Brain might move more freely as also that they might carry the alimentary juyce to the Brain wanting Marrow that is bloud to nourish it as we have formerly shewed in our Anatomy But from hence proceeds the efflux of bloud running between the Skull and Membranes Signs or else between the Membranes and Brain the bloud congealing there causeth vehement pain and the Eyes become blind Vomitting is caused Celsus the mouth of the Stomach suffering together with the Brain by reason of the Nerves of the sixt conjugation which run from the Brain thither and from thence are spread over all the capacity of the ventricle whence becoming a partaker of the offence it contracts it self and is presently as it were overturned whence first The cause of vomitting when the head is wounded those things that are contained therein are expelled and then such as may flow or come thither from the neighbouring and common parts as the Liver and Gall from all which Choler by reason of its natural levity and velocity is first expelled and that in greatest plenty and this is the true reason of that vomitting which is caused and usually follows upon fractures of the Skull and concussions of the Brain Within a short while after inflammation seizes upon the Membranes and Brain it self which is caused by corrupt and putrid bloud proceeding from the vessels broken by the violence of the blow and so spread over the substance of the Brain Such inflammation communicated to the Heart and whole body by the continuation of the parts causes a Feaver But a Feaver by altering the Brain causes Doting to which if stupidity succeed the Patient is in very ill case according to that of Hippocrates Stupidity and doting are ill in a wound or blow upon the Head Aph. 14. sect 7. But if to these evils a Sphacel and corruption of the Brain ensue together with a great difficulty of breathing by reason of the disturbance of the Animal faculty which from the Brain imparts the power of moving to the Muscles of the Chest the Instruments of Respiration then death must necessarily follow A great part of these accidents appeared in King Henry of happy memory A History a little before he dyed He having set in order the affairs of France and entred into amity with the neighbouring Princes desirous to honour the marriages of his daughter and sister with the famous and noble exercise of Tilting and he himself running in the Tilt-yard with a blunt-lance received so great a stroak upon his Brest that with the violence of the blow the vizour of his helmet flew up and the trunchion of the broken Lance hit him above the left Eyebrow and the musculous â—kin of the Fore-head was torn even to the lesser corner of the left Eye many splinters of the same Trunchion being struck into the substance of the fore-mentioned Eye the Bones being not touched or broken but the Brain was so moved and shaken that he dyed the eleventh day after the hurt What was the necessary cause of the death of King Henry the second of France His Skull being opened after his death there was a great deal of bloud found between the Dura and Pia Mater poured forth in the part opposite to the blow at the middle of the Suture of the hind-part of the Head and there appeared signs by the native colour turned yellow that the substance of the Brain was corrupted as much as one might cover with ones Thumb Which things caused the death of the most Christian King and not only the wounding of the Eye as many have falsly thought For we have seen many others who have not dyed of farr more grievous wounds in the Eye The History of the Lord Saint-Johns is of late memory he in the Tilt-yard A History made for that time before the Duke of Guises house was wounded with a splinter of a broken Lance of a fingers length and thickness through the visour of his Helmet it entring into the Orb under the Eye and piercing some three fingers bredth deep into the head by my help and Gods favour he recovered Valeranus and Duretus the Kings Physitians and James the Kings Chirurgeon assisting me What shall I say of that great and very memorable wound of Francis of Lorain the Duke of Guise He in the fight of the City of Bologne had his head so thrust through with a Lance A History that the point entring under his right Eye by his Nose came out at his Neck between his Ear and the Vertebrae the head or Iron being broken and left in by the violence of the stroak which stuck there so firmly that it could not be drawn or plucked forth without a pair of Smith's pincers But although the strength and violence of the blow was so great that it could not be without a fracture of the Bones a tearing and breaking of the Nerves Veins and Arteries and other parts yet the generous Prince by the favour of God recovered By which you may learn that many dye of small wounds and other recover of great yea Why some die of small wounds and others recover of great very large and desperate ones The cause of which events is chiefly and primarily to be attributed to God the Author and Preserver of Mankind but secondarily to the variety and condition of Temperaments And thus much of the commotion or concussion of the Brain whereby it happens that although all the Bone remains perfectly whole yet some veins broken
inflammation of the brain and Meninges Galen wishes to wash besmear and anoint the head nose temples and ears with refrigerating and humecting things for these stupefie and make drowsie the brain and membranes thereof being more hot then they ought to be Medicines procuring sleep Wherefore for this purpose let the temples be anointed with Unguentum populeon or Unguentum Rosatum with a little Rose-vinegar or Oxycrate let a spunge moistned in the decoction of white or black Poppy-seed of the rinds of the roots of Mandrages of the Seeds of Henbane Lettuce Purslane Plantain Night-shade and the like He may also have a Broath or Barly-cream into which you may put an emulsion made of the Seeds of white Poppy The commodities of sleep or let him have a potion made with â„¥ i or â„¥ i ss of the syrup of Poppy with â„¥ ij of Lettuce-water Let the Patient use these things four hours after meat to procure sleep For sleep doth much help concoction it repairs the efflux of the triple substance caused by watching asswageth pain refresheth the weary mitigates anger and sorrow restores the depraved reason so that for these respects it is absolutely necessary that the Patient take his natural rest If the Patient shall be plethorick let the plenitude be lessened by bloud-letting purging and a slender diet according to the discretion of the Physitian who shall over-see the cure But we must take heed of strong purgations in these kinds of wounds especially at the beginning lest the feaver inflammation pain and other such like symptoms be increased by stirring up the humors Lib. 4. meth Phlebotomy according to Galen's opinion must not only be made respectively to the plenty of bloud but also agreeable to the greatness of the present disease or that which is to come to divert and draw back that humor which flows down by a way contrary to that which is impact in the part and which must be there evacuated or drawn to the next Wherefore for example if the right side of the head be wounded the Cephalick-vein of the right arm shall be opened unless a great Plethora or plenitude cause us to open the Basilica or Median yet if neither of them can be fitly opened the Basilica may be opened although the body be not plethorick The like course must be observed in wounds of the left side of the head for that is far better by reason of the straitness of the fibers than to draw bloud on the opposite side in performance whereof you must have diligent care of the strength of the Patient still feeling his pulse unless the Physitian be present to whose judgment you must then commit all that business For the pulse is in Galen's opinion the certainest shewer of the strength Lib. de cur per sanguinis miss Wherefore we must consider the changes and inequalities thereof for as soon as we find it to become lesser and more slow when the forehead begins to sweat a little when he feels a pain at his heart when he is taken with a desire to vomit or to go to stool or with yawning and when he shall change his colour and his lips look pale then you must stop the bloud as speedily as you can otherwise there will be danger lest he pour forth his life together with his bloud Then he must be refreshed with bread steeped in wine and put into his mouth and by rubbing his temples and nostrils with strong vinegar and by lying upon his back But the part shall be eased freed from some portion of the impact and conjunct humor by gently scarifying the lips of the wound or applying of leeches But it shal be diverted by opening those veins which are nighest to the wounded part as the Vena puppis or that in the midst of the forehead or of the temples or those which are under the tongue besides also cupping-glasses shal also be applyed to the shoulder sometimes with scarification The use of Frictions sometimes without neither must strong long frictions with coarse clothes of all the whole body the head excepted be omitted during the whole time of the cure for these will be available though but for this that is to draw back and dissipate by insensible transpiration the vapours which otherwise would ascend into the head which matters certainly in a body that lyes still and wants both the use and benefit of accustomed exercise are much increased But it shall be made manifest by this following and notable example A History how powerful Bloud-letting is to lessen and mitigate the inflammation of the Brain or the membranes thereof in wounds of the head I was lately called into the suburbs of Saint German there to visit a young man twenty eight years old who lodged there in the house of John Martial at the sign of Saint Michael This young man was one of the houshold-servants of Master Doucador the steward of the Lady Admiral of Brion He fell down head-long upon the left Bregma upon a marble-pavement whence he received a contused wound without any fracture of the skull and being he was of a sanguine temperature by occasion of this wound a Feaver took him on the seventh day with a continual delirium and inflammation of phlegmonous tumor of the wounded Pericranium This same tumor possessing his whole head and neck by continuation and sympathy of the parts was grown to such a bigness that his visage was so much altered that his friends knew him not neither could he speak hear or swallow any thing but what was very liquid Which I observing although I knew that the day past which was the eighth day of his disease he had four sawcers of bloud taken from him by Germain Agace Barber-surgeon of the same Suburbs yet considering the integrity and constancy of the strength of the Patient I thought good to bleed him again wherefore I drew from him fourteen Saucers at that one time when I came to him the day after and saw that neither the Feaver nor any of the fore-mentioned symptoms were any whit remitted or asswaged I forthwith took from him four Saucers more which in all made two and twenty the day following when I had observed that the symptoms were no whit lessened I durst not presume by my own only advice to let him the fourth time bloud as I desired Wherefore I brought unto him that most famous Physitian Doctor Violene who assoon as he felt his pulse knowing by the vehemency thereof the strength of the Patient and moreover considering the greatness of the inflammation and tumor which offered it self to his sight he bid me presently take out my Lancet and open a vein But I lingered on set purpose and told him that he had already twenty two Saucers of bloud taken from him Then said he grant it be so and though more have been drawn yet must we not therefore desist from our enterprise especially seeing the two chief Indications
the Eyes For we know by dayly experience that many who have had their sight dulled by a long and great defluxion so that they were almost blind have by little and little recovered their former splendour and sharpness of sight when matter once began to be evacuated by the Seton The truth hereof appeared in Paul the Italian Goldsmith who dwelt near the Austin Fryers A History For he having used many medicines of divers Physitians and Chirurgeons in vain when he was almost blind he applying a Seton by mine advice began by little and little to see better according to the quantity of the matter which was evacuated until at length he perfectly recovered his sight But at last growing weary of the Seton which he had worn for a year although matter came dayly forth thereof yet he would have it taken forth and healed up but this way of evacuation being shut up and the humor again beginning to flow into his eyes so that he was in danger to become blind he called me and made me again to apply the Seton in his neck Whereby recovering his former soundness and perfection of sight he yet wears the Seton I also once freed by this kind of remedy by appointment of the most learned Physitian Hollerius A Seton good against the Falling-sickness a certain young man of 20 years old from the Falling-sickness who before had many fits thereof the Ichorous humors the feeders of this disease being by this means as it is most probable drawn away and evacuated A Figure of the Pincers actual Cautery and Needle used in making a Seton The manner of making a Seton Wherefore seeing a Seton is of this use I have thought good in this place to set down in writing and by figure the manner of making thereof for the behoof of young practitioners Wish the Patient to sit on a low stool and to bend down his head that so the skin and fleshy pannicle may be relaxed then must you with your fingers pluck up and sever the skin from the muscles and take hold of as much hereof as you can with your pincers not touching the Muscles of the Neck for fear of a Convulsion and other symptoms you shall then twitch the skin which is held in the pincers most hard when you shall thrust the hot Iron through the holes made in the midst of them that also the nerves being so twitched the dolorifick sense may the less come to the part The wound must be made or burnt in long-wayes and not thwarting that so the matters may be the better evacuated by the strait fibers But the cautery or hot Iron must have a three or else a four-square point and that sharp that so it may the more easily and speedily enter Then keeping the pincers immoveable let him draw through the passage made by the cautery a needle and thred with a three or four doubled thred of Cotton or rather a skean of Silk moistened in the white of an Egge and Oyl of Roses then after you have applyed pledgets dipped in the same medicine bind up the part with a convenient ligature The day following the Neck must be anointed with Oyl of Roses and the pledgets dipped in the former medicine applyed for some days after But it will be convenient to moisten the Seton with a digestive made of the yolk of an Egge and Oyl of Roses until the Ulcer cast forth much matter then you shall anoint the Cotton thred with this following remedy â„ž terebinthinae ven â„¥ iiij syrupi rosat absinthii an â„¥ ss pulveris Ireos diacrydii agarici trochiscati Rhei an â„¥ ss incorporentur omnia simul fiat medicamentum Which you shall use so long as you intend to keep open the ulcer For it hath a faculty to draw the humors from the face and cleanse without biting I have found not long since by experience that the apertion made with a long thick Triangular Needle of a good length like to a large Pack-needle is less painful than that which is performed with the actual cautery which I formerly mentioned Wherefore I would advise the young Chirurgeon that he no more use the foresaid actual cautery I have here given you the figure of the Needle The Figure of a Triangular Needle CHAP. XXV Of Wounds of the Cheek But when the wound is great and deep A Suture fit for hare-lips and the lips thereof are much distant the one from the other there can be no use of such a dry suture The manner thereof Wherefore you must use a three or four square Needle that so it may the more readily and easily enter into the flesh being thred with a waxed thred and with this you must thrust through the lips of the wound and leave the Needle sticking in the wound and then wrap the thred to and again over the ends thereof eight or ten times just after that manner which women use to fasten a Needle with thred in it upon their sleeves or Tailors to their hats or caps that they may not lose them The Needle thus fastened shall be there until the perfect agglutination of the wound this kind of suture is used in the wounds of the lips as also in hare-lips for so we commonly call lips which are cleft from the first conformation in the womb by the error of the forming faculty But such a sutre will help nothing to agglutination What hare-lips are if there lye or remain any skin between the lips of the wound Wherefore you shall cut away whatsoever thereof shall be there otherwise you must expect no union Other kind of Sutures are of no great use in wounds of these parts for out of the necessity of eating and speaking they are in perpetual motion wherefore a thred would cut the flesh for which reason you shall take up much flesh with such Needles mentioned in this fast described kind of Suture as this following figure shews The figure of the suture fit for cloven or hare-lips as also the delineation of the Needle about whose ends the thred is wrapped over and under to and again To this purpose I will recite a History to the end A History that if any such thing happen to come to your hands you may do the like A certain Gascoin in the battel of Saint Laurence had his upper jaw cut overthwart even to his mouth to the great disfiguring of his face The wound had many worms in it and stank exceedingly because he could get no Chirurgeon until three days after he was hurt A decoction good to wash away putrefaction Wherefore I washed it with a decoction of Wormwood Aloes and a little Aegyptiacum both to kill the Worms and to fetch away all the putrid matter I discussed the tumor with a dissolving fomentation and cataplasm I joyned together the lips of the wound with the last described suture But I applyed this following medicine to the whole part
like things are often without contusion But are oft-times poysoned WOunds made by Arrows and Bolts shot out of Cross-bows and such like things differ chiefly in two things from those which are made by Gunshot The first is for that they are oft-times without contusion which the other never are The other is for that they oft-times are poysoned In both these respects their cure is different from the other But the cure of these wounds made by Arrows is different in it self by reason of the variety and divers sorts of Darts or Arrows CHAP. XVI Of the diversity of Arrows and Darts ARrows and Darts are different amongst themselves both in matter and in form or figure The differences of Arrows In matter in number making faculty or strength In matter for that some of them are of wood some of reeds some are blunt headed others have piles or heads of iron brass lead tin horn glass bone In figure for that some are round others cornered In sign some are sharp pointed The figure of divers sorts of Arrows some barbed with the barbs standing either to the point or shafts or else across or both ways but some are broad and cut like a Chissel For their bigness In bigness some are three foot long some less For their number In number they differ in that because some have one head others more In making But they vary in making for that some of them have the shaft put into the head others the head into the shaft some have their heads nailed to the shaft others not but have their heads so loosly set on that by gentle plucking the shaft In force they leave their heads behind them whence dangerous wounds proceed But they differ in force for that some hurt by their Iron only others besides that by poyson wherewith they are infected You may see the other various shapes represented to you in this Figure CHAP. XVII Of the difference of the wounded parts THe wounded parts are either fleshy or bony some are near the joints others seated upon the very joynts some are principal others serve them some are external others internal Now in wounds where deadly signs appear it 's fit you give an absolute judgement to that effect lest you make the Art to be scandalled by the ignorant You must not leave the weapon in the wound But it is an inhumane part and much digressing from Art to leave the Iron in the wound it is sometimes difficult to take it out yet a charitable and artificial work For it is much better to try a doubtful remedy than none at all CHAP. XVIII Of drawing forth Arrows YOu must in drawing forth Arrows shun Incisions and Dilacerations of veins and Arteries Nerves and Tendons The manner of drawing forth Arrows and such weapons For it is a shameful and bungling part to do more harm with your hand than the Iron hath done Now Arrows are drawn forth two wayes that is either by extraction or impulsion Now you must presently at the first dressing pull forth all strange bodies which that you may more easily and happily perform you shall set the Patient in the same posture as he stood when he received his wound and he must have also his Instruments in a readiness chiefly that which hath a slit pipe and toothed without into which there is put a sharp Iron style like the Gimblets we formerly mentioned for the taking forth of Bullets but that it hath no screw at the end but is larger and thicker so to widen the Pipe that so widened it may fill up the hole of the Arrows head whereinto the shaft was put and so bring it forth with it both out of the fleshy as also out of the bony parts if so be that the end of the shaft be not broken and left in the hole of the head That also is a fit Instrument for this purpose which opens the other end toothed on the outside by pressing together of the handle You shall find the Iron or head that lies hid by these signs there will be a certain roughness and inequality on that part if you feel it up and down with your hand the flesh there will be bruised livid or black and there is heaviness and pain felt by the Patient both there and in the wound A delineation of Instruments fit to draw forth the heads of Arrows and Darts which are left in the wounds without shafts A hooked Instrument fit for to draw forth strange bodies as pieces of Man and such other things as it can catch hold of which may also be used in Wounds made by Gunshot But if by chance either Arrows Darts or Lances or any winged head of any other weapon be run through and left sticking in any part of the body as the thigh with a portion of the shaft or staffe slivered in pieces or broken off then it is fit the Chirurgeon with his cutting Mullets should cut off the end of the staffe or shaft and then with his other Mullets pluck forth the head as you may see by this Figure CHAP. XIX How Arrows broken in a Wound may be drawn forth BUt if it chance that the weapon is so broken in the wound that it cannot be taken hold on by the formerly mentioned Mullets then must you draw or pluck it out with your Crane or Crows-bill When to draw forth the weapon on the contrary side and other formerly described Instruments But if the shaft be broken near the head so that you cannot take hold thereof with your Cranes-bill then you shall draw it forth with your Gimblet which we described before to draw forth Bullets for if such a Gimblet can be fastned in Bullets it may far better take hold of wood But if the head be barbed as usually the English Arrows are then if it may A Dilater hollowed on the inside with a Cranes-bill to take hold on the barbed head be conveniently done it will be very fitting to thrust them through the parts For if they should be drawn out the same way they went in there would be no small danger of breaking or tearing the Vessels and Nerves by these hooked barbes Wherefore it is better to make a section on the other side whither the head tended and so give it passage forth if it may be easily done for so the wound will be the more easily clensed and consolidated But on the contrary When by the same way it went in if the point tend to any bone or have many muscles or thick flesh against the head thereof as it happens sometimes in the Thighs Legs and Arms then you must not thrust the head through but rather draw it out the same way it came in dilating the wound with fit Instruments and by skill in Anatomy shunning the larger Nerves and Vessels Therefore for this purpose put a hollow Dilater into the wound and therewith take hold of both the barbs or wings of the
which sometimes in space of time contracts a Callus others only swell and cast forth no moisture some are manifest others lye only hid within Those which run commonly cast forth blood mixed with yellowish serous moisture which stimulates the blood to break forth and by its acrimony opens the mouths of the veins But such as do not run are either like blisters such as happen in burns and by practitioners are usually called vesicales and are caused by the defluxion of a phlegmatick and serous humor or else represent a Grape whence they are called Uvales generated by the afflux of blood laudable in quality but overabundant in quantity or else they express the manner of a disease whence they are termed morales proceeding from the suppression of melancholick blood or else they represent Warts whence they are stiled Verrucales enjoying the same material cause of the generation as the morales do This affect is cause of many accidents in men Symptomes for the perpetual efflux of blood extinguisheth the vivid and lively colour of the face calls on a Dropsie overthrows the strength of the whole body The flux of Haemorrhoides is commonly every moneth sometimes only four times in a year Great pain inflammation an Abscesse which may at length end in a Fistula unless it be resisted by convenient remedies do oft-times fore-run the evacuation of the Haemorrhoides But if the Haemorrhoides flow in a moderate quantity if the Patients brook it well they ought not to be stayed for that they free the Patients from the fear of eminent evils as melancholy leprosie Sent. 37. sect 6. epid strangury and the like Besides if they be stopped without a cause they by their reflux into the Lungs cause their inflammation or else break the vessels thereof and by flowing to the Liver cause a dropsie by the suffocation of the native heat they cause a Dropsie and universal leanness on the contrary if they flow immoderately by refrigerating the Liver by loss of too much blood wherefore when as they flow too immoderately they must be stayed with a pledget of Hares-down dipped in the ensuing medicin A remedy for the immoderate flowing of the Haemorrhoides ℞ pul aloes thuris baulast sang draconis an ℥ ss incorporentur simul cum ovi albumine fiat medicamentum ad usum When they are stretched out and swoln without bleeding it is convenient to beat an Onion roasted in the embers with an Oxes gall and apply this medicin to the swoln places and renew it every five hours For supprest Haemorrhoides This kind of remedy is very prevalent for internal Haemorrhoides but such as are manifest may be opened with Horse-leaches or a Lancet The juice or mass of the hearb called commonly Dead-nettle or Arch-angel applyed to the swoln Haemorrhoides opens them and makes the congealed blood flow there-hence The Fungus and Thymus being diseases about the Fundament are cured by the same remedy If acrimony heat and pain do too cruelly afflict the Patient you must make him enter into a bath and presently after apply to the Ulcers if any such be this following remedy ℞ Olei ros ℥ iiij cerusae ℥ i. Litharg ℥ ss cerae novae ʒ vj. opii ℈ j. fiat unguent secundum artem Or else ℞ thuris myrrhae croci an ʒ j. opii ℈ j. fiat unguentum cum oleo rosarum mucilagine sem psillii addendo vitellum unius ovi You may easily prosecute the residue of the cure according to the general rules of Art The End of the Thirteenth Book The FOURTEENTH BOOK Of Bandages or Ligatures CHAP. I. Of the differences of Bandages BAndages wherewith we use to binde do much differ amongst themselves Lib. de fasciis But their differences in Galens opinion are chiefly drawn from six things to wit their matter figure length breadth making and parts whereof they consist Now the matter of Bandages is threefold Membranous or of skins which is accommodated peculiarly to the fractured grisles of the Nose of Woollen proper to inflamed parts as those which have need of no astriction of Linnen as when any thing is to be fast bound and of Linnen cloaths some are made of flax other some of hemp as Hippocrates observes Sect. 3. de Chir. offic But Bandages do thus differ amongst themselves in structure for that some thereof consist of that matter which is sufficiently close and strong of it self such are the membranous others are woven as the linnen ones But that Linnen is to be made choice of for this use and judged the best What cloth best for rowlers not which is new never formerly used but that which hath already been worn and served for other uses that so the Bandages made thereof may be the more soft and pliable yet must they be of such strength that they may not break with stretching and that they may straitly contain and repell the humor ready to flow down and so hinder it from entring the part These besides must not be hemmed nor stitched must have no lace nor seam for hems and seams by their hardness press into and hurt the flesh that lies under them Lace whether in the midst or edges of the rowler makes the Ligature unequal For the Member where it is touched with the lace as that which will not yield is pressed more hard but with the cloth in the middle more gently as that which is more lax Furthermore these Ligatures must be of clean cloth that if occasion be they may be moistened or steeped in liquor appropriate to the disease and that they may not corrupt or make worse that liquor by their moistening therein Now the Bandages which are made of Linnen clothes must be cut long-wayes and not athwart for so they shall keep more firm and strong that which they bind and besides they will be alwayes alike and not broader in one place then in another But they thus differ in figure for that some of them are rolled up to which nothing must be sowed for that they ought to be of a due length to bind up the member others are cut or divided which truely consist of one piece but that divided in the end such are usually taken to binde up the breasts or else in the midst others are sowed together which consist of many branches sowed together and ending in divers heads and representing divers figures such are the Bandages appropriated to the head But they thus differ in length for that some of them are shorter others longer so in like sort for breadth for some are broader others narrower Yet we cannot certainly define nor set down neither the length nor breadth of Rowlers for that they must be various according to the different length and thickness of the members or parts Generally they ought both in length and breadth to fit the parts whereunto they are used For these parts require a binding different each from other the head the neck shoulders arms
breasts groins testicles fundament hips thighs legs feet and toes For the parts of Bandages we tearm one part their body another their heads By the body we mean their due length and breadth Com. ad sect 22. sect 2. de offic chir but their ends whether they run long-wayes or a-cross we according to Galen tearm them their heads CHAP. II. Sheweth the Indications and general precepts of fitting of Bandages and Ligatures THere are in Hippocrates opinion two indications of fitting Bandages or Ligatures 1 2 sect lib. de fract the one whereof is taken from the part affected the other from the affect it self From the part affected so the leg if you at any time binde it up must be bound long-wayes for if you binde it over-thwart the binding will loosen as soon as the Patient begins to go and put forth his leg for then the muscles take upon them another figure On the contrary the Arm or Elbow must be bound up bending in and turned to the breast for otherwise at the first bending if it be bound when it is stretched forth the Ligature will be slacked for that as we formerly said the figure of the muscles is perverted Now for this indication let each one perswade himself thus much that the part must be bound up in that figure wherein we would have it remain Now for that Indication which is drawn from the disease if there be a hollow Ulcer sinuous and cuniculous We must alwayes begin our ligatures at the bottom of a sinus casting forth great store of Sanies then must you begin the ligature and binding from the bottom of the sinus and end at the orifice of the Ulcer and this Precept must you alwayes observe whether the sinus be sealed in the top bottom middle or sides of the Ulcer For thus the filth therein contained shall be emptied and cast forth and the lips of the Ulcer too far separated shall be joined together otherwise the contained filth will eat into all that lyes neer it increase the Ulcer and make it uncurable by rotting the bones which lye under it with this acrid sanies or filth But some Ligatures are remedies of themselves as those which perform their duties of themselves and whereto the cure is committed as are these which restore their native unity those parts which are disjoyned others are not used for their own sakes but only to serve to hold fast such medicins as have a curative faculty This kind of Ligature is either yet a doing Hip. cent 4. Sect. 2. offic Initio 2. sect off and is termed by Hippocrates Deligatio operans or else done and finished and is called Deligatio operata For the first that the Ligature may be well made it is fit that it be close rowled together and besides that the Surgeon hold it stiffe and strait in his hand and not carelesly for so he shall binde up the member the better Also he must in the binding observe that the ends of the Rowler and consequently their fastning may not fall to be on the affected or grieved part for it is better that they come above or below or else on the side Besides also he must have a special care that there be no knot tied upon the same place or upon the region of the back buttocks sides joints or back-part of the head or to conclude in any other part upon which the Patient uses to lean rest or lye Also on that part where we intend to sow or fasten the Rowlers you must double in their ends that so the fastning or suture may be the stronger otherwise how close soever they shall be wrapped or rowled about the member Ligatures must not be only lightly but also neatly performed yet will they not remain firm especially if they be of a great breadth For the second kind of Ligature to wit that which is already done and finished the Surgeon the performer thereof must consider to what end it was done and whether he hath performed it well and fitly as also neatly and elegantly to the satisfaction both of himself and the beholders For it is the part of a skilfull Workman every where handsomely and rightly to perform that which may so be done In fractures and luxations and all dislocations of bones as also in wounds and contusions you must begin your bandage with two or three windings or wraps about upon the place and that if you can more straitly than in other places that so the set bones may be the better kept in their places and that the humors if any be already fallen thither may by this strait compression be pressed forth as also to hinder and prevent the entrance in of any other which may be ready to fall down But in fractures as those which never happen without contusion the blood flowes and is pressed forth of its proper vessels as those which are violently battered and torn which causes sugillation in the neighbouring flesh which first looks red but afterwards black and blew by reason of the corruption of the blood poured forth under the skin Wherefore after these first windings which I formerly mentioned you must continue your rowling a great way from the broken or luxated part he which does otherwise will more and more draw the blood and humors into the affected part Gal. com ad sent 25. sect 1. lib. de fract and cause Impostumes and other malign accidents Now the blood which flowes goes but one way downwards but that which is pressed is carryed as it were in two paths to wit from above downwards and from below upwards Yet you must have a care that you rather drive it back into the body and bowels then towards the extremities thereof as being parts which are uncapable of so much matter and not furnished with sufficient strength to suffer that burden which threatens to fall upon it without danger and the increase of preternatural accidents But when this mass and burden of humors is thrust back into the body it is then ruled and kept from doing harm by the strength and benefit of the faculties remaining in the bowels and the native heat CHAP. III. Of the three kinds of Bandages necessary in Fractures Sent. 24. sect 2. offic TWo sorts of Ligatures are principally necessary for the Surgeon according to Hippocrates by which the bones as well broken as dislocated may be held firm when they are restored to their natural place Hypodesmides Of these some are called Hypodesmides that is Under-binders others Epidesmi that is Over-binders There are sometimes but two under-binders used but more commonly three The first must first of all be cast over the fracture and wrapped there some three or four times about then the Surgeon must mark and observe the figure of the fracture for as that shall be so must he vary the manner of his binding For the Ligature must be drawn strait upon the side opposite to that whereto the
they be either shaken or removed out of their sockets must be restored to their former places and tyed with a gold or silver wyer or else an ordinary thred to the next firm teeth untill such time as they shall be fastened and the bones pefectly knit by a Callus To which purpose the ordered fragments of the fractured bone shall be stayed by putting a splint on the outside made of such leather as shoe-soals are made The description of a fit ligature for the under Jaw the midst thereof being divided at the Chin and of such length and breadth as may serve the Jaw then you shall make ligation with a ligature two fingers broad and of such length as shall be sufficient divided at both the ends and cut long-wayes in the midst thereof that so it may engirt the chin on both sides Then there will be four heads of such a ligature so divided at the ends the two lower whereof being brought to the crown of the head shall be there fastned and sowed to the Patients night-cap The two upper drawn athwart shall likewise be sowed as artificially as may be to the cap in the nape of the neck It is a most certain sign that the Jaw is restored and well set if the teeth fastened therein stand in their due rank and order The Patient shall not lye down upon his broken Jaw lest the fragments of the bones should again fall out and cause a greater defluxion Unless inflammation In what time it may be healed or some other grievous symptom shall happen it is strengthened with a Callus within twenty dayes for that it is spongious hollow and full of marrow especially in the midst thereof yet sometimes it heals more slowly according as the temper of the Patient is which takes also place in other fractured bones The agglutinating and repelling medicin described in the former chapter shall be used as also others as occasion shall offer it self The Patient must be fed with liquid meats which stand not in need of chewing untill such time as the Callus shall grow hard lest the scarce or ill-jointed fragments should fly in sunder with the labour of chewing Therefore shall he be nourished with water-grewel ponadoes cullasses barley-creams gellies broths rear-egs restaurative liquors and other things of the like nature CHAP. VIII Of the fracture of the Clavicle or Collar-bone AS the nature and kinde of the fractured Clavicle shall be Hipp. sent 63. sect 1 de art so must the cure and restoring thereof be performed But howsoever this bone shall be broken alwayes the end fastened to the shoulder and shoulder-blade is lower than that which is joyned to the chest for that the arm drawes it downwards The collar-bone if broken athwart is more easily restored and healed than if it be cloven long-wayes For every bone broken athwart doth more easily return into its former state or seat whiles you lift it up on this or that side with your fingers But that which is broken schidacidon or into splinters or long-wayes is more difficultly joined and united to the ends and fragments for those pieces which were set will be plucked asunder even by the least motion of the arms and that which was knit with the shoulder will fall down to the lower part of the breast The reason of which is the collar-bone is not moved of its self but consents in motion with the arm In restoring this or any other fracture How to restore the fractured Clavicle The first way you must have a care that the bones ride not one over another neither be drawn nor depart too far in sunder therefore it will be here convenient that one servant draw the arm backwards and another pull the shoulder towards him the contrary way for so there will be made as I may so term it a counter-extension While which is in doing the Surgeon with his fingers shall restore the fracture pressing down that which stood up too high and lifting up that which is pressed down too low Some that they may more easily restore this kind of fracture The second way put a clew of yarn under the Patients arm-pit so to fill up the cavity thereof then they forcibly press the elbow to the ribs and then force the bone into its former seat But if it happen The third way that the ends of the broken bones shall be so deprest that they cannot be drawn upwards by the forementioned means then must the Patient be laid with his back just between the shoulders upon a pillow hard stuffed or a tray turned with the bottom upwards and covered with a rug or some such thing Then the servant shall so long press down the Patients shoulders with his hands untill the ends of the bones lying hid and pressed down fly out and shew themselves Which being done the Surgeon may easily restore or set the fractured bone But if the bone be broken so into splinters that it cannot be restored and any of the splinters prick and wound the flesh and so cause difficulty of breathing you then must cut the skin even against them and with your instrument lift up all the depressed splinters and cut off their sharp points so to prevent all deadly accidents which thereupon may be feared If there be any fragments they after they are set shall be covered with a knitting medicin made of wheat flour frankincense bole armeniack sanguis draconis resina pini made into powder and mixed with the whites of eggs putting upon it splints covered with soft worn linnen rags covered over likewise with the same medicin and then three boulsters dipped in the same two whereof shall be laid upon the sides but the third and thickest upon the prominent fracture so to repress it and hold it in How to bind up the fractured clavicle For thus the fragments shall not be able to stir or lift themselves up further than they should either to the right side or left Now these boulsters must be of a convenient thickness and breadth sufficient to fill up the cavities which are above and below that bone Then shall you make fit ligation with a rowler having a double head cast cross-wise of a hands breadth and some two ells and a half long more or less according to the Patients body Now he shall be so rowled up as it may draw his arm somewhat backwards and in the interim his arm-pits shall be filled with boulsters especially that next the broken bone for so the Patient may more easily suffer the binding Also you shall wish the Patient that he of himself bend his arm backwards and set his hand upon his hip as the Country Clowns use to do when they play at leap-frog But how great diligence soever you use in curing this sort of fracture yet can it scarce be so performed It is a difficult matter perfectly to restore a fractured clavicle but that there will some deformity remain in
put to undergo solid offices and motions According to the variety of causes Remedies therefore medicines shall be applyed For if the ligature of the part be too strait it shall be loosed yea verily the fractured place the ligature being taken away shall be quite freed from ligation and a new kind of ligature must be made which must be rowled down from the root of the vessels that is from the arm-pits if the arm or from the groin if the leg be broken to the fracture yet so as that you may leave it untouched or taken in for thus the bloud is pressed from the fountain and spring and forced into the affected part by a way quite contrary to that whereby we have formerly taught in fear of inflamation to hinder it from entrance into the affected part Also gentle frictions and fomentations with warm water may be profitably made When we must desist from fomenting and frictions from which you must then desist when the part shall begin to grow hot and swell If any too long continue these frictions and fomentations he shall resolve that which he hath drawn thither For this we have oftentimes observed that frictions and fomentations have contrary effects according to the shortness and continuance of time Pications will also conduce to this purpose and other things which customarily are used to members troubled with an atrophia or want of nourishment CHAP. XXX Of fomentations which be used to broken bones Warm water The effects thereof DIvers fomentations are used to broken bones for several causes When we use warm water for a fomentation we mean that which is just between hot and cold that is which feels lukewarm to the hand of the Physitian and Patient A fomentation of such water used for some short space doth moderately heat attenuate and prepare for resolution the humour which is in the surface of the body it draws bloud and an alimentary humour to the part labouring of an atrophia it asswages pain relaxes that which is too much extended and moderately heats the member refrigerated through occasion of too strait binding or by any other means On the contrary too hot fomenting cools by accident digesting and discussing the hot humour which was contained in the member We mean a short time is spent in fomenting when the part begins to grow red and swell Notes of short just and too long fomenting Fomentations hurt plethorick bodies a just space when the part is manifestly red and swoln but we conjecture that much or too much time is spent thereon if the redness which formerly appeared go away and the tumour which lifted up the part subside Also in fomenting you must have regard to the body whereto it is used For if it be plethorick an indifferent fomentation will distend the part with plenty of superfluous humours but if it be lean and spare it will make the part more fleshy and succulent Now it remains that we say somewhat of the fracture of the bones of the feet CHAP. XXXI Of the fracture of the bones of the feet Why the fractured bones of the foot must be kept in a strait posture THe bones of the instep back and toes of the feet may be fractured as the bones of the hands may Wherefore these shall be cured like them but that the bones of the toes must not be kept in a crooked posture as the bones of the fingers must lest their action should perish or be depraved For as we use our legs to walk so we use our feet to stand Besides also the Patient shall keep his bed until they be knit The end of the fifteenth Book The SIXTEENTH BOOK Of DISLOCATIONS or LUXATIONS CHAP. I. Of the kinds and manners of Dislocations A Dislocation is the departure or falling out of the head of a bone from its proper cavity into an accustomed place besides nature hindring voluntary motion What a Luxation properly so called is What a Luxation not properly so called is There is another kind of Luxation which is caused by a violent distention and as it were a certain divarication and dilatation or extension into length and bredth of the ligaments and all the nervous bodies which contain strengthen and bind together the joints Thus those who have been tormented and racked have that thick ligament which is in the inner cavity of the huckle bone too violently extended Those who have suffered the Strappado have the ligaments encompassing the articulation of the arm bone with the shoulder blade forcibly and violently distended Such also is their affect whose foot is strained by slipping There is a third kinde of Luxation The third kind of dislocation when as those bones which are joyned contiguous and one as it were bound to the sides of another gape or fly asunder as in the arm when the ell parts from the wand in the leg when the one focile flies from the other yet this may be referred to the second sort of dislocations because it happens not without dilatation or else the breaking of the ligaments There is also a fourth added to these The fourth as when the Epiphyses and heads of bones are plucked from the bone whereon they were placed or fastned which unproperly called kind of Luxation hath place chiefly in the bones of young people and it is known by the impotency of the part and by the noise and grating together of the crakling bones when they are handled Now the bones of young folks are also incident to another casualty for as the bones of old people are broken by violence by reason of their driness and hardness thus the bones of children are bended or crooked in by reason of their natural softness and humidity CHAP. II. Of the differences of Dislocations SOme Dislocations are simple others compound What Luxations are simple What compound We term them simple which have no other preternatural affect joyned with them and such compound as are complicated with one or more preternatural affects as when a dislocation is associated with a wound fracture great pain inflamation and an abscess For through occasion of these we are often compelled so long to let alone the luxation until these be remitted of themselves or by our art Some dislocations are compleat and perfect as when the bone wholly falls out of its concavity What a compleat Luxation is other some are unperfect as when it is only lightly moved and not wholly fallen out wherefore we only call them subluxations or strains Differences of Luxations are also drawn from the place for sometimes the bone is wrested forwards otherwhiles backwards upwards downwards somewhiles it may be wrested according to all these differences of site and otherwhiles only according to some of them Differences are also taken from the condition of the dislocated Joint in greatness and littleness from the superficiary or deep excavation of the sinus or hollowness and lastly from the time as if it be
bone But you shall find very few who will suffer such strait ligation so long though it be never so necessary Verily this kind of luxation is hard to be known but far more difficult to be healed I have known many Surgeons deceived who have taken the luxation of the collar bone for the dislocation of the top of the shoulder For then the Epomis or top of the shoulder swels and the place from whence the collar bone is flown is depressed with a manifest cavity with vehement pain inflamation and impotency of lifting up or otherwise moving the arm or performing other actions which are done by the help of the shoulder Certainly if this bone when it is dislocated be not set the Patient shall be lame during his life so that he shall not be able neither to put his hand to his head nor mouth CHAP. XII Of the luxation of the Spine or Back bone THe back bone consists of many bony vertebrae An anatomical description of the Spine like rowls or wheels mutually joynted or knit together by their smoothness and circular form conspiring to an aptness of moving or bending forwards For if it should consist of one bone we should stand continually with the trunk of our bodies immoveable as thrust through with a stake The vertebrae have a hole passing through the midst of them whereby the marrow passing this way out â—â—om the brain as by a pipe may serve for the generation of the sensitive and motive nerves and their distribution into all parts beneath the head For which purpose it is perforated with many holes on the sides through each whereof certain conjugations of the nerves pass forth into the rest of the body and veins and arteries pass in for the propagation of nourishment and life The whole exteriour face of the Spine is rough The variety of the processes of the Spine and as it were armed with four sorts of apophyses or processes whereof some stand up others down some direct others transverse Wherefore from these thorny and sharp processes the whole hath acquired the name of the Spina The vertebrae the further from the neck they are the greater they grow so that those which are the lowest are the largest for it is agreeable to reason that that which bears should be greater then that which is born Hence we see that the holy bone is placed under the rest as a foundation The side processes of the rack bones of the chest Gal. cap. 7. lib. 13. de usu partium besides the benefit of defending the spinal marrow shut up therein from external injuries have also another which is they firm and fasten the bones of the ribs by a strong tye There lies a gristle and a tough and as it were albuminous humour between the vertebrae which makes them as also all the other joints of the body slippery and fit for motion the spine is flexible with notable agility forwards only but not backwards for that so there would be continual danger of breaking the hollow ascendent vein and the great descending artery running thereunder Therefore the dearticulations of the vertebrae mutually strengthened with strong ligaments do look more backwards I have thought good to premise these things of the nature of the spine before I come to dislocations happening thereto I willingly omit divers other things which are most copiously delivered by Galen Lib. 13. de usu partium content only to add thus much that there is nothing to be sound in the whole structure of mans bones which more clearly manifests the industry of Gods great workmanship than this composure of the spine and the vertebrae thereof CHAP. XIII Of the dislocation of the head The connexion of the head with the first Rack bone of the neck Prognosticks THe head stands upon the neck knit by dearticulation to the first vertebra thereof by the interposition of two processes which arise from the basis thereof near the hole through which the marrow of the brain passes down into the back bone and they are received by fit cavities hollowed in this first vertebra These processes sometimes fall out of their cavities and cause a dislocation behind whereby the spinal marrow is too violently and hard compressed bruised and extended the chin is fastned to the brest and the Patient can neither drink nor speak wherefore death speedily follows upon this kind of luxation not through any fault of the Surgeon but by the greatness of the disease refusing all cure CHAP. XIV Of the dislocation of the vertebrae or rack bones of the neck The danger hereof THe other vertebrae of the neck may be both dislocated and strained Dislocation verily unless it be speedily helped brings sudden death for by this means the spinal marrow is presently opprest at the very original thereof and the nerves therehence arising suffer also together therewith and principally those which serve for respiration whereby it cometh to pass that the animal spirit cannot come and disperse it self into the rest of the body lying thereunder hence proceed sudden inflamation the squinsie and a difficulty or rather a defect of breathing But a strain or incompleat luxation brings not the like calamity by this the vertebrae Signs and symptoms of their subluxation The cure a little moved out of their seats are turned a little to the hind or fore-part then the neck is wrested aside the face looks black and there is difficulty of speaking and breathing Such whether dislocation or strain is thus restored The Patient must be set upon a low seat and then one must lean and lie with his whole weight upon his shoulders and the mean while the Surgeon must take the Patients head about his ears betwixt his hands and so shake and move it to every part until the vertebra be restored to its place Signs of their restitution We may know it is set by the sudden ceasing of the pain which before grievously afflicted the Patient and by the free turning and moving his head and neck every way After the restoring it the head must be inclined to the part opposite to the Luxation and the neck must be bound up about the dearticulation of the shoulder but yet so that the ligature be not too strait lest by pressing the weazon and gullet it straiten the passages of breathing and swallowing CHAP. XV. Of the dislocated vertebrae of the Back Differences and signs THe Rack bones of the back may be dislocated inwards outwards to the right side and to the left We know they are dislocated inwards when as they leave a depressed cavity in the spine outwardly when they make a bunch on the back and we know they are luxated to the right or left side Causes when as they obliquely bunch forth to this or that side The vertebrae are dislocated by a cause either internal or external as is common to all other Luxations the internal is either the defluxion of humours
subject to generate this internal cause of defluxion If external occasions shall concur with these internal causes The error of Nurses in binding and lacing of Children the vertebrae will sooner be dislocated Thus Nurses whilest they too straitly lace the breasts and sides of girles so to make them slender cause the breast-bone to cast its self in forwards or backwards or else the one shoulder to be bigger or fuller the other more spare and lean The same error is committed if they lay children more frequently and long upon their sides than upon their backs or if taking them up when they wake they take them only by the feet or legs and never put their other hand under their backs never so much as thinking that children grow most towards their heads CHAP. XVIII Prognosticks of the Dislocated Vertebrae of the back IF in Infancy it happen that the vertebrae of the back shall be dislocated the ribs will grow little or nothing in breadth but run outwards before therefore the chest loseth its natural latitude Hipp. sent 6. sect 3. de art and stands out with a sharp point Hence they become asthmatick the lungs and muscles which serve for breathing being pressed together and straitned and that they may the easilier breathe they are forced to hold up their heads whence also they seem to have great throats Now because the Weazon being thus pressed the breath is carryed through a strait passage therefore they whease as they breathe and short in their sleep for that their lungs which receive and send forth the breath or air be of less bigness besides also they are subject to great distillations upon their lungs whereby it cometh to pass that they are shorter lived But such as are bunch-backed below the midriffe are incident to diseases of the kidneys and bladder and have smaller and slenderer thighs and legs and they more slowly and sparingly cast forth hair and have beards to conclude they are less fruitfull and more subject to barrenness than such as have their crookedness above their midriffe The Bunches which proceed from external causes are oft-times curable but such as have their original from an inward cause are absolutely uncurable unless they be withstood at the first with great care and industry Wherefore such as have it by kinde Why when the spine is luxated the parts belonging to the chest are nourished and grow the less never are helped Such as whilest they are yet children before their bodies be come to perfect growth have their spine crooked and bunching out their bodies use not to grow at the spine but their legs and arms come to their perfect and full growth yet the parts belonging to their breasts and back become more slender Neither is it any wonder for seeing the veins arteries and nerves are not in their places the spirits do neither freely nor the alimentary juices plenteously flow by these straitened passages whence leanness must needs ensue but the limbs shall thence have no wrong for that not the whole body but the neighbouring parts only are infected with the contagion of this evil When divers vertebrae following each other in order are together and at one time dislocated the dislocation is less dangerous Why the luxation of one vertebra is more dangerous than of many than if one alone were luxated For when one only vertebra is dislocated it carries the spinal marrow so away with it that it forces it almost into a sharp angle wherefore being more straitly pressed it must necessarily be either broken or hurt which is absolutely deadly for that it is the brains substitute But when divers vertebrae are dislocated at once it must of necessity be forced only into an obtuse angle or rather a semicircle by which compression it certainly suffers but not so as that death must necessarily ensue thereon Hereto may seem to belong that which is pronounced by Hippocrates Sent. 51. sect 3. lib. de art a circular moving of the vertebrae out of their places is less dangerous than an angular CHAP. XIX Of the dislocation of the Rump The signs THe rump oft-times is after a sort dislocated inwards by a violent fall upon the buttocks or a great blow in this affect the Patient cannot bring his heel to his buttocks neither unless with much force bend his knee Going to stool is painfull to him neither can he sit unless in a hollow chair The cure That this as it were dislocation may be restored you must thrust your finger in by the Fundament even to the place affected as we have said in a fracture then must you strongly raise up the bone and with your other hand at the same time join it rightly on the outside with the neighbouring parts Lastly it must be strengthened with the formerly mentioned remedies and kept in its place Now it will be recovered about the twentieth day after it is set During all which time the Patient must not go to stool unless sitting upon a hollow seat lest the bone as yet scarce well recovered should fall again out of its place CHAP. XX. Of the luxation of the ribs THe ribs may by a great and brusing stroak be dislocated Causes and fall from the vertebra whereto they are articulated and they may be driven inwards or sideways Of which kind of luxation though there be no particular mention made by the Ancients yet they confess that all the bones may fall or be removed from their seats or cavities wherein they are received and articulated The sign of a rib dislocated and slipped on one side is a manifest inequality Signs which here makes a hollowness and there a bunching forth but it is a sign that it is driven in when as there is only a depressed cavity where it is knit and fastned to the vertebrae Such dislocations cause divers symptomes as difficulty of breathing the hurt rib hindring the free moving of the chest a painfulness in bowing down or lifting up the body occasioned by a pain counterfeiting a pleurisie the rising or puffing up of the musculous flesh about the rib by a mucous and flatulent humour there generated the reasons whereof we formerly mentioned in our Treatise of Fractures To withstand all these the dislocation must be forthwith restored Cure then the puffing up of the flesh must be helped Wherefore if the dislocated rib shall fall upon the upper side of the vertebra the Patient shall be set upright hanging by his arms upon the top of some high door or window then the head of the rib where it stands forth shall be pressed down until it be put into its cavity Again if the rib shall fall out upon the lower side of the vertebra it will be requisite that the Patient bend his face downwards setting his hands upon his knees then the dislocation may be restored by pressing or thrusting in the knot or bunch which stands forth Gal. com ad sent 3. sect 1.
de art But if the luxated rib fall inwards it can no more be restored or drawn forth by the hand of the Surgeon than a vertebra which is dislocated towards the inside for the reasons formerly delivered CHAP. XXI Of a dislocated shoulder THe shoulder is easily dislocated because the ligaments of its dearticulation are soft and loose as also for that the cavity of the shoulder blade is not very deep and besides it is every where smooth and polite no otherwise than that of the shoulder bone for that it is herein received Add hereunto that there is no internal ligament from bone to bone Why there is no internal ligament from the arm bone to the shoulder blade Differences of a luxated shoulder which may strengthen that dearticulation as is in the leg and knee Wherein notwithstanding we must not think nature defective but rather admire Gods providence in this thing for that this articulation serves not only for extension and bending as that of the elbow but besides for a round or circular motion as that which carries the arm round about now up then down according to each difference of site The shoulder bone which Hippocrates cals the arm bone may be dislocated four manner of ways upwards downwards or into the arm-pit forwards and outwards but never backwards or to the hinder part For seeing that there the cavity of the blade bone which receives the head of the arm bone which Hippocrates calls a joint Sent. 1. sect 1. lib. de art lies and stands against it who is it that can but imagine any such dislocation In like sort it is never dislocated inwardly for on this part it hath the flesh of a strong muscle termed Deltoides lying over it besides also the back and acromion of the blade and lastly the anchor-like or beak-like process all which four hinder this joint from slipping inwards Now Hiprocrates saith that he hath only seen one kind of dislocation of this bone to wit that which is downwards or to the arm-pit and certainly it is the most usual and frequent wherefore we intend to handle it in the first place When the shoulder is dislocated downwards into the arm-pit Signs of the shoulder dislocated downwards a depressed cavity may be perceived in the upper part of the joint the acromion of the blade shews more sharp and standing forth than ordinary for that the head of the shoulder bone is slipt down and hid under the arm-pit causing a swelling forth in that place the elbow also casts it self as it were outwards and stands further off from the ribs and though you force it yet can you not make it to touch them the Patient cannot lift up his hand to his ear on that side neither to his mouth nor shoulder Which sign is not peculiar to the luxated shoulder but common to it affected with a contusion fracture inflamation wound abscess schirrus or any defluxion upon the nerves arising out of the vertebrae of the neck and sent into the arm also this arm is longer than the other Lastly which also is common to each difference of a luxated shoulder the Patient can move his arm by no kind of motion without sense of pain by reason of the extended and pressed muscles some also of their fibres being broken The ways to restore it There are six ways to restore the shoulder luxated downwards into the arm-pit The first is when it is performed with ones fist or a towel the second with a clew of yarn which put under the arm-pit shall be thrust up with ones heel the third with ones shoulder put under the arm-hole which manner together with the first is most fit for new and easily to be restored luxations as in those who have loose flesh and effeminate persons as children eunuchs and women the fourth with a ball put under the arm-pit and then the arm cast over a piece of wood held upon two mens shoulders or two standing posts the fifth with a ladder the sixth with an instrument called an Ambi. We will describe these six ways and present them to your view CHAP. XXII Of the first manner of setting a Shoulder which is with ones Fist FIrst let one of sufficient strength placed on the opposite side firmly hold the Patient upon the joint of the shoulder lest he move up and down with his whole body at the necessary extension working and putting it in then let another taking hold of his arm above the elbow so draw and extend it downwards that the head thereof may be set just against its cavity Gal. com ad sent 23. sect 1. de art hollowed in the blade-bone Then at last let the Surgeon lift and force up with his fist the head of the An expression of the first manner of putting a Shoulder into joint bone into its cavity Here this is chiefly to be observed that in fresh luxations especially in a body soft effeminate moist and not over corpulent that it sometimes comes to pass that by the only means of just extension the head of the bone freed from the muscles and other particles wherewith it was as it were entangled will betake it self into its proper cavity the muscles being by this means restored to their place and figure and drawing the bone with them as they draw themselves towards their heads as it were with a sudden gird or twitch wherefore in many A perfect setting the luxated shoulder by extension only whilest we thought no such thing it sufficed for restitution only to have extended the arm But if the luxation be inveterate and the hand cannot serve then must the Patients shoulder be fastned to a post with the forementioned ligature or else committed to ones charge who may stand at his back and hold him fast Then the arm shall presently be tyed about a little above the elbow with a fillet whereto a cord shall be fastened which being put or fastned to the pulley shall be drawn or stretched forth as much as need shall require Lastly the Surgeon with a towel or such like ligature fastned about his neck and hanging down and so put under the Patients arm-pit near to the luxation shall raising himself upon his feet with the whole strength of his neck lift up the shoulder and also at the same time bringing his arm to the Patients breast shall set the head of the shoulder-bone forced with both his hands into its cavity as you may see by the precedent figure Then must you cover all the adjacent parts with a medicine made ex farinâ volatili bolo armenio myrtillis pice resinâ alumine beaten into powder and mixed with the white of an egg Then must the hollowness under the arm be filled with a clew of woollen or cotten yarn or a linnen cloth spread over with a little oil of Roses or Myrtles a little vinegar and unguentum rosatum or refrigerans Galeni lest it stick to the hairs if there be any
there The part must afterwards be bound up with a ligature consisting of two heads of some five fingers breadth and two ells long more or less according as the body shall require The midst thereof shall be put immediately under the arm-pit and then crossed over the lame shoulder and so crossing it as much as shall be fit it shall be wrapped under the opposite arm And lastly the arm shall be laid upon the breast and put in a scarf in a middle figure almost to right angles so that by lifting up the hand he may almost touch his sound shoulder lest the bone newly set may fall out again neither shall the first dressing be stirred untill four or five dayes be past unless the greatness of some happening symptom divert us from this our purpose CHAP. XXIII Of the second manner of restoring a Shoulder that is with the heel when as the Patient by reason of pain can neither sit nor stand THe Patient must be laid with his back on the ground upon a cover-lid or mat Hipp sent 12. sect 1. de art and a clew of yarn or leathern ball stuffed with Tow or Cotton of such bigness as may serve to fill up the cavity must be put under his arm-pit that so the bone may straight-wayes the more easily be forced by the heel into its cavity Then let the Surgeon The expression of the second manner of restoring a Shoulder sit beside him even over against the luxated shoulder and if his right shoulder be luxated he shall put his right heel to the ball which filled up the arm-pit but if the left then the left heel then let him forthwith draw towards him the Patients arm taking hold thereof with both his hands and at the same instant of time strongly press the arm-pit with his heel Whilest this is in doing one shall stand at the Patients back who shall lift up his shoulder with a towel or some such thing fitted for that purpose and also with his heel press down the top of the shoulder-blade another also shall sit on the other side of the Patient who holding him shall hinder him from stirring this way or that way at the necessary extension in setting it as you may see it express'd by the precedent figure CHAP. XXIV The third manner of restoring a Shoulder The figure of the third manner of putting a Shoulder into joint SOme one who is of a competent height and strength shall put the sharp part of the top of his shoulder under the Patients arm-pit and also at the same time shall somewhat violently draw his arm towards his own breast so that the Patients whole body may as it were hang thereby In the mean time another for the greater impression shall lay his weight on the luxated shoulder shaking it with his whole body Thus the shoulder drawn downwards by the one which stands under the arm-hole and moved and shaken by the other who hangs upon it may be restored into its seat by the help of the Surgeon concurring therewith and with his hand governing these violent motions as this figure shewes CHAP. XXV Of the fourth manner of restoring a dislocated shoulder YOu must take a perch or piece of The figure of the fourth manner of restoring the shoulder wood somewhat resembling that which the Water-bearers of Paris use to put on their shoulders some two inches broad and some six foot long in the midst hereof let there be fastned a clew of yarn or ball of sufficient bigness to fill up the cavity of the arm-hole Let there be two pins put in one on each side of the ball each alike distant therefrom with which as with staies the shoulder may be kept in and upon the ball that it slip not away from it Let two strong men taller then the Patient either by nature or art put this perch upon their shoulders then let the Patient put his arm-pit upon that place where the ball stands up the Surgeon must be ready to pull his hanging arm downwards Thus the Patient shall as it were hang on the perch with his shoulder and so the head of the bone shall be forced into its cavity as this figure declares wherein you may see the perch or yoak with the two wooden pins and ball fastned in the midst delineated by it self CHAP. XXVI Of the fifth manner of putting the shoulder into joint which is performed by a Ladder YOu may also restore a shoulder dislocated The delineation of the fifth manner of restoring a shoulder into the arm-pit by the help of a Ladder after this manner Let some round body as a ball or clew of yarn which as we formerly said may serve to fill the arm-pit be fastned upon one of the upper steps of a Ladder at the foot of the Ladder set a low stool whereupon let the Patient mount then bind both his legs and also his sound arm behind his back lest when you are about your operation he hinder and spoil all you do by laying his hand or setting his foot upon the Ladder Then let his arm be presently put over the step of the Ladder and his arm-pit put upon the there fastned ball the Patient in the mean while being wished to come with his whole body as near unto the steps of the Ladder as he is able for otherwise besides that there is no other hope of restoring the luxation there would be no small danger of breaking the shoulder bone Also let him take heed that he put not his head between the steps Then his arm bound above the Elbow with filleting or some other ligature fit for that purpose shall be drawn down by the hand of some that assist you and at the same time let the stool be plucked from under his feet so that he may hang upon the Ladder Thus by this means the head of the shoulder will be restored by it self the endeavour of the Surgeon assisting and pressing down the shoulder blade and moving it to and and again The bone being set the stool which a little before was plucked from under the Patients feet shall be put there again that he may with the more ease and less pain pull back his arm from the step of the Ladder For if he should lift it high up to draw it over there would be danger lest being newly set and not well staid the head of the bone might fall out again I have thought good to have all these things here expressed that you may learn this operation as if you see it done before you I have not thought fit in this place to omit the industry of Nicholas Picart the Duke of Guise his Surgeon who being called to a certain Country man to set his shoulder being out of joint and finding none in the place besides the Patient and his wife who might assist him in this work he put the Patient bound after the aforementioned manner to a Ladder then immediately he tied a staff at the
longest therein without moving CHAP. XXX Of the Shoulder dislocated upwards Signs THe head of the shoulder also may sometimes be luxated into the upper part Which when it happens it shewes it self by bunching forth at the end of the collar-bone the hollowness of the arm-pit is sound larger than usual the elbow slyes further from the ribs than when it fell downwards now the arm is wholly unable to perform the usual actions It is fit for the restitution of such a luxation that the Surgeon stoop down and put his shoulder under the Patients arm Cure and then stand up as high as he can upon his feet and therewithall press down the head of the shoulder-bone into the cavity or else make some other to do it Otherwise it is fit to lay the Patient upon his back on the ground and whilest some one extends the affected arm by drawing it downwards the Surgeon with his own hand may force down the head of the bone into its cavity The operation performed the same things shall be done as in other luxations compresses being applyed to that part whereto the bone flew and it being also bound up with ligatures Now you may understand in these four forementioned kinds of dislocations that the bone which was luxated is restored by the sound which shall be heard as you force it in by the restitution of the accustomed actions which are perceived by the bending extending and lifting it up by the mitigation of the pain and lastly by the collation and comparing of the affected arm with the sound and by its similitude and equality therewith CHAP. XXXI Of the dislocation of the Elbow The Author seems not to agree with Hip. Sent. ult sect 3. fract and Celsus in the setting down the â—inds of a dislocated Elbow THe Elbow may also be four manner of wayes dislocated to wit inwardly outwardly upwards and downwards By the part which is inwards I mean that which looks towards the center of the body when as the arm is placed in a natural site to wit in a middle figure between prone and supine I make the outward part that which is contrary thereto By the upper part I mean that which is towards the heaven and by the lower that which is next to the earth and by how much the joint of the elbow consists of more heads and cavities than that of the shoulder by so much when it is luxated it is the more difficultly set and it is also more subject to inflammation and to grow hard thereupon as Hippocrates saith Now the joint of the elbow is more difficultly dislocated than that of the shoulder and more hardly set for that the bones of the cubit and arm do receive and enter each other by that manner of articulation which is termed Ginglymus as we have formerly more at large treated in our Anatomy and a little before in our Treatise of fractures The elbow is therefore dislocated for that the processes thereof of are not turned about the shoulder-bone in a full orb and by an absolute turning Wherefore if at any time the cubit be bended more straitly and closely than that the inner process can retain its place and station in the bottom of its sinus the hind-process falleth out and is dislocated backwards But when as the fore-process is extended more violently and forced against the bottom of its cavity it slyes and departs out of its place as beaten or forced thence and this kind of luxation is far more difficultly restored than the former adde hereunto that the utter extremity of the cubit which is called Olâ—cranum is the higher but the other inner is the lower whence it is that every one can better and more easily bend than extend their cubits Therefore such a dislocation is caused by a more violent force than that which is made to the inner side * The Author doth not agree with Hippocr and Celsus in setting down the notes of these dislocations for those notes which are here attributed to an outward and inward luxation these Celsus hat given to an elbow dislocated towards the fore and out-part and those which are here attributed to the e bow dislocated upwards and downwards those Celsus hath attributed to a dislocation to the out and insides The sign of this luxation is the arm remains extended neither can it be bended for the inner process stayes in the external cavity which is hollowed in the bottom of the shoulder-bone which formerly was possessed by the inner part of the Olecranum which thing makes the restitution difficult for that this process is kept as it were imprisoned there But when it falleth out dislocated to the forepart the arm is crooked neither is it extended and it is also shorter than the other But if the elbow be fallen out of its place according to the other manner of dislocations to wit upwards or downwards the natural figure thereof is perverted for the arm is stretched forth but little notwithstanding bended towards that part from whence the bone went that is figured after a middle manner between bending and extending thereof What kind soever of dislocation shall befall it the action of the elbow will either not be at all or certainly not well untill that it be restored to its former place there is a swelling in the part whereinto it is flown and a cavity there from whence it is fled Inflammation hinders reposition which also happens in the dislocations of all other parts Furthermore one dislocation of the elbow is compleat and perfect another imperfect The latter as it easily happens and through a small occasion so it is easily restored but on the contrary a perfect as it hardly happens and not unless with great violence so it is not so easily restored again especially if that you do not prevent inflammation for being inflamed it makes the restitution either difficult or wholly impossible principally that which falleth outwards CHAP. XXXII How to restore the Elbow dislocated outwardly YOu may know that the elbow is dislocated outwardly Sâ—gn if at any time you shall observe the arm to be distended and not able to be bended Wherefore you must forthwith undertake the restitution thereof for fear of defluxion and inflammation which the bitterness of pain usually causeth upon what part soever the luxation happens Cure There is one manner of restoring it which is you must cause one to hold hard and steddy the Patients arm a little under the joint of the shoulder and in the mean while let the Surgeon draw the arm taking hold thereof with his hand and also force the shoulder-bone outwards and the eminency of the cubit inwards but let him by little and little draw and extend the arm wresting it gently this way and that way that he may bring back the bone which fell out into its cavity A Caution I have thus expressely delivered this that the young Surgeon may understand that the arm
to the side opposite to that towards which the bone fell that so also in some measure it may be more and more forced into its place In the mean time you must have a care that you do not too straitly press the great and large tendon which is at the heel This kinde of dislocation is restored in forty days unless some accident happen which may hinder it CHAP. LIII Of the dislocation of the Heel Causes and differences WHosoever leaping from an high place have fallen very heavy upon their heel have their heel dislocated and divided from the pastern-bone This dislocation happens more frequently inwardly then outwardly because the prominencie of the lesser Focile embraces the pastern-bone whence it is that there it is more straitly and firmly knit It is restored by extension and forcing it in which will be no very difficult matter The Cure unless some great defluxion or inflammation hinder it For the binding up it most be straitest in the part affected that so the blood may be pressed from thence into the neighbouring parts yet using such a moderation that it may not be painful not press more straitly than is fit the nerves and gross tendons which runs to the heel This dislocation is not confirmed before the fortieth day though nothing happen which may hinder it Yet usually it happeneth that many symptomes ensue by the vehemencie of the contusion Wherefore it will not be amiss to handle them in a particular chapter CHAP. LIV. Of the Symptoms which follow upon the contusion of the Heel Why blood-letting necessary in the fracture of a heel IT happeneth by the vehemencie of this contusion that the veins and arteries do as it were vomit up blood both through the secret passages of their coats as also by their ends or orifices whence an Ecchymosis or blackness over all the heel pain swelling and other the like ensue which implore remedies and the Surgeons help to wit convenient diet Hip. sect 3. de fracturis and drawing of bloud by opening a vein of which though Hippocrates makes no mention yet it is here requisite by reason of the Feaver and inflammation and if need require purgation principally such as may divert the matter by causing vomit and lastly the application of local medicines chiefly such as may soften and rarifie the skin under the heel otherwise usually hard and thick such as are fomentations of warm water and oil so that divers times wee are forced to scarifie it with a lancet shunning the quick flesh For so at length the blood poured forth into the part and there heaped up is more easily attenuated and at length resolved But these things must all bee performed before the inflamtion seiz upon the part otherwise there will bee danger of a convulsion For the blood Why the heel is subject to inflammation when it fall's out of the vessels readily putrifie's by reason the densitie of this part hinder's it from ventilation dispersing to the adjacent parts Hereto may bee added that the large and great tendon wich cover's the heel is endued with exquisite sens and also the part it self is on every side spred over with many nervs Besides also there is further danger of inflammation by lying upon the back and heel as wee before admonished you in the Fracture of a leg Therefore I would have the Surgeon to bee here most attentive and diligent to perform these things which wee have mentioned left by inflammation a Gangrene and Mortification for here the sanious flesh presently fall's uppon the bone happen together with a continued and sharp Fever with trembling hicketting and raving For the corruption of this part first by contagion assail's the next and thence a Fever assail's the heart by the arteries pressed and growing hot by the putrid heat and by the nervs and that great and notable tendon made by the concours of the three muscles of the calf of the leg Gal. ad sent 23. sect 2. lib. de fract the muscles brain and stomach are evilly affected and drawn into consent and so caus convulsions raving and a deadly hicketting CHAP. LV. Of the dislocated Pastern or Ancle-bone THe Astragalus or pastern bone may bee dislocated and fall out of its place to every side Wherefore when it fall's out towards the inner part Sign the sole of the foot is turned outwards when it flie's out to the contrarie the sign is also contrarie if it bee dislocated to the foreside on the hinde side the broad tendon coming under the heel is hardned and distended but if it bee luxated backards the whole heel is as it were hid in the foot neither doth this kinde of dislocation happen withou much violence It is restored by extending it with the hands and forcing it into the contrary part to that from whence it fell Beeing restored it is kept so by application of medicins and fit ligation The patient must keep his bed long in this case Cure lest that bone which sustain's and bear's up the whole bodie may again sink under the burden and break out the sinews beeing not well knit and strengthned CHAP. LVI Of the dislocation of the In-step and back of the foot THe bones also of the In-step and back of the foot may bee luxated and that either upwards or downwards or to one side though seldom sidewise for the reason formerly rendred speaking of the dislocation of the like bones of the hand Cure If that they stand upwards then must the patient tread hard upon som plain or even place and then the Surgeon by pressing them with his hand shal force them into their places on the contrary if they stand out of the sole of the foot then must you press them thence upwards and restore each bone to its place They may bee restored after the same manner if they bee flown out to either side But you must note that although the Ligatures consist but of one head in other dislocations yet here Hippocrates would have such used as have two heads for that the dislocation happen's more from below upwards Sent. 14. sect 2. lib. de fract or from above downwards then sidewise CHAP. LVII Of the dislocation of the Toes NOw the Toes may bee four wais dislocated even as the fingers of the hand The differences The and they may bee restored just after the same manner that is extend them directly forth and then force eath joint into its place and lastly binde them up as is fitting The restitution of all them is easie for that they cannot far transgress their bounds To conclude Cure the bones of the feet are dislocated and restored by the same means as those of the hands but that when as any thing is dislocated in the foot the patient must keep his bed but when any thing is amiss in the hand hee must carrie it in a scarf The patient must rest twenty daies that is until hee
rag dipped therein but with care that none thereof fall upon the eye But when the Patient goes to bed let him cause them to be anointed with the following ointment very effectual in this case â„ž axungiae porci butyri recentis an â„¥ ss tut praepar Ê’ ss antimon in aqua euphrasiae praeparati ℈ ij camphorae gra iv misce in mortario plumbeo ducantur per tres horas conflatum indè unguentum servetur in pyxide plumbeâ Some commend and use certain waters fit to cleanse drie binde strengthen and absolutely free the eye-lids from itching and redness of which this is one â„ž aquae euphrag foeniculi chelidon an â„¥ ss sarcocol nutritae ℈ ij vitriol rom Ê’j misceantur simul bulliant uniâ—â â—bullitione postea coletur liquor servetur ad usum dictum Or else â„ž aquae ros vini alb boni an â„¥ iv tut praepar aloes anÊ’j flor aeni ℈ ij camphor gra ij Let them be boiled according to art and kept in a glass to wash the eye-lids Or else â„ž vini albi lb ss salis com Ê’ j. let them be put into a clean Barbars bason and covered and kept there five or six days and be stirred once a day and let the eye-lids be touched with this liquor Some wish that the Patients urine be kept all night in a Barbars bason and so the Patients eye-lids be washed therewith Verily in this affect we must not fear the use of acrid medicines for I once saw a woman of fifty years of age You need not fear to use acrid medicines in the itching of the eyelids Lib. 2. cap. 9. tract 3. who washed her ey-lids when they itched with the sharpest vinegar she could get and affirmed that she found better success of this then of any other medicine Vigo prescribes a water whose efficacie above other medicins in this affect he saith hath been proved and that it is to be esteemed more worth then gold the description thereof is thus â„ž aq ros vini albi odoriferi mediocris vinofitatis an â„¥ iiij myrobalan citrini trit Ê’j ss thurisÊ’ij bulliant omnia simul usque ad consumptionem tertiae partis deinde immediatè addantur flores aeris ℈ ij camph. gr ij Let the liquor be kept in a glass well stopped for the foresaid use CHAP. XI Of Lippitudo or Blear-eyes THere are many whose eyes are never drie but always flow with a thin acrid and hot humour which causeth roughness and upon small occasions inflamations blear or blood-shot eyes and at length also Strahismus or squinting What lippitudo is Lippitudo is nothing else but a certain white filth flowing from the eyes which oft-times agglutinates or joins together the eye-lids This disease often troubles all the life time and is to be cured by no remedy in some it is cureable Such as have this disease from their infancie are not to be cured for it remains with them till their dying day For large heads and such as are repleat with acrid or much excrementitious phlegm scarce yield to medicines There is much difference whether the phlegm flow down by the internal vessels under the skul or by the external which are between the skull and the skin or by both For if the internal veins cast forth this matter it will be difficultly cured if it be cured at all But if the external vessels cast forth that cure is not unprofitable which having used medicins respecting the whole body applies astringent medicines to the shaved crown as Empl. contra rupturam which may streighten the veins and as it were suspend the phlegm useth cupping and commands frictions to be made towards the hind part of the head and lastly maketh a Seton in the neck There are some who cauterize the top of the crown with an hot iron even to the bone so that it may cast a scale thus to divert and stay the defluxion A Collyrium of vitriol to stay the defluxions of the eyes For local medicines a Collyrium made with a good quantity of rose-water with a little vitriol dissolved therein may serve for all CHAP. XII Of the Ophthalmia or inflamation of the Eyes AN Ophthalmia is an inflamation of the coat Adnata What Ophthalmia is and the causes thereof and consequently of the whole eye being troublesome by the heat redness beating renitencie and lastly pain It hath its original either by some primitive cause or occasion as a fall stroke dust or small sand flying into the eyes For the eye is a smooth part so that it is easily offended by rough things as saith Hippocrates lib. de carnibus Or by an antecedent cause as a defluxion falling upon the eyes The signs follow the nature of the material cause Signs for from blood especially cholerick and thin it is full of heat redness and pain from the same allaied with phlegm all of them are more remiss But if a heaviness possess the whole head the original of the disease proceeds there from But if a hot pain trouble the forehead the disease may be thought to proceed from some hot distemper of the Dura mater or the pericranium but if in the very time of the raging of the disease the Patient vomit the matter of the disease proceeds from the stomach But from whencesoever it cometh there is scarce that pain of any part of the body which may be compared to the pain of the inflamed eyes Verily the greatness of the inflamation hath forced the eyes out of their orb and broken them asunder in divers Therefore there is no part of Physick more blazed abroad then for sore eyes For the cure The cure the Surgeon shall consider and intend three things diet the evacuation of the antecedent and conjunct cause and the overcoming it by to pick remedies The diet shall be moderate eschewing all things that may fill the head with vapours and those things used that by astriction may strengthen the orifice of the ventricle and prohibit the vapors from flying up to the head the Patient shall be forbidden the use of wines unless peradventure the disease may proceed from a gross and viscid humour as Galen delivers it The evacuation of the matter flowing into the eye shall be performed by purging medicines phlebotomie in the arm cupping the shoulders and neck with scarification and without and lastly by frictions Com. ad aphor 31. sect 6. as the Physitian that hath undertaken the cure shall think fit Galen after universal remedies for old inflamations of the eyes commends the opening of the veins and arteries in the forehead and temples Lib. 13. meth cap. ult because for the most part the vessels thereabouts distended with acrid hot and vaporous bloud cause great and vehement pains in the eye For the impugning of the conjunct cause divers to pick medicins shall be applied according to the four sundry times or seasons that every phlegmon usually hath For in the beginning
come forth at the mouth Marianus Sanctuâ— wisheth by the counsel of many who have so freed themselves from this deadly symptome to drink three pounds of quick-silver with water only For the doubled The force of quick-siâ—ver in the unfolding of the guts An historie and as it were twined up-gut is unfolded by the weight of the quick-silver and the excrements are deprest and thrust forth and the worms are killed which gave occasion to this affect John of S Germans that most worthie Apothecary hath told me that he saw a Gentleman who when as he could not be fâ—eed from the pain of the colick by any means prescribed by learned Physicians at length by the counsel of a certain German his friend drank three ounces of oil of sweet almonds drawn without fiâ—e and mixed with some white wine and pellitorie-water and swallowed a leaden bullet besmeaâ—ed with quick-silver and that bullet coming presently out by his fundament he was wholly freed from his colick CHAP. LIX Of Phlebotomie or Blood-letting PHlebotomie is the opening of a vein evacuating the blood with the rest of the humors What Phlebotomie is thus Atteritomie is the opening of an arterie The first scope of phlebotomie is the evacuation of the blood offending in quantity The use although oft-times the Physician 's intention is to draw forth the blood which offends in qualitie or either way by opening a vein Repletion which is caused by the quantity is two-fold the one ad vires that is to the strength Repletion two-fold the veins being otherwise not very much swelled this makes men infirm and weak nature not able to bear his humor of what kinde soever it be The other is termed ad vasa that is to the vessells the which is so called comparatively to the plentie of blood although the strength may very well away therewith The vessels are oft-times broke by this kinde of repletion so that the patient casts and spits up blood or else evacuates it by the nose womb hemorhoids or varices The repletion which is ad vires The signs is known by the heaviness and wearisomness of the whole body but that which is ad vasa is perceived by their distension and fulness both of them stand in need of evacuation But blood is only to be let by opening a vein Five scopes in letting blood for five respects the first is to lessen the abundance of blood as in plethorick bodies and those who are troubled with inflammation without any plenitude The second is for diversion or revulsion as when a vein of the right is opened to stay the bleeding of the left nostril The third is to allure or draw down as when the saphena is opened in the ankle to draw down the courses in women The fourth is for alteration or introduction of another quality as when in sharp fevers we open a vein to breath out that blood which is heated in the vessels and cooling the residue which remains behinde The fifth is to prevent imminent diseases as when in the Spring and Autumn we draw blood by opening a vein in such as are subject to spitting of blood the squinancie plurifie falling-sicknesse apoplexie madnesse gout or in such as are wounded for to prevent the inflammation which is to be feared Before blood-letting if there be any old excrements in the guts they shall be evacuated by a gentle glyster or suppositorie least the mesaraick veins should thence draw unto them any impuritie Bloud must not be drawn from ancâ—ent people From whence we must not draw blood â—â—less some present necesitie require it least the native heat which is but languid in them should be brought to extreme debilitie and their substance decay neither must any in like sort be taken from children for fear of resolving their powers by reason of the tenderness of thei substance and â—areness of their habit The quantity of blood which is to be let must be considered by the strength of the patient and greatness of the disease therefore if the patient be weake and the disease require large evacuation it will be convenient to part the letting of blood When and foâ— what it is necessarie yea by the interposition of some daies The vein of the forehead being opened is good for the pain of the hind part of the head yet first we foment the part with warm water that so the skin may be softer and the blood drawn into the veins in greater plenty In the squinancie the veins which are under the tongue must be opened aslant without putting any ligatures about the neck for fear of strangling Phlebotomie is necessary in all diseases which stop or hinder the breathing or take away the voice or speech as likewise in all contusions by a heavy stroke or fall from high in an apoplexie sqâ—inancie and burning feaver though the strength be not great nor the blood faultie in quantity or quality blood must not be let in the height of a feaver Most judge it fit to draw blood from the veins most remote from the affected and inflamed part for that thus the course of the humors may be diverted the next veins on the contrary being opened the humors may be the more drawn into the affected part and so increase the burden and pain But this opinion of theirs is very erroneous for an opened vein alwaies evacuates and burdens the next part For I have sundry times opened the veins and arteries of the affected part as of the hands and feet in the Gout of 〈◊〉 parts of the temples in the Megrim whereupon the pain alwaies was somewhat asswaged for that together with the evacuated blood the malignitie of the Gout and the hot spirits the causers of the Head-ach or Megrim were evacuated For thus Galen wisheth to open the arteries of the temples in a great and contumacious defluxion falling upon the eies 13. meth cap. 〈◊〉 or in the Megrim or Head-ach CHAP. LX. How to open a vein or draw blood from thence How to pâ—ace the patient THe first thing is to seat or place the patient in as good a posture as you can to wit in his bed if he be weak but in a chair if strong yet so that the light may fall directly upon the vein which you intend to open Then the Surgeon shall rub the arm with his hand Rubbing the arm Binding it before we open the vein or a warm linnen cloth that the blood may flow the more plentifully into the vein Then he shall binde the vein with a ligature a little above the place appointed to be opened and he shall draw back the blood upwards towards the ligature from the lower part and if it be the right arm he shall take hold thereof with his left hand but if the left then with his right hand pressing the vein in the mean time with his thumb a little below the place where you mean to open it least it should
the him of this disease Sixthly for that the ulcers which over-spread the body by reason of this disease admit of no cure unless you cause sweats Therefore if the matter of the disease and such ulcers as accompany it were hot and dry it would grow worse and be rather increased by a decoction of Guaicum the roots of China or sarsaparilla Seventhly because oftimes this disease The disease sometimes lies long hid in the body before it shew it self the seed thereof being taken or drawn into the body so lieth hid for the space of a year that it shews no sign thereof which happens not in diseases proceeding from an hot matter which causeth quick and violent motions By this it appeareth that the basis and foundation of the Lues venerea is placed or seated in a phlegmatick humor yet may not deny but that other humors confused therewith may be also in fault and defiled with the like contagion For there are scarce any tumors which proceed from a simple humor and that of one kinde but as in tumors so here the denomination is to be taken from that humor which carryeth the chief sway CHAP. IV. Of the signs of the Lues Venerea WHen the Lues Venerea is lately taken malign ulcers appear in the privities swellings in the groins a virulent strangury runneth oft-times with filthy sanies which proceeds either from the prostatae or the ulcers of the urethra the patient is troubled with pains in his joints head and shoulders and as it were breakings of his arms legs and all his members they are weary without a cause so that neither the foot nor hand can easily perform his duty their mouths are inflamed a swelling troubles their throats which takes away their freedom of speaking and swallowing yea of their very spittle pustles rise over all their bodies but chiefly certain garlands of them engirt their temples and heads the shedding or loss of the hair disgraceth the head and chin and leanness deformeth the rest of the body yet all of these use not to appear in all bodies The most certain signs of the Lues venerea but some of them in some But the most certain signs of this disease are a callous ulcer in the privities hard and ill conditioned and this same is judged to have the same force in a prognostick if after it be cicatrized it retain the same callous hardness the Buboes or swellings in the groins to return back into the body without coming to suppuration or other manifest cause these two signs if they concur in the same patient you may judg or foretel that the Lues venerea is either present or at hand yet this disease happeneth to many without the concourse of these two signs which also bewraieth it self by other manifest signs as ulcers and pustles in the rest of the body rebellious against medicines though powerful and discreetly applyed unless the whole body be anointed with Argentum vivum But when as the disease becometh inveterate many become impotent to venery and the malignity and number of the symptoms encrease their pains remain fixed and stable very hard and knotted tophi grow upon the bones and oft-times they become rotten and foul as also the hands and feet by the corruption of salt phlegm are troubled with chops or clefts and their heads are seized upon by an ophiasis and alopecia whitish tumors with roots deep fastned in arise in sundry parts of the body filled with a matter like the meat of a chesnut or like a tendon if they be opened they degenerate into diverse ulcers as putrid eating and other such Two other causes of the excess of pain in the night according to the nature and condition of the affected bodies But why the pains are more grievous on the night season this may be added to the true reason we rendred in the precedent Chapter first for that the venerous virulency lying as it were asleep is stirred up and enraged by the warmness of the bed and coverings thereof Secondly by reason of the patients thoughts which on the night season are wholly turned and fixed upon the only object of pain CHAP. V. Of Prognosticks The signs of a cureable Lues venerea IF the disease be lately taken associated by a few symptoms as with some small number of pustles and little and wandring pains and the body besides be young and in good case and the constitution of the season be good and favourable as the Spring then the cure is easie and may be happily performed But on the contrary that which is inveterate and enraged by the fellowship of many and malign symptoms as a fixed pain of the head knots and rottenness of the bones ill-natured ulcers in a body very much fallen away and weak and whereof the cure hath been already sundry times undertaken by Empericks but in vain or else by learned Physicians but to whose remedies approved by reason and experience the malignity of the disease and the rebellious virulency hath refused to yield is to be thought incureable especially if to these so many evills The signs of an incureable one this be added that the patient be almost wasted with a consumption and hectique leannesse by reason of the decay of the native moisture Wherefore you must only attempt such by a palliative cure yet be wary here in making your prognostick for many have been accounted in a desperate case who have recovered for by the benefit of God and nature wonders oftimes happen in diseases Young men who are of a rare or lax habit of body are more subject to this disease then such as are of a contrary habit and complexion For as not all who are conversant with such as have the Plague or live in a pestilent air are alike affected so neither all who lie or accompany with such as have the Lues Venerea are alike infected or tainted The pains of such as have this disease How these pains differ from those of the gout are far different from the pains of the Gout For those of the Gout return and torment by certain periods and fits but the other are continual and almost alwaies like themselves Gouty pains possess the joints and in these condense a plaster-like matter into knots but those of the Pox are rather fastned in the midst of the bones and at length dissolve them by rottenness and putrefaction Venerious ulcers which are upon the yard are hard to cure but if being healed they shall remain hard and callous they are signs of the disease lying hid in the body Generally The Lues venerea becomes more gentle then formerly it was the Lues venerea which now reigneth is far more milde and easie to be cured then that which was in former times when as it first began amongst us besides each day it semeth to be milder then other Astrologers think the cause hereof to be this for that the celestial innfluences which first
will be unwilling to shew all his body at once naked to the Surgeon but he may without any harm and with modesty lying on a bed in a little room wherein a stove is made have all his limbs annointed about the joynts and presently bound up either with stoups or carded cotten or brown paper CHAP. XII What cautions to be observed in rubbing or annointing the Patient The patient if it may be conveniently don must be anointed tasting HEe shall be annointed or rubbed over with the ointment in the morning the concoction and distribution of the meat being perfected which functions otherwise would not be well performed the powers of nature being distracted into several operations Yet if the patient shall be weak you may some hour before the unction give him some gelly the yolk of an egg or some broth made of meat boiled to pieces but very spareingly lest nature intent upon the concoction of solid meats In what places the body must be anointed or in great quantity should be drawn away from that which wee intend At first let only the joynts of the limbs be annointed as about the wrests elbows knees anckles shoulders But afterward if the patient shall be more strong and a greater commotion of the humors and body seem necessary the emunctories of the principal parts may also be annointed and the whole spine of the back yet haveing much care and alwayes shunning the principal and noble parts lest we should do as those butcherly Empericks do who equally and in like manner daub and rub over all the body from the soles of the feet to the crown of the head moreover diligent regard must be had of those parts which are seised upon by the symptoms of this disease that they may be more annointed and that it may be more throughly rubbed in Yet you may alwayes begin your annointing or rubbing at those parts which are less offended Where to begin the unction lest the humors should be drawn in greater measure to the grieved part And as Gentle frictions do not sufficiently open the pores of the skin so more strong and hard ones shut them up cause pain and more plentifully attract the morbifick matter Wherefore it will be more convenient to use moderate frictions takeing indication from the strength of the patient as that whereto we must still have the chief regard There is also another thing whereto the Physician and Surgeon must diligently attend as that which if it be not carefully prevented will either hasten the death of the patient or make him subject to a relapse that is the quantity of the remedies and unctions and the number of the frictions What it is that maketh the art of Physick conjectuâ—â— Which consideration together with that which is of the degrees of the temperaments of the whole body and each part thereof much troubles the minds of good Physicians and maketh the art conjectural It is far from being attained to by empericks Yet we must endeavor by method and reason that by the rule of indications so frequently mentioned we may attain to the knowledg thereof as near as may be For to have perfect knowledg hereof and to say that those need only four others five and othersom six more or fewer frictions at the beginning which Empericks commonly do is a thing both impossible and vain All these must be changed ordered according to the malignity and continuance of the disease and the condition of the affected bodies Verily we must so long use frictions and unctions until the virulent humors be perfectly evacuated by spitting salivation by stool urine sweat or insensible transpiration Which you may understand by the falling away drying up of the pustles ulcers and the ceasing of the pains and other sumptoms proper to this disease In manie by reason of the more dense and compact habit of the body nature is more slow in excretion Yet I have learnt by long experience Who must be rubbed over once who twice in a day and who but every other day that it is best to annoint and chafe such twice in a day to wit morning and evening six hours after meat For so you shall profit more in one day then by the single friction of three days But on the contrary I have often and with good success rubbed over but each other day more rate and delicate bodies giveing them one or two dayes rest to recollect their strength which by the to much dissolution of their spirits becoming too weak were not sufficient to expel the reliques of the morbifick matter And certainly about the end of the appointed friction especially when as the patient begins to flux at the mouth the bodies together with the noxious humors are made so fluid by the means of the precedent friction that one friction is then more efficacious then two were at the beginning Therefore as Galen bids when as the disease is great Lib. de vene sect and the strength of the patient infirm that we should part our blood-lettings and draw a little and a little at once so also here when as we shall observe nature stirred up and ready bent to any kinde of evacuation by the mouth stool or other like you ought not to use any unction or friction oftner then once in a day yea certainly it will be better to intermit for some few daies For thus Massa reports that there was a certain man who almost wasted with a consumption being continually afflicted with the most grievous pains of this disease and reputed in a desperate case by other Phisicians was notwithstanding at length recovered by him when as he had annointed him thirty seven times putting some time between for the recovery of his strength I my self have observed others who thus by the interposition of one or two dayes being rubbed over for fifteen or seventeen times have perfectly recovered Where you must take this course in resolved and weak bodies yet in the interim must you have a care that the frictions be not too weak and so few that the morbifick cause may not be touched to the quick Nature is not sufficiently able to expel the virulent matter Signs that the Crisis is nigh for in this kind of disease nature doth not of it self endeavour any crisis or excretion it requires the auxiliary forces of medicines by whose assistance it may expell all the malignity These are signs of such a crisis either at hand or already present if the patient be so restless so loath all things that he cannot remain in one place either standing or lying he can neither eat nor drink if he be oppressed with a continaal weariness almost ready to swound yet have a good and equal pulse and gripeings in his belly afflict him with bloudy and viscous dejections until at length nature after one or two dayes portion of the morbifick matter being spent be somwhat freed and all pains and symptoms so much
the microcosmos or lesser world there are windes thunders earth-quakes showrs mundations of waters sterilityes fertilities stones mountains sundry sorts of fruits and creatures thence arise For who can deny but that there is winde contained shut up in flatulent abscesses in the guts of those that are troubled with the colick Flatulencies make so great a noise in divers womens bellies if so be you stand near them that you would think you heard a great number of frogs croaking on the night-time That water is contained in watery abscesses and the belly of such as have the dropsie is manifested by that cure which is performed by the letting forth of the water in fits of Agues the whole body is no otherwise shaken and trembles Of stones then the earth when it is heard to bellow and felt no shake under our feet He which shall see the stones which are taken out of the bladder and come from the kidnies and diveâ—â—e other parts of the body cannot deny but that stones are generated in our bodies Furthermore we see both men and women who in their face or some other parts shew the impression or imprinted figure of a cherry Of fruits from the first conformation plumb service fig mulberry and the like fruit the cause hereof is thought to be the power of the imagination concurring with the formative faculty and the tenderness of the yielding and wax-like embryon easie to be brought into any form or figure by reason of the proper and native humidity For you shall finde that all their mothers whilst they went with them have earnestly desired or longed for such things which whilst they have to earnestly agitated in their mindes they have trans-ferred the shape unto the childe whilst that they could not enjoy the things themselves Now who can deny but that the bunches of the back and large wens resemble mountains Who can gain-say but that the squalid sterility may be assimilate to the hectick driness of wasted and consumed persons and fertility deciphered by the body distended with much flesh and fat so that the legs can scarce stand under the burden of the belly But that â—ivers creatures are generated in one creature that is in man and that in sundry parts of him the following histories shall make it evident The figure of a scorpion It makes Hollerius conjecture of the cause and original of this Scorpion probable for that Chrysippus Dyophanes and Pliny write that of basil beaten between two stones and laid in the sun there will come Scorpions Lib. 5. de part morbic cap 7. Fernelius writes that in a certain souldier who was flat nosed upon the too long restraint or stoppage of a certain filthy matter that flowed out of the nose that there were generated two hairy worms of the bigness of ones finger which at length made him mad he had no manifest fever and he died about the twentieth day this was their shape by as much as we can gather by Fernelius his words The effigies of worms mentioned by Fernelius Lues Duret a man of great learning and credit An history told me that he had come forth with his urine after a long and difficult disease a quick creature of colour red but otherwise in shape like a Millepes that is a Cheslop or Hog-â—ouse The shape of a Millepes cast forth by urine Count Charls of Mansfieldt last Summer troubled with a greivous and continual sever in the Duke of Guises place cast forth a filthy matter at his yard An history in the shape of a live thing almost just in this form The shape of a thing cast forth by urine Monstrous creatures also of sundry forms are also generated in the wombs of women somewhiles alone other whiles with a mola and sometime with a childe naturally and well made Nicolaus Flor God lib. 7. c. 18. as frogs toads serpents lizzards which therefore the Antients have termed the Lombards brethren for that it was usual with their women that together with their natural and perfect issue they brought into the world worms serpents and monstrous creatures of that kind generated in their wombs for that they alwayes more respected the decking of their bodies then they did their diet For it happened whilest they fed on fruits weeds trash and such things as were of ill juyce they generated a putrid matter or certainly very subject to putrefaction corruption and consequently opportune to generate such unperfect creatures Joubertas telleth that there were two Italian women that in one moneth brought forth each of them a monstrous birth Lib. error popul the one that marryed a Taylor brought forth a thing so little that it resembled a Rat without a tail but the other a Gentlewoman brought forth a larger for it was of the bigness of a Cat both of them were black and as soon as they came out of the womb they ran up high on the wall and held fast thereon with their nails Lycosthenes writes that in Anno Dom. 1494. a woman at Cracovia in the street which taketh name from the holy Ghost was delivered of a dead childe who had a Serpent fastned upon his back which fed upon this dead childe as you may perceive by this following figure The figure of a Serpent fastened to a Childe Levinus Lemnius tells a very strange history to this purpose Some few years agone saith he a certain woman of the Isle in Flanders which being with child by a Sailor Lib. de occult nat mir cap. 8. her belly swelled up so speedily that it seemed she would not be able to carry her burden to the term prescribed by nature her ninth month being ended she calls a Midwife and presently after strong throws and pains she first brought forth a deformed lump of flesh having as it were to handles on the sides stretched forth to the length and manner of arms and it moved and panted with a certain vital motion after the manner of spunges and sea-nettles but afterwards there came forth of her womb a monster with a crooked nose a long and round neck terrible eyes a sharp tail and wonderful quick of the feet it was shaped much after this manner The shape of a monster that came forth of a Womans womb As soon as it came into the light it filled the whole room with a noise and hissing running to every side to finde out a lurking hole wherein to hide its head but the women which were present with a joynt consent fell upon it and smothered it with cushions at length the poor woman wearied with long travel was delivered of a boy but so evilly entreated and handled by this monster that it died as soon as it was christned Lib. de divinis natur Characterismis Cornelius Gemma a Physician of Lovain telleth that there were many very monstrous and strange things cast forth both upwards and downwards out of the belly of a certain maid of
Lovain of the age of fifteen years Amongst the rest she cast forth at her fundament together with her excrements a living creature some foot and half long thicker then ones thumb very like an Eel but that it had a very hairy tail I have here given you the figure of the monster as it was expressed by him The figure of a Monster that came forth of a Maids belly An history Master Peter Barque and Claude le Grand Surgeons of Verdun lately affirmed to me that they cured the wife of a certain Citizen of Verdun which out of an Abscess broken in the belly cast forth a great number of worms together with the quitture and these were of the thickness of ones finger with sharp heads which so gnawed her guts that the excrements for a long time came forth at the ulcer but now she is perfectly recovered Anthony Benenius a Physician of Florence telleth that one John Menusierus a man of forty years of age An history troubled with continual pains at his stomach was often at the point of death neither found he any help by the counsels of many Physicians which he used At length coming to have his advice he gave him a vomit by means whereof he cast up a great quantity of corrupt and putrid matter yet was he not thereby eased of his pain Therefore he gave him another Vomit by force whereof he cast up much matter like to the former and together therewith a worm of four fingers long having a red round head of the bigness of a great pease covered over the body with a soft downiness with a forked tail in manner of an half moon going upon four feet two before and two behind The figure of a Worm cast forth by Vomit The efficient and material causes of such things as are preternaturally generated in our bodies Why should I mention the prodigious bodies which are found in Abscesses as stones chalk sand coles snail-shels straws hay horns hairs and many kinds of living and dead creatures For there is nothing in the generation of these things caused by corruption preceeded by much alteration which may make us admire or holdâ—s in suspence especially if we shall consiâ—er that nature the fruitful parent of all things hath put divers portions and particles of the universal matter whereof the greater would is compoâ—ed into this microcosmos or little world man wheâ—eby he might the rather seem to be made to the resemblance and form of the greater Wherefore it so desports it self here that iâ— may counterfeit and resemble all the actions and motions which it useth to perform in the scene of the greater world in this little one if so be that matter be not wanting CHAP. IV. Of the Worms which use to breed in the guts How worms are generated A Gross visâ—id and crude humor is the material cause of Worms which having got the beginning of corruption in the stomach is quickly carryed into the guts and there it putrefies having not acquired the form of laudable Chylus in the first concoction This for that it is viscid tenaciously adheres to the guts neither is it easily evacuated with the other excrements The reason that they somtimes come forth at the mouth therefore by delay it further putrefies and by the efficacy of heat it turns into the matter and nourishment for Worms This alimentary humor being consumed unless some fâ—esh supply the want thereof which may ease their hunger they move themselves in the guts with great violence they cause grievous and great pains yea and oftimes they creep up to the stomach and so come forth by the mouth and sometimes they ascend into the holes of the palace and come forth at the nose Worms are of three sorts for some are round and long others broad and long others short and slender The first are called by the Antients Teretes that is round for that they are long and round The second are named Teniae for that their bodies are long and broad The differences of worms like a rowler or swathe The third are termed Ascarides for that they commonly wrap themselves up round Other differences of worms are taken from their colours as red white black ash-coloured yellowish Some also are hairy with a great head like the little fish which the French call Chabot we a Millers-Thumb in some diseases many worms are generated and cast forth by the fundament as small as hairs and usually of color white and these are they which are called Ascarides The diversity of colours in worms proceedeth not from the like distinct diversity of humors whereof they are generated For the melancholick and cholerick humor by their qualities are wholly unfit to generate worms But this manifold variety in colour is by reason of the different corruption of the chylous or phlegmatick humor whereof they are bred The long and broad worms are oftentimes stretched alongst all the guts being like to a mucous or albuminous substance and verily I saw one voided by a woman which was like to a Serpent and some six foot long which ought not to seem strange seeing it is noted by the Antients that they have seen worms so long An history as the length of the whole guts that is seven times the length of ones bodie Wierus writes An history that he saw a Country-man who voided a worm eight foot and one inch long in head and mouth resembling a Duck which therefore I have thought good here to express The figure of a worm generated in and cast forth of the gut Valeriola affirmeth that he saw a worm above nine foot long Now as worms differ in shape In observat so are their places of generation also different For the round and long worms are commonly generated in the smaller guts the rest in the greater but especially the Ascarides In what places of the belly-worms are generated none breed in the stomach as that which is the place of the first concoction There truly the matter which bâ—eedeth these worms gets the first rudiment of corruption but comes to perfection only in the guts they breed in some infants in their mothers bellies by the pravity and corrupt nature of the humor flowing from the mother for the nourishment of the childe which for that then they do not expeâ—l it by siege it by delay putrefieth the more and yields fit matter for the breeding of worms Ad finem lib. 4. de morbis as some have observed out of Hippocrates Lastly worms breed in people of any age that are Belly-gods and given to gluttony as also in such as feed upon meats of ill juice and apt to corrupt as crude summer-fruits cheese and milk-meats But to know in what part of the guts the worms do lurk you must note that when they are in the small guts Signs of worms in the small guts the patients complain of a pain in their stomach with a dog-like
into the bowels All things that resist poison must be given any way whatsoever as lemons oranges angelica-roots gentian tormentil burnet vervain cardus benedictus borage bugloss and the like Let all things that are afterwards set before the patient be meats of good juice such as ate veal kid mutton patridg pullets capons and the like CHAP. XVI Of the biting of a Viper or Adder and the symptoms and cure thereof THe remedies that were formerly mentioned against the bitings of mad dogs the same may be used against all venomous bites and stings yet nevertheless each poison hath his peculiar antidote Vipers or Adders as we vulgarly term them have in their gums The bites of vipers how virulent or the spaces between their teeth little bladders filled with a virulent sanies which is pressed out into the part that they bite with their teeth There forthwith ariseth a pricking pain The symptoâ— the part at the first is much swollen and then the whole body unless it be hindred gross and bloody filth sweats out of the wound little blisters rise round about it as if it were burnt the wound gnaws and as it were feeds upon the flesh great inflammation possesseth the liver and the guts and the whole body becomes very dry becoming of a pale or yellowish colour with thirst unquenchable the belly is griped by fits a cholerick vomiting molesteth them the stomach is troubled with a hicketting the patients are taken with often swoundings with cold sweat the fore-runner of death unless you provide by fit medicines for the noble parts before the poison shall invade them Matthiolus tells that he saw a country-man who as he was mowing a meadow An history by chance cut an Adder in two with his sithe which when he thought it was dead he took the one half whereon the head remained without any fear in his hand but the enraged creature turning about her head cruelly bit him by one of his fingers which finger as men usually do especially when as they think of no such thing he put into his mouth and sucked out the blood and poison and presently fell down dead When as Charls the ninth was at Montpelier An history I went into the shop of one Farges an Apothecary who then made a solemn dispensation of Treacle where not satisfying my self with the looking upon the Vipers which were there in a glass ready for the composition I thought to take one of them in my hands but whilst that I too curiously and securely handled her teeth which were in her upper jaw covered with a skin as it were a case to keep the poison in the beast catched hold of the very end of my fore-finger and bit me in the space which is between the nail and the flesh whence presently there arose great pain both by reason of the part endued with most exquisite sense as also by the malignity of the poison forthwith I exceeding straitly bound my finger above the wound that so I might press forth the blood and poison lest they should diffuse themselves further over the body Remedies for the bite of a viper I dissolved old Treacle in aqua vitae wherein I dipped and moistned cotton and so put it to the wound and within a few daies I throwly recovered by this only medicine You may use in stead of Treacle Mithridate and sundry other things which by reason of their heat are powerful drawers as a quill rosted in hot embers garlick and leeks beaten and applied barly-flowr tempered with vinegar hony and goats-dung and so applied like a pult is Some think it sufficient forthwith to wash and foment the wound with vinegar salt and a little honey Galen writes that the poison inflicted by the bite of a viper Lib. de theriac may be drawn forth by applying to the wound the head of a viper but othersome apply the whole viper beaten to mash CHAP. XVII Of the Serpent called Haemorrhous The Haemorrhous why so called THe Serpent Haemorrhous is so called because by biting he causeth blood to drop out of all the passages of the wounded body he is of a small body of the bigness of a viper with eies burning with a certain fiery brightness and a most beautiful skin The back of him as Avicen writes is spotted with many black spots his neck little and his tail very small the part which he bites forthwith grows blackish by reason of the extinction of the native heat which is extinguished by such poison which is contrary thereto in its whole substance Then follows a pain of the stomach and heart these parts being touched with the pestiferous quality of the poison These pains are seconded by vomiting the orifice of the ventricle being relaxed by a Diarrhaea the retentive faculty of all the parts of the belly being weakned and the veins which aâ—e spread through the guts Wonderful bleedings not being able to retain the blood contained in them For the blood is seen to slow out as in streams from the nose mouth ears fundament privities corners of the eies roots of the nails and gums which putrefie the teeth falling out of them Moreover there happens a difficulty of breathing and stoppage of the urine with a deadly convulsion The cure is forthwith to scarisie and burn the bitten part or else to cut it quite off if that it may be done without danger of life and then to use powerfully drawing Antidotes The figure of the Serpent Haemorrhous CHAP. XVIIII Of the Serpent called Seps The reason of the name and description of the Seps THe Serpent Seps is so called because it causeth the part which it bites forthwith to putrefie by reason of the cruel malignity of its poison It is not much unlike the Haemorrhous but that it curls or twines up the tail in divers circles Pausanias writes that this serpent is of an ash colour a broad head small neck big belly writhen tail and as he goes he runs aside like a crab But his skin is variegated and spotted with several colours like to Tapistry By the cruelty of his caustick and putrefying venom he burns the part which he hath bit with most bitter pain he causeth the shedding of the hairs and as Aetius addeth the wound at the first casteth forth manifest blood The symptoms but within a little while after stinking filth The putrefied affected parts wax white and the body all over becomes of the colour of that scurf which is termed Alphos so that by the wickedness of this putrefactive poison not only the spirits are resolved but also the whole body consumed as by fire a pestilent carbuncle and other putrid tumors arising from an hot and humid or suffocating constitution of the air Now for the remedies they must be such as are formerly prescribed against the bitings of a viper The figure of the Serpent Seps CHAP. XIX Of the Basiliske or Cockatrice THe Basilisk far exceeds all kinds
they let him feed on veal kid and pork boiled with lettuce purslain barly and violet leaves the which by their humidity might relax the belly and by their toughnesse lenifie the roughness of asperity they applied also refrigerating things to the loins share and perinoeum to asswage the heat of the urine At length they put him into a warm bath and to conclude they left nothing unattempted to draw forth or weaken the poison But all their endeavors were in vain for the Abbot died not being destitute of remedies conveniently prescribed but overcome by the contumacious malignity of the poison An history The Physicians pains had far better success in a certain Gentlewoman against this kind of affect her whole face was deformed with red fiery and filthy pullies so that all shunned her company as if she had been troubled with a Leprosie and were ready to forbid her the society of men she came to Paris and calling Hollerius and Grealmus Physicians me and Caballus being Surgeons she made a grievous complaint and besought us earnestly for some remedy against so great a deformity of her face having diligently considered her case we pronounced her free from a Leprosie but we judged it fit to apply to her whole face a veficatory of Cantharides Cantharides applied to the head ulcerate the bladder three or four hours after the application whereof the medicine being come to work its effect her bladder began to burn exceedingly and the neck of her womb to swell with gripings continual vomitings making of water and scowring a troublesome agitation of the body and members a burning and absolutely fiery fever I forthwith called the Phisicians it was decreed that she should drink wine plentifully and that it should be injected by the fundament into the guts and by the urinary passage into the bladder and the neck of the womb and that she should keep her self untill the pain were mitigated in a warm bath made of the decoction of Line-seeds the roots and leavs of mallows marsh-mallows violets heâ—bane purslain and lettuce and her loins and genitals should be anointed with unguentum rosatum and populeon stirred and incorporated with oxyorate By these means all the symptoms were mitigated A remedy against Leprous pustles Her face in the interim rose all in a blister and much purulent matter came out thereof and so the deformity wherewith she was formerly troubled vanished away for ever so that within a while after she was married and had many children and is yet living in perfect health Buprestes also are of the kind of Cantharides being like unto them in shape and faculty If an Ox or sheep or any other creature shall in feeding devour one of them he will presently swell up like a Tun The reason of the name whence also they take their name if a man take them inwardly he shall endure the like symptoms as in taking Cantharides and over and besides both his stomach and his whole belly shall be wonderfully puffed up as if he had a Dropsie It is probable that this inflation like a tympany happeneth by humors diffused and resolved into vapors by the fiery acrimony of the venom They are to be cured after the same manner as such as have drunk Cantharides Lastly as in all other poisons which are taken into the body so also here if the poison taken by the mouth be thought as yet to be in the stomach you must then procure vomit If it be gotten into the guts then must it be drawn away by glisters if diffused over all the body then must you make use of such things as may drive the poison forth from the center to the circumference such as are baths and stoves CHAP. XXIX Of Hors-leeches HOrs-leeches are also venomous especially such as live in muddy stinking ditches What hors-leeches mosâ— virulent for these are less hurtful which reside in clear and pure waters Wherefore before they are to be used in cases of physick they must be kept for some daies space in clean water that so they may purge themselves otherwise they may chance to leave ulcers hard to cure in the places whereto they shall be applied and the rather if they be violently plucked off because they by that means leave their teeth fastned in the part Now he which by chance hath swallowed a Hors-leech must be asked in what part he feeleth her that is the sense of her sucking Divers remedies according to the diversity of the parts For if she stick in the top of the throat or gullet or in the midst thereof the part shall be often washed with mustard dissolved in vinegar If she be near the orifice of the ventricle it is fit that the patient by little and little swallow down oil with a little vinegar But if she fasten to the stomach or the bottom of the ventricle the patient by the plucking oft the part shall perceive a certain sense of sucking the patient will spit blood and will for fear become melancholik To force her thence he shall drink warm water with oil but if she cannot so be loosed then shall you mix aloes therewith or some thing endued with the like bitterness for she will by that means leave her hold and so be cast forth by vomit You may perceive this by such as are applied to the skin on the external parts for by the aspersion of bitter things whether they be full or empty they will forsake their hold Then shall the patient take astringent things which may stop the blood flowing forth of the bitten part such is Conserve of Roses with terra sigillata Bole-Armenick and other more astringent things if need so require For if they shall adhere to some greater branch of some vein or artery it will be more difficult to stop the flowing blood But for that not the earth only but the sea also produceth venomous creatures we will in like fort treat of them as we have already done of the other beginning with the Lampron CHAP. XXX Of the Lampron THe Lampron called in Latine Muraena is a sea-fish something in shape The description of the Lampron resembling a Lamprey but she is bigger and thicker and hath a larger mouth with teeth long sharp and bending inwards she is of a dusky colour distinguished with whitish spots and some two cubits length the Antients had them in great esteem because they yield good nourishment and may be kept long alive in pools or ponds and so taken as the owners please to serve their table as it is sufficiently known by the history of the Roman Crassus She by her biting induceth the same symptoms as the viper and it may be helped by the same means The natural friendship of the Lampron and Viper Verily the Lampron hath such familiarity with the Viper that leaving her natural element the sea she leapeth ashoar and seeketh out the Viper in her den to join with her in copulation as
est unto the Vessels and Ad Vires id est unto the Strength and therewithal he hath a tumor that is pestilent in the parts belonging unto head or neck the blood must be let out of the cephalick or median vein or out of one of their branches dispersed in the arm on the grieved side But if through occasion of fat or any other such like cause those veins do not appear in the arm there be some that give counsel in such a case to open the vein that is between the fore-finger and the thumb the hand being put into warm water whereby that vein may swell and be filled with blood gathered thither by means of the heat If the tumor be under the arm-hole or about those places the liver-vein or the median must be opened which runneth alongst the hand if it be in the groin the vein of the ham or Saphena or any other vein above the foot that appeareth well but alwaies on the grieved side And phlebotomy must be performed before the third day for this disease is of the kind or nature of sharp diseases because that within four and twenty hours it runneth past help In letting of blood you must have consideration of the strength You may perceive that the patient is ready to swound when that his forehead waxeth moist with a small sweat suddenly arising by the a king or pain at the stomach with an appetite to vomit and desire to go to stool gaping blackness of the lips and sudden alteration of the face unto paleness and lastly most certainly by a small and slow pulse and then you must lay your finger on the vein and stop it untill the patient come to himself again either by nature or else restored by art that is to say by giving unto him bread dipped in wine or any other such like thing then if you have not taken blood enough you must let it go again and bleed so much as the greatness of the disease or the strength of the patient will permit or require which being done some of the Antidotes that are prescribed before will be very profitable to be drunk which may repair the strength and infringe the force of the malignity CHAP. XXV Of purging medicines in a Pestilent disease IF you call to minde the proper indications purging shall seem necessary in this kinde of disease and that must be prescribed as the present case and necessity requireth What purges fit in the Plague rightly considering that the disease is sudden and doth require medicines that may with all speed drive out of the body the hurtful humor wherein the noisome quality doth lurk and is hidden which medicines are divers by reason of the diversity of the kinde of the humor and the condition or temperature of the patient For this purpose six grains of Scammony beaten into powder or else ten grains are commonly ministred to the patient with one dram of Treacle Also pils may be made in this form Take of Treacle and Mithridate of each one dram Pils of Sulphur vivum finely powdred half a dram of Diagridium four grains make thereof Pils Or take three drams of Aloes of Myrrh and Saffron of each one dram of white Hellebore and Asarabacca of each ℈ iiii make thereof a mass with old treacle and let the patient take four scruples thereof for a dose three hours before meat Ruffus his pils may be profitably given to those that are weak The ancient Physicians have greatly commended Agarick for this disease because it doth draw the noisom humors out of all the members and the virtues thereof are like unto those of Treacle for it is thought to strengthen the heart and to draw out the malignity by purging To those that are strong the weight of two drams may be given and to those that are more weak half a dram It is better to give the infusion in a decoction then in substance for being elected and prepared truly into Trochisces it may be called a divine kinde of medicine Antimonium is highly praised by the experience of many but because I know the use thereof is condemned by the councel and decree of the School of Physicians at Paris I wll here cease to speak of it Those medicines that cause sweats are thought to excel all others when the Pestilence commeth of the venomous Air among whom the efficacy of that which followeth hath been proved to the great good of many in that Pestilence which was lately throughout all Germany as Matthias Rodler Chancelor to Duke George the Count Palatine signified unto me by letters They do take a bundle of Mug-wort and of the ashes thereof after it is burnt An effectual sudorifick and also purging medicine they make a lee with four pints of water then they do set it over the fire and boil it in a vessel of earth well leaded until the liquor be consumed the earthy dregs falling into the bottom like unto salt whereof they make Trochisces of the weight of a crown of gold then they dissolve one or two of these Trochises according to the strength of the patient in good Muskadine give it the patient to drink and let him walk after that he hath drunk it for the space of half an hour then lay him in his bed and there sweat him two or three hours and then he will vomit and his belly will be loosed as if he had taken Antimony and so they were all for the most part cured especially all those that took that remedy betimes and before the disease went to their heart The virtues of Mugwort as I my self have proved in some that were sick at Paris with most happy success Truly Mugwort is highly commended by the Ancient Physicians being taken and applied inwardly or outwardly against the bitings of venomous creatures so that it is not to be doubted but that it hath great virtue against the Pestilence I have heard it most certainly reported by Gilbertus Heroaldus Physician of Mompilier Vide rondelet lib. 7 depis c. 3. that eight ounces of the pickle of Anchovies drunk at one draught is a most certain and approved remedy against the Pestilence as he and many other have often found by experience For the Plague is no other thing but a very great putrefaction for the correction and amendment whereof there is nothing more apt or fit then this pickle or substance of Anchovies being melted by the Sun and force of the salt that is strewed thereon There be some which infuse one dram of Walwort-seed in white wine and affirme that it drunken will performe the like effect as Antimony Others dissolve a little weight of the seed of Rue being bruised in Muskadine with the quantity of a bean of Treacle and so drink it Others beat or bruise an handful of the leaves or tops of Broom in half a pinte of white wine and so give it to the patient to drink to cause him to vomit loose
may be given Clysters that provoke sleep must be used which may be thus prepared Take of Barly-water half a pirate oil of Violets and water-Lillies of each two ounces of the water of Plantain and Purslain or rather of their juice three ounces of Camphire seven grains and the whites of three eggs make thereof a Clyster The head must be fomented with Rose-vinegar the hair being first shaved away leaving a double cloth wet therein on the same and often renewed Sheeps-lungs taken warm out of the bodies may be applyed to the head as long as they are warm Cupping-glasses with and without scarification may be applied to the neck and shoulder-blades The arms and legs must be strongly bound being first well rubbed to divert the sharp vapors and humors from the head Frontals may also be made on this manner Take of the oil of Rose and water-Lillies of each two ounces of the oil of Poppy half an ounce of Opium one dram of Rose-vinegar one ounce of Camphire half a dram mix them together Also Nodulaes may be made of the flowers of Poppies Henbane water-Lillies Mandrags beaten in Rose-water with a little Vinegar and a little Camphire and let them be often applied to the nostrils for this purpose Cataplasms also may be laid to the forehead As Take of the mucilage of the seeds of Psilium id est Flea-wort and Quince-seeds extracted in Rose-water three ounces of Barly-meal four ounces of the powder of Rose-leaves the flowers of water-Lillies and Violets of each half an ounce of the seeds of Poppies and purslain of each two ounces A Cataplasm of the water and vinegar of Roses of each ounces make thereof a Cataplasm and apply it warm to the head Or take of the juice of Lettuce of water-Lillies Henbane purslain of each half a pinte of Rose-leaves in powder the seeds of Poppy of each half an ounce oil of Roses three ounces of vinegar two ounces of Barlie-meal as much as shall suffice make thereof a Cataplasm in the form of a liquid Pultis When the heat of the head is mitigated by these medicines and the inflamtion of the brain asswaged we must come unto digesting and resolving fomentations which may disperse the matter of the vapours But commonly in pain of the head they do use to binde the forehead and hinder part of the head very strongly which in this case must be avoided CHAP. XXVII Of the heat of the Kidneyes THe heat of the kidnies tempered by anointing with unguent refrigerans Galeni newly made adding thereto the whites of eggs well beaten that so the ointment may keep moist the longer let this liniment be renewed every quarter of an hour wiping away the reliques â—â—â—e old Or â„ž aq ros lb. ss succi plant â„¥ iv alb ovorum iv olei rosacei nenuph. an â„¥ ii An ointment for the reins acetires â„¥ iii. misce ad usum When you have annointed the part lay thereon the leaves of water-Lillies or the like old herbs and then presently thereupon a double linnen cloth dipped in oxycrate and wrung out again and often changed the patient shall not lie upon a fether-bed but on a quilt stuffed with the chaff of Oats or upon a Mat with many doubted cloaths or Chamlet spread thereon An ointment for the heart To the region of the heart may in the mean time he applied a refrigerating and alexiterial medicine as this which followeth â„ž ung rosat â„¥ iii. olei nonupharini â„¥ i. acet ros aq ros an â„¥ i. theriacae Ê’i croci Ê’ ss Of these melted and mixed otgether make a soft ointment which spred upon a scarlet cloth maybe applied to the region of the heart Or â„ž theriaca opt Ê’i ss The noise of dropping water draws on sleep succi citri acidi limonis an â„¥ ss coral rub sem rosar rub an Ê’ss camphurae croci an grain iii. let them be all mixed together and make an ointment or liniment At the head of the patient as he lies in his bed shall be set an Ewer or cock with a basin under it to receive the water which by the dropping may resemble rain Let the soles of the feet and palms of the hands be gently scratched and the patient lie far from noise and so at length he may fall to some rest CHAP. XXVIII Of the Eruptions and Spots which commonly are called by the name of Purples and Tokens THe skin in pestilent Fevers The differences of the spots in the Plague is marked and variegated in divers places with spots like unto the bitings of Fleas or Gnats which are not alwaies simple but many times arise in form like unto a grain of miller The more spots appear the better it is for the patient they are of divers colours according to the virulencie of the malignity and condition of the matter as red yellow brown violet or purple blew and black Their several names and the reasons of them And because for the most part they are of a purple colour therefore we call them purples Others call them Lenticulae because they have the colour and form of Lentiles They are also called Papiliones i. Butterflies because they do suddenly seize or fall upon divers regions of the body like unto winged Butterflies somtimes the face sometimes the arms and legs and sometimes all the whole body oftentimes they do not only affect the upper part of the skin but go deeper into the flesh When signs of death specially when they proceed matter that is gross and adust They do sometimes appear great and broad affecting the whole arm leg or face like unto an Erysipelas to conclude they are divers according to the variety of the humor that offends in quantity or quality If they are of a purple or black colour with often swounding and sink in suddenly without any manifest cause they fore-shew death The cause of the breaking out of those Spots is the working or heat of the blood by reason of the cruelty of the venom receieed or admitted They often arise at the beginning of a pestilent Fever many times before the breaking out of the Sore or Botch or Carbuncle and many times after but then they shew so great a corruption of the humors in the bodie that neither the sores nor carbuncles will suffice to receive them and therefore they appear as fore-runners of death Somtimes they break out alone without a botch or carbuncle which if they be red and have no evil symptoms joyned with them they are not went to prove deadly they appear for the most part on the third or fourth day of the disease and sometimeslater and sometimes they appear not before the patient be dead because the working or heat of the humours being the off-spring of putrefaction is not as yet restrained and ceased Why they sometimes appear after the death of the patient Wherefore then principally the putrid heat which is greatest a little
before the death of the Patient drives the excremental humours which are the matter of the spots unto the skin or else because nature in the last conflict hath contended with some greater endeavour then before which is common to all things that are ready to die a little before the instant time of death the Pestilent humor being presently driven unto the skin and nature thus weakned by these extreme conflicts falleth down prostrate and is quite overthrown by the remnant of the matter CHAP. XXIX Of the cure of Eruptions and Spots They are to be cured by driving forth YOu must first of all take heed lest you drive in the humor that is coming outwards with repercussives therefore beware of cold all purging things phlebotomy and drowsie or sound sleeping For all such things do draw the humors inwardly and work contrary to nature But it is better to provoke the motion of nature outwardly by applying of drawing medicines outwardly and ministring medicines to provoke sweat inwardly for otâ—erwise by repelling and stopping the matter of the eruptions there will be great danger lest the heart be oppressed with the abundance of the venom flowing back or else by turning into the belly it infers a mortal bloudy flux which discommodities that they may be avoided I have thought good to set down this remedy whose efficacy I have known and proved many times and on divers persons when by reason of the weakness of the expulsive faculty and the thickness of the skin the matter of the spots cannot break forth but is constrained to lurk under the skin lifting it up into bunches and knobs The indication of curing taken from the like I was brought unto the invention of this remedy by comparison of the like For when I understood that the essence of the French-pox and likewise of the pestilence consisted in a certain hidden virulency and venomous quality I soon descended unto that opinion that even as by the annointing of the body with the unguent compounded of Quick-silver the gross and clammy humours which are fixed in the bones and unmovable are dissolved relaxed and drawn from the center into the superficial parts of the body by strengthening and stirring up the expulsive faculty and evacuated by sweating and fluxing at the mouth that so it should come to pass in pestilent Fevers that nature being strengthened with the same kind of unction might unload herself of some portion of the venomous and pestilent humor by opening the pores and passages and â—etting it break forth into spots and pustles and into all kind of eruptions Therefore I have anointed many in whom nature seemed to make passage for the venomous matter very slowly first looâ—ing their belly with a glyster and then giving them Treacle-water to drink which might defend the vital faculty of the heart but yet not distend the stomach as though they had the French-pox and I obtained my expected purpose In stead of the Treacle-water you may use the decoction of Guaicum which doth heat dry provoke sweat and repel putrefactioâ— adding thereto also Vinegar that by the subtilty thereof it may pierce the better and withstand the putrefaction This is the description of the unguent An ointment to draw them forth when as they appear too slowly Take of Hogs-grease one pound boil it a little with the leaves of Sage Thime Rosemary of each half an handful strain it and in the straining extinguish five ounces of Quick-silver which hath been first boyled in Vinegar with the fore-mention herbs of Sal Nitrum three drams the yelks of three eggs boyled until they be hard of Treacle and Mithridate of each half an ounce of Venice-Turpentine oyl of Scorpions and Bayes of each three ounces incorporate them altogether in a mortar and make thereof an unguent wherewith annoint the Patients arm-holes and groins avoiding the parts that belong to the head breast and back-bone then let him be laid in his bed and covered warm and let him sweat there for the space of two hours and then let his body be wiped and cleansed and if it may be let him be laid in another bed and there let him be refreshed with the decoction of a Capon reer eggs and with such like meats of good juyce that are easie to be concocted and digested let him be annointed the second and third day unless the spots appear before If the Patient flux at the mouth it must not be stopped when the spots and pustles do all appear and the Patient hath made an end of sweating it shall be convenient to use diuretick medicines for by these the remnant of the matter of the spots which happily could not all breath forth may easily be purged and avoided by urine If any Noble or Gentlemen refuse to be annointed with this unguent let them be enclosed in the body of a Mule or Horse that is newly killed and when that is cold let them be laid in another until the pustles and eruptions do break forth being drawn by that natural heat For so Matthiolus writeth In pâ—oaem lib. 6. Diâ—sc that Valentinus the son of Pope Alexander the sixt was delivered from the danger of most deadly poyson which he had drunk GHAP. XXX Of a pestilent Bubo or Plague-sore A Pestilent Bubo is a tumor at the beginning long and moveable and in the state What a pestilent Bubo is and full perfection copped and with a sharp head unmoveable and fixed deeply in the glandules or kernels by which the brain exonerates it self of the venomous and pestiferous matter into the kernels that are behinde the ears and in the neck the heart into those that are in the arm-holes and the Liver into those that are in the groin that is when all the matter is gross and clammy so that it cannot be drawn out by spots and pustles breaking out on the skin and so the matter of a Carbuncle is sharp and so fervent that it maketh an Eschar on the place where it is fixed In the beginning while the Bubo is breeding it maketh the patient to feel as if it were a cord or rope stretched out in the place or a hardned nerve with pricking pain and shortly after the matter is raised up as it were into a knob and by little and little it groweth bigger and is inflamed these accidents before mentioned accompanying it If the tumor be red The signs of Buboes salutary and deadly and increase by little and little it is a good and salutary sign but if it be livid or black and come very slowly unto his just bigness it is a deadly sign It is also a deadly signe if it increase suddenly come to his just bigness as it were with a swift violence and as in a moment have all the symptoms in the highest excess as pain swelling and burning Buboes or Sores appear sometimes of a natural colour like unto the skin and in all other things like unto an oedematous tumor which
be under-layed whither the foot did incline before it was restord The form of little Boots whereof the one is open and the other shut CHAP. XII By what means Arms Legs and Hands may bee made by art and placed in stead of the natural Arms Legs or Hands that are cut off and lost NEcessitie oftentimes constrain's us to finde out the means whereby wee may help and imitate nature and supplie the defect of members that are perished and lost And hereof it cometh that wee may perform the functions of going standing and handling with arms and hands made by art and undergo our necessarie flexions and extensions with both of them I have gotten the forms of all those members made so by art and the proper names of all the Engines and Instuments whereby those artificially made are called to my great cost and charges of a most ingenuous and excellent Smith dwelling at Paris who is called of those that know him and also of strangers by no other name than the little Lorain and here I have caâ—ssed them to be portraied or set down that those that stand in need of such things after the example of them may caus som Smith or such like work-man to serv them in the like case They are not onely profitable for the necessitie of the bodie but also for the decencie and comliness thereof And here followeth their forms The form of an Hand made artificially of iron This figure following sheweth the back-side of an Hand artificially made and so that it may bee tied to the arm or sleev The form of an Arm made of iron verie artificially The description of Leggs made artificially of iron The form of a wodden Leg made for poor men A. Sheweth the stump or stock of the woodden Leg. BB. Sheweth the two staies which must bee on both sides of the Leg the shorter of them must bee on the inner side CC. sheweth the pillow or â—â—lster whereon the knee must rest in the bottom betweene the two staies that so it may rest the softer DD. Sheweth the thongs or girths with their round buckles put through the two staies on either side to stay the knee in his place firm and immoovable that it slip not aside E. Sheweth the thigh it self that you may know after what fashion it must stand It happen's also manie times that the patient that had the nervs or tendons of his Leg wounded long after the wound is whole and consolidated cannot go but with verie great pain and torment by reason that the foot cannot follow the muscle that should draw it up That this maladie may bee remedied you ought to fasten a linnen band made verie strong unto the shoo that the patient weareth on that his pained foot and at the knee it must have a slit where the knee may com forth in bowing of the Leg and it must bee trussed up fast unto the patient 's middle that it may the better lift up and erect the foot in going This band is marked in the figure following with the letters AA CHAP. XIII Of amending or helping lameness or halting HAlting is not only a great deformity but also very troublesome and grievous Therefore if that any be grieved therewith by reason that one of his legs is shorter then the other it may be holpen by putting under his short foot this sitting crutch which we are now â—â—out to describe For by the help of this he shall not only go upright but also more easily and with little labor or no pain at all It was taught me by Nicolas Piccard Chirurgian to the Duke of Lâ—â—in The form thereof is this A. Sheweth the staff or stilt of this crutch which must be made of wood B. Sheweth the seat of iron â—hereon the thigh resteth just under the buttock C. Sheweth a prop which stayeth up the seat whereon all the weight of the Patients body resteth D. Sheweth the stirrup being made of iron and bowing crooked upwards that the foot may stand firm and not slip off it when the Patient goeth E. Sheweth the prop that stayeth or holdeth up the stirrup to strengthen it F. Sheweth the foot of the stilt or crutch made of iron with many pikes and compassed with a ring or ferule so to keep it from slipping G. The cross or head of the crutch which the Patient must put under his arm-hole to lean upon as it is to be seen in the figure The end of the three and twentieth Book The FOUR and TVVENTIETH BOOK Of the GENERATION of MAN THE PREFACE The distinction of male and female GOD the Creator and maker of all things immediately after the Creation of the World of his unspeakable counsel and inestimable wisdom not onâ—y distinguisâ—ed mankinde â—uâ— all 〈◊〉 living Creatures also into a double sex to wit of Male and Female that so they 〈◊〉 moved and enticed by the allurements of lust might desire copulation thence to have â—â—â—creation The cause of this distinction For this bountiful Lord hath appointed it as a solace unto every living creature against the most certain and fatal necessity of death than for as much as each particuâ— living creature cannot continue for ever yet they may endure by their species or kind by prâ—pagation and succession of creatures which is by procreation so long as the world endureth In this conjunction or 〈◊〉 repleniâ—hed with such delectable pleasure which God hath chiefly established by the law of Matrimony the male and female yield forth their seeds which presently mixed and conjoyned are received and kept in the females womb What seed is For the seed is a certain spumâ—us â—r foamy humor replenished with vital spirit by the benâ—fit whereof as it were by a certain ebullition or fermentation it is puffed up and swoln bigger and both the seeds being separated from the more pure bloud of both the Parents are the material and formal beginning of the issuâ— for the seed of the male being cast and received into the womb is accounted the principal and efficient cause but the seed of the female is reputed the subjâ—cent matter or the matter wherein it worketh Gooâ— and laudable seed ought to be white The conditions of good seed shining clammy knotty smelling like unto the elder or palm delectable to Bees and sinking down in the bottom of water being put into it for that which swimmeth on the water is esteemed unfruitful for a great portion cometh from the brain yet sâ—me thereof falls from the whâ—le bâ—dy and from all the parts both firm and soft thereof Seed falleth from all the parts of the body For unless it come from the whole body and every part thereof all and every part of the issue cannot be formed thereby because like things are engendred of theâ—â— like and therefore it cometh that the childe resemâ—leth the Parents not only in stature and favâ—ur but also in the conformation and proportion of his limbs and members and complexion and
head one of the fundament and another of the yard or conduit of the bladder and furthermore in women one of the neck of the womb without the which they can never be made mothers or bear children When all these are finished nature that she might polish her excellent work in all sorts hath covered all the body and every member thereof with skin Exod. 20 qu â—2 Into this excellent work or Micrecâ—smâ—s so perfect God the author of nature and all things infuseth or ingrafteth a soul or life which St. Augustine proveth by this sentence of Moses If any man smite a woman with child so that thereby she â—e delivered before her natural time and the childe be dead being first formed in the wâ—mâ— let him die the death but if the child hath not as yet obtained the ful propertion and conformation of his body and members let him recompence it with mâ—ny Therefore it is not to be thought that the life is derived propagated or taken from Adam or our parents as it were an hereditary thing distributed unto all mankinde by their parents but we must beleive it to be immediately created of God even at the very instant time when the childe is absolutely perfected in the lineaments of his body and so given unto it by him The meâ—a in the womb liveth not as the childe So therefore the rude lumps of flesh called molae that engender in womens wombs and monsters of the like breeding and confused bigness although by reason of a certain quaking and shivering motion they seem to have life yet they cannot be supposed to be endued with a life or a reasonable soul but they have their motion nutriment and increase wholly of the natural and infixed faculty of the womb and of the generative or procreative spirit that is ingraffed naturally in the seed But even as the infant in the womb obtaineth not perfect conformation before the thirtieth day so likewise it doth not move before the sixtieth day at which time it is most commonly not perceived by women by reason of the smallness of the motion But now let us speak briefly of the life or soul wherein consisteth the principal original of every function in the body and likewise of generation CHAP. XI Of the life or soul The liâ—e goeth not into the mass of seed that doth engender the childe before the body of the childe and each part thereof hath his perfect proportrien and â—â—rm Why the life or soul doth not presently execute all his offices THe soul entreth into the body so soon as it hath obtained a perfect and absolute distinction and conformation of the members in the womb which in male-children by reason of the more strong and forming heat which is ingraffed in them is about the fourtieth day and in females about the fortie fifth day in some sooner and in some later by reason of the efficacie of the matter working and pliantness or obedience of the matter whereon it worketh Neither doth the life or soul being thus inspired into the body presently execute or performe all his functions because the instruments that are placed about it cannot obtain a firm and hard consistence necessary for the lively but especially for the more divine ministeries of the life or soul but in a long process of age or time Those instruments of the soule are vitiated either in the first conformation as when the form or fashion of the head is shaped upwards or pyramidal as was the head of Thersites that lived in the time of the Trojan war and of Triboulet and Tonin that lived in later years or also by some casualtie as by the violent handling of the midwife who by compression by reason that the seal is tender and soft hath caused the capacitie of the ventricles that be under the brain to be too narrow for them or by a fall stroak disorder in diet as by drunkenness or a fever which inferreth a lethargie excessive sleeepiness or phrensie 1. Coâ—c 12. Presently after the soul is entred into the body God endeth it with divers and sundry gifts hereof it commeth that some are endued with wisdom by the spirit others with knowledg by the same spirit others with the gift of healing by the same spirit others with power dominion and rule others with prophesie others with diversities of tongues and to others other endowments as it hath pleased the divine providence and bounty of God to bestow upon them against which no man ought to contend or speak For it is not meet that the thing formed should say unto him that formed it why hast then made me thus hath not the Potter power to make of the same lamp of clay one vessel to hâ—nor and another to dishonor It is not my purpose neither belongeth it unto me or any other humane creature to search out the reason of those things but only to admire them with all humility But yet I dâ—re affirm this one thing that a noble and excellent soul neglecteth elementary and a transitory things and is ravished and moved with the contemplation of ceâ—eâ—â—â—al which it cannot freely enjoy before it be separated from this earthly inclosure or prison of the body and be restored unto its original Therefore the soul is the inward Entelechia or perfection What the 〈◊〉 or life is or the primitive cause of all motions and functions both natural and animal and the true form of man The Antients have endevoured to express the obscure sence thereof by many descriptions For they have called it a celestiâ—â—l spirit and a superior incorporeal invisible and immortal essence which is to be comprehended of its self alone that is of the mind or understanding The life is in all the whole body and in every portion thereof The life or soul is simple and indâ—â—sible Divers names and the reason of divers â—â—mes thâ—t are given to humane forms Others have not doubted but that we have our souls inspired by the universal divine minde which as they are alive so they do bestow life on the bodies unto whom they are annexed or united And although this life be dispersed into all the whole body and into every portion of the same yet iâ— it void of all corporal weight or mixtion and it is wholly and alone in every several part being simple and invisible without all composition or mixture yet endued with many virtues and faculties which it doth utter in divers parts of the body For it feeleth imagineth judgeth remembreth understandeth and ruleth all our desires pleasures and animal motions it seeth heareth smelleth tasteth toucheth and it hath divers names of these so many and so great functions which it performeth in divers parts of the body It is called the soul or life because it maketh the body live which of it self is dead It is called the spirit or breath because it inspireth our bodies It is called reason because it discerneth 〈◊〉 from falshood as it
the eighth and sometimes which is most frequent in the ninth month sometimes in the tenth month yea sometimes in the beginning of the eleventh month Massurinus reports that Lucius Papyrius the Pretor the second heir commencing a â—â—it gave the possession of the goods away from him seeing the Mother of the Childe affirm that she went thirteen moneths therewith being there is no certain definite time of Childe-birth The childe that is born in the sixth moneth cannot be long-lived because at that time all his body or members are not perfectly finished or absolutely formed In the seventh moneth it is proved by reason and experience that the infant may be long-lived Why the childe is scarce alive in the eighth moneth But in the eighth month it is seldome or never long-lived the reason thereof is as the Astronomers suppose because at that time Saturn ruleth whose coldness and driness is contrary to the original of life but yet the physical reason is more true for the physicians say that the childe in the womb doth oft-times in the seventh moneth strive to be set at liberty from the inclosure of the womb and therefore it contendeth and laboureth greatly and so with labouring and striving it becommeth weak that all the time of the eighth moneth it cannot recover his strength again whereby it may renew his accustomed use of striving and that some by such laboring and striving hurt themselves and so dye Yet some strong and lusty women are thought to bring forth their children being lively and strong on the eighth month as Aristotle testifieth of the Egyptians Lib. 4. de hist anim cap. 7. the Poets of the inhabitants of the Isle of Naxus and many of the Spaniards Furthermore I cannot sufficiently marvel that the womb which all the time of childe-bearing is so closed together that one can scarce put a probe into it unless it be by superfoetation or when it is open for a short time to purge it self that presently before the time of childe-birth it should gape and wax so wide that the infant may pass through it and presently after it close up again as if it had never been opened But because that the travail of the first time of childe-birth is wont to be very difficult and grievous I think it not unmeet that all women a little before the time of their first travail annoint and relax their privy parts with the unguent here described â„ž sper ceti â„¥ ii ol amigd dul â„¥ iv cerae alb medul cervin â„¥ iii. axung ans gallin an â„¥ i. tereb Venet â„¥ ii make thereof an ointment to annoint the thighs share privy-parts and genitals Furthermore it shall not be unprofitable to make a tâ—uss or girdle of most thin and gentle dog-skin which being also annointed with the same ungguent may serve very necessarily for the better carrying of the infant in the womb Also baths that are made of the decoction of mollifying herbs are also very profitable to relax the privy parts a little before the time of the birth That is supposed to be a natural and easie birth The natural and easie child-birth when the infant commeth forth with his head forwards presently following the flux of water and that is more difficult when the infant commeth with his feet forwards all the other waies are most difficult Therefore Mid-wives are to be admonished that as often as they perceive the childe to be comming forth none of those wayes but either with his belly or his back forwards as it were doubled or else with his hands and feet together or with his head forwards and one of his hands sâ—â—erched out that they should turn it and draw it out by the feet for the doing whereof if they be not sufficient let them crave the assistance and help of some expert Chirurgian CHAP. XVI Signs of the birth at hand THere will be great pain under the navel and at the groins and spreading therehence toward the Vertebrae of the loins and then especially when they are drawn back from the Os sacrum the bones Ilia and the Ceccyx are thrust outward the genitals swell with pain and a certain Fever-like shakeing invades the body the face waxeth red by reason of the endeavour of nature aâ—med unto the expulsion of the infant And when these signs appear How the women that travelleth in childe-birth must be placed in her bed let all things be prepared ready to the childe-birth Therefore first of all let the woman that is in travail be placed in her bed conveniently neither with her face upwards nor sitting but with her back upwards and somewhat high that she may breath at more liberty and have the more power or strength to labour Therefore she ought to have her legs wide one from another and crooked or her heels somewhat bowed up towards her buttocks so that she may lean on a staff that must be placed overthwart the bed There are some that do travail in a stool or a chair made for the same purpose others standing upright on their feet and leaning on the post or pillar of the bed But you must take diligent heed that you do not exhort or perswade the woman in travail to strive or labour to expel the birth before the fore-named signs thereof do manifestly shew that it it at haue For by such labour or pains she might be wearied or so weakned that when she should strive or labour she shall have no power or strength so to do If all these things do fall out well in the childe-birth the business is to be committed to nature and to the Mid-wife And the women with childe must only be admonished that when she feeleth very strong pain that she presently therewith strive with most strong expression shutting her mouth and nose if she please and it the same time let the Midwife with her hands force the infant from above downwards But if the birth be more difficult and painful An unction to supply the defect of the waters that are flowed out too long before the birth A powder to cause speedy deliverance in childe-birth by reason that the waters wherein the infant lay are â—lown out long before and the womb be dry this ointment following is to be prepared â„ž but â—ri recentâ—s sine sale in aquà artemesâ—ae lâ—ti â„¥ ii mueaginis ficuum semin lini altheae cum aqua salinae extratiâ— an â„¥ ss olei â—ilierum â„¥ i. make thereof an ointment wherewith let the Midwife often annoint the secret parts Also this powder following may be prepared â„ž Cinnamom cort cassiae fistul dictamni an Ê’ i ss sacch albi ad pâ—udus omnium make thereof a most subtil and fine powder Let the woman that is in extremity by reason of difficult and painful travail in childe-birth take half an ounce thereof at a time with a decoction of line-seed or in white wine for it will cause more speedy and easie deliverance of
or in swallowing the milke What is to be observed in the milk We may judg of or know the nature and condition of milk by the quantity quality colour savor and taste when the quantity of the milk is so little that it wil not suffice to nourish the infant it cannot be good and laudable for it aâ—gueth some distemperature either of the whole body or at least of the dugs especially a hot and dry distemperature But when it superaboundeth and is more then the infant can spend it exhausteth the juice of the nurses body and when it cannot all be drawn out by the infant it clutteâ—eth and congealeth or corrupteth in the dugs Yet I would rather wish it to abound then to be defective for the superabounding quantity may be pressed out before the childe be set to the breast The laudable consistence of milk That milk that is of a mean consistence between thick and thin is esteemed to be the best For it betokeneth the strength and vigor of the faculty that ingendreth it in the breasts Therefore if one drop of the milk be laid on the nail of ones thumb being first made very clean and fair if the thumb be not moved and it run off the nail it signifieth that it is watery milk but if it sâ—â—ck to the nail although the end of the thumb be bowed downwards it sheweth that it is too gross and thick but if it remain on the nail so long as you hold it upright and fall from it when you hold it a little aside or downwards by little and little it sheweth it is very good milk And that which is exquisitely white is best of all For the milk is no other thing then blood made white Therefore if it be of any other colour it argueth a default in the blood so that if it be brown Why the milk ougâ—t to be very white it betokeneth melancholick blood if it be yellow it signifieth cholerick blood if it be wan and pale it betokeneth phlegmatick blood if it be somewhat red it argueth the weakness of the faculty that engendreth the milk It ought to be sweet fragrant and pleasant in smell for if it strike into the nostrils with a certain sharpness as for the most part the milke of women that have red hair and little freckles on their faces doth it prognosticates a hot and cholerick nature Why a woman that hath red hair or frecles on her face cannot be a good Nurse if with a certain sowerness it portendeth a cold and melancholick nature In taste it ought to be sweet and as it were sugered for the bitter saltish sharp and stiptick is nought And here I cannot but admire the providence of nature which hath caused the blood wherewith the childe should be nourished to be turned into milk which unless it were so who is he that would not turn his face from and abhor so grievous and terrible a spectacle of the childes mouth so imbrued and besmeared with blood what mother or Nurse would not be amazed at every moment with the fear of the blood so often shed out or sucked by the infant for his nourishment Moreover we should want two helps of sustentation that is to say Butter and Cheese Neither ought the childe to be permitted to suck within five or six daies after it is born both for the reason before alledged and also because he hath need of so much time to rest quiet and ease himself after the pains he hath sustained in his birth in the mean season the mother must have her breasts drawn by some maid that drinketh no wine or else she may suck or draw them her self with an artificiall instrument which I will describe hereafter That Nurse that hath born a man childe is to be preferred before another What that Nurse that hath born a man-childe is to be p eferred before another because her milk is the better concocted the heat of the male-childe doubling the mothers heat And moreover the women that are great with childe of a male-childe are better colored and in better strength and better able to do any thing all the time of their greatness which proveth the same and moreover the blood is more laudable and the milk better Furthermore it behoveth the Nurse to be brought on bed or to travail at her just and prefixed or natural time Why she cannot be a good Nurse whoâ—e childe was born befoâ—e the time for when the childe is born before his time of some inward cause it argueth that there is some default lurking and hidden in the body and humors thereof CHAP. XXII What diet the Nurse ought to use and in what situation she ought to place the infant in the Cradle BOth in eating drinking sleeping watching exercising and resting the Nurses diet must be divers according as the nature of the childe both in habit and temperature shall be as for example if the childe be altogether of a more hot blood the Nurse both in feeding and ordering herself ought to follow a cooling diet In general let her eat meats of good juice moderate in quantity and quality let her live in a pure and clear air let her abstain from all spices and all salted and spiced meats and all sharp things wine especially that which is not allayed or mixed with water and carnal copulation with a man let her avoid all perturbations of the minde but anger especially let her use moderate exercise Anger â—reatly hu teth the Nurse The exercise of the arms is best for the Nurse How the childe should be placed in the Cradâ—e unless it be the exercise of her armes and upper parts rather then the leggs and lower parts whereby the greater attraction of the blood that must be turned into milk may be made towards the dugs Let her place her childe so in the Cradle that his head may be higher then all the body that so the excremental humors may be the better sent from the brain unto the passages that are beneath it Let her swathe it so as the neck and all the back-bone may be strait and equal As long as the childe sucketh and is not fed with stronger meat it is better to lay him alway on his back then any other way for the back is as it were the keel in a ship the ground-work and foundation of all the whole body whereon the infant may safely and easily rest But if he lie oâ— the side it were danger left that the bones of the ribs being soft and tender not strong enough and united with stack bands should bow under the weight of the rest and so wax crooked whereby the infant might become crook-backed But when he beginneth to breed teeth and to be fed with more strong meat and also the bones and connexions of them begin to wax more firm and hard he must be laved one while on this side another while on that and now and then also on his
may note the same thing in bodies that are gangrenate for they cast forth many sharp vapors yet nevertheless they are swollen and puffed up Now so soon as the Chirurgian shall know that the childe is dead by all these fore-named signs he shall with all diligence endeavor to save the mother so speedily as he can and if the Physicians cannot prevail with potions baths fumigations sternutatories vomits and liniments appointed to expel the infant let him prepare himself to the work following but first let him consider the strength of the woman for if he perceive that she be weak and feeble by the smalness of her pulse The signs of a woman that is weak by her small seldom and cold breathing and by the altered and death-like color in her face by her cold sweats and by the coldness of the extreme parts let him abstain from the work and only affirm that she will die shortly contrariwise if her strength be yet good let him with all confidence and industry deliver her on this wise from the danger of death CHAP. XXVI Of the Chirurgical extractions of the childe from the womb either dead or alive After what sort the woman in travail must be placed when the child being dead in her womb must be drawn out THerefore first of all the air of the chamber must be made temperate and reduced unto a certain mediocrity so that it may neither be too hot nor too cold Then she must be aptly placed that is to say overthwart the bed-side with her buttocks somewhat high having a hard stuffed pillow or boulster under them so that she may be in a mean figure of situation neither sitting altogether upright nor altogether lying along on her back for so she may rest quietly and draw her breath with ease neither shall the ligaments of the womb be extended so as they would if she lay upright on her back her heels must be drawn up close to her buttocks and there bound with broad and soft linnen rowlers The rowler must first come about her neck How she must be bound and then cross-wise over her shoulders and so to the feet and there it must cross again and so be rowled about the legs thighs and then it must be brought up to the neck again and there made fast so that she may not be able to move her self even as one should be tied when he is to be cut of the stone But that she may not be wearied or lest that her body should yeeld or sink down as the Chirurgian draweth the body of the infant from her and so hinder the work let him cause her feet to be set against the side of the bed How the Chirurgian ought to prepare himself and his patient to the drawing out of the child from the womb How the infant that is dead in the womb must be turned bound and drawn out and then let some of the strong standers by hold her fast by the legs and shoulders Then that the air may not enter into the womb and that the work may be done with the more decency her privy parts and thighs must be covered with a warm double linnen cloth Then must the Chirurgian having his nails closely pared and his rings if he wear any drawn off his fingers and his arms naked bare and well annointed with oil gently draw the slaps of the neck of the womb asunder and then let him put his hand gently into the mouth of the womb having first made it gentle and slippery with much oil and when his hand is in let him finde out the form and situation of the childe whether it be one or two or whether it be a Mole or not And when he findeth that he commeth naturally with his head toward the mouth or orifice of the womb he must lift him up gently and so turn him that his feet may come forwards and when he hath brought his feet forwards he must draw one of them gently out at the neck of the womb and then he must bind it with some broad and soft or silken band a little above the heel with an indifferent flick knot and when he hath so bound it he must put it up again into the womb then he must put his hand in again and finde out the other foot and draw it also out of the womb and when it is out of the womb let him draw out the other again whereunto he had before tied the one end of the band and when he hath them both out let him joyn them both close together and so by little and little let him draw all the whole body from the womb Also other women or Midwives may help the endeavor of the Chirurgian by pressing the patients belly with their hands downwards as the infant goeth out and the woman her self by holding her breath and closeing her mouth and nostrils and by driving her breath downwards with great violence may very much help the expulâ—ion I wish him to put back the foot into the womb again after he hath tied it because if that he should permit it to remain in the neck of the womb it would hinder the entrance of his hand when he putteth it in to draw out the other But if there be two children in the womb at once let the Chirurgian take heed lest that he take not of either of them a leg for by drawing them so he shall profit nothing at all and yet exceedingly hurt the woman Therefore that he may not be so deceived when he hath drawn out one foot and tied it and put it up again let him with his hand follow the band wherewithall the foot is tied and so go unto the foot then to the groin of the childe and then from thence he may soon finde out the other foot of the same childe for if it should happen otherwise he might draw the legs and the thighs out but it would come no further neither is it meet that he should come out with his armes along by his sides or be drawn out on that sort but one of his armes must be stretched out above his head A caution to avâ—id strangling of the infant in drawing out the body and the other down by his side for otherwise the orifice of the womb when it were delivered of such a gross trunk as it would be when his body should be drawn out with his arms along by his sides would so shrink and draw it self when the body should come unto the neck only by the accord of nature requiring union that it would strangle and kill the infant so that it cannot be drawn therehence unless it be with a hook put under or fastned under his chin in his mouth or in the hollowness of his eye But if the infant lieth as if he would come with his hands forwards Why the child must not be drawn out with his hands forwards An history or if his hands be forth
is done for the most part within twenty dales after the birth if the woman be not in danger of a fever nor have any other accident let her enter into a bath made of marjerom mint sage rosemary mugwort agrimony penniroyal the flowrs of camomil melilote dill being boiled in most pure and clear running water All the day following let another such like bath be prepared whereunto let these things following be added â„ž farin fabarum aven an lb iii. farin orobi lupinor gland an lb i. aluminis râ—ch â„¥ iv salis com lb ii gallarum nucum cupressiâ— an â„¥ iii. rosar rub m. vi caryophyl nucum moschat an Ê’iii boil them all in common water then sew them all in a clean linnen cloth as is were in a bag and cast them therein into the bath wherein Iron red hot hath been extinguished and let the woman that hath lately travailed sit down therein so long as she pleaseth and when she commeth out let her be laid warm in bed and let her take some preserved Orange-pill or bread toasted and dipped in Hippocras or in wine brewed with spices and then let her sweat if the sweat will come forth of its own accord A stringent so mentations for the privy parts On the next day let astringent fomentations be applied to the genitals on this wise prepared â„ž gallar nucum cupressi corticum granat an â„¥ i. rosar rub m. i. thymi majotan an m. ss alaminis rochae salis com an Ê’ii boil them all together in red wine and make thereof a decoction for a fomentation A distilled liquor for to draw together the dugs that are loose and slack for the fore-named use The distilled liquor following is very excellent and effectual to confirm and to draw in the dugs or any other loose parts â„ž caryophil nucis moschat nucum cupressi an â„¥ iss mastich â„¥ ii alumin. rech â„¥ iss glandium corticis querni an lb ss rosar rubr m. i. cort granat â„¥ ii terrae sigillat â„¥ i. cornn cervi usti â„¥ ss myrtillor sanguinis dracon an â„¥ i. boli amini â„¥ ii ireos florent â„¥ i. sumach berber Hippuris an m. ss conquassentur omnia macerentur spatio duorum dierum in lb. F. aquae rosarum lb.ii. prunorum syvestr mespilerum pomorum quernorum lb. ss aquae fabrorum aceti denique fortiss â„¥ iv afterward distill it over a gentle fire and keep the distilled liquor for your use wherewith let the parts be fomented twice in a day And after the fomentation let wollen cloaths or stupes of linnen cloth be dipped in the liquor and then pressed out and laid to the place When all these things are done and past the woman may again keep company with her husband CHAP. XXIX What the causes of difficult and painful travail in childe-birth are The causes of the difficult childe-birth that are in the woman that travaileth THe fault dependeth sometimes on the mother and sometimes on the infant or child within the womb On the mother if she be more fat if she be given to gormanoize or great eating if she be too lean or young as Savanarola thinketh her to be that is great with childe at nine years of age or unexpert or more old or weaker then she should be either by nature or by some accident as by diseases that she hath had a little before the time of childe-birth or with a great flux of blood But those that fall in travail before the full and prefixed time are very difficult to deliver because the fruit is yet unripe and not ready or easie to be delivered If the neck or orifice of the womb be narrow either from the first conformation or afterwards by some chance as by an ulcer cicatrized or more hard and callous by reason that it hath been torn before at the birth of some other childe and so cicatrized again so that if the cicatrized place be not cut even in the moment of the deliverance both the childe and the mother will be in danger of death also the rude handling of the midwife may hinder the free deliverance of the childe The passions of the minde binder the birth Oftentimes women are letted in travail by shamefac'tness by reason of the presence of some man or hate to some woman there present If the secundine be pulled away sooner then it is necessary it may cause a great flux of blood to fill the womb so that then it cannot perform his exclusive faculty no otherwise then the bladder when it is distended by reason of over-abundance of water that is therein cannot cast it forth so that there is a stoppage of the urine But the womb is much rather hindred or the faculty of childe-birth is stopped or delayed if together with the stopping of the secundine there be either a Mole or some other body contrary to nature in the womb In the secundines of two women whom I delivered of two children that were dead in their bodies I found a great quantity of sird like unto that which is found about the banks of rivers so that the gravel or sand that was in each secundine was a full pound in weight Also the infant may be the occasion of difficult childe-birth as if too big The causes of d fficult child-birth thâ—t are in the infant if it come overthwart if it come with its face upwards and its buttocks forwards if it come with its feet and hands both forwards at once it it be dead and swoun by reason of corruption if it be monstrous if it have two bodies or two heads if it be manifold or seven-fold as Allucrasis affirmeth he hath seen if there be a mole annexed thereto if it be very weak if when the waters are stowed out it doth not move nor stir or offer its self to come forth Yet notwithstanding it happeneth sometimes that the fault is neither in the mother nor the childe but in the air which being cold The exâ—ernal causes of difficult childe-birth doth so binde congeal and make stiff the genital parts that they cannot be relaxed or being contrariwise too hot it weakneth the woman that is in travail by reason that it wasteth the spirits wherein all the strength consisteth or in the ignorant or unexpert midwife who cannot artificially rule and govern the endeavors of the woman in travail The birth is wont to be easie if it be in the due and prefixed natural time Which is an easie birth What causeth easiness of child-birth if the childe offer himself lustily to come forth with his head forwards presently after the waters are come forth and the mother in like manner luâ—ty and strong those which are wont to be troubled with very difficult childe-birth ought a little before the time of the birth to go into an half-tub filled with the decoction of mollifying roots and seeds to have their genitals womb and neck thereof to be annointed with
the orifice of the neck of the womb an impostume rotten and running as if it had been out of an abscess newly broken with saâ—ious matter somewhat red yellow and pale running a long time Yet for all this the feeling of the heaviness or weight was nothing diminished but did rather increase daily so that from the year of our Lord 1573. she could not turn her self being in her bed on this or that side unless she laid her hand on her belly to bear and ease herself of the weight and also she said when she turned herself she seemd to feel a thing like unto a bowle or rowle in her belly unto the sâ—de whereunto she turned her self neither could she go to stoole or avoid her excrements standing or sitting unless she lift up that weight with her hands towards her stomach or midriff when she was about to go she could scarce set forwards her feet as if there had something hanged between her thighs that did hinder her going At certain seasons that rotten apostume would open or unclose of it self and flow and run with its wonted sanious matter but then she was grievously vexed with pain of the head and all her members swouning loathing vomiting and almost choaking so that by the perswasion of a foolish woman she was induced and contented to take Antimonium Antimoniam taken in a potion doâ—h cause the womb to fall down the working and the strength thereof was so great and violent that after many vomits with many frettings of the guts and waterie dejections of stools she thought her fundament fell down but being certified by a woman that was a familiar friend of hers unto whom she shewed her self that there was nothing fallen down at or from her fundament but it was from her womb she called in the year of our Lord 1575. Surgeons as my self Jaemes Guillemeau and Antonie Vieux that we might help her in extremity The signs of the substance of the womb drawn out When we had diligently and with good consideration weighed the whole estate of her disease we agreed with one consent that that which was fallen down should be cut away because that by the black colour stinking and other such signs it gave a testimony of a putrefied and corrupted thing Therefore for two daies we drew out the body by little and little and piece-meal which seemed unto the Physicians that we had called as Alexius Gaudinus Feureus and Violaneus and also to our selves to be the body of the womb wich thing we proved to be so because one of the testicles came out whole and also a thick membrane or skin being the relick of the Mola which being suppurated and the abscess broken came out by little and little in matter after that all this body was so drawn away the sick woman began to wax better better yet notwithstanding for the space of nine daies before it was taken away she voided nothing by siege and her urine also was stopped for the space of four daies After this all things became as they were before and she lived in good health three moneths after and then died of a Pluerisie that came on her very suddenly and I haveing opened her body observing and marking every thing very diligently could not finde the womb at all but in stead thereof there was a certain hard and callous body which Nature who is never idle had framed in stead thereof to supply the want thereof or to fill the hollowness of the bellie CHAP. XLII Of the tunicle or membrane called Hymen Whether there be a membrane called Hymen IN some virgins or in maidens the orifice of the neck of the womb there is found a certain tunicle or membrane called of antient writers Hymen which prohibiteth the copulation of a man and causeth a woman to be barren this tunicle is supposed by many and they not of the common sort only but also learned physicians to be as it were the enclosure of the virginity or maiden-head But I could never finde it in any seeking of all ages from three to twelve of all that I had under my hands in the Hospital of Paris An history Yet once I saw in a virgin of seventeen years whom her mother had contracted to a man and she knew nevertheless there was something in her privie parts that hindred her from bearing of children who desired me to see her and I found a very thin nervous membrane a little beneath the nymphaea near unto the orifice of the neck of the womb in the midst there was a very little hole whereout the terms might flow I seeing the thickness thereof cut it in sunder with my scissars and told her mother what she should do afterwards Lib. 11 cap. 16 and truly she married shortly after and bore children Realdus Columbus is of my opinion and saith that this is seen very seldome for these are his words under the nymphaea in many but not in all virgins there is another membrane which when it is present which is but seldome it stoppeth so that the yard cannot be put into the orifice of the womb for it is very thick above towards the bladder it hath an hole by which the courses flow out And he also addeth that he observed it in two young virgins and in one elder maid Avicen writes that in virgins in the neck of the womb there are tunicles composed of veins and ligaments very little rising from each part of the neck thereof Lib. 3. seâ—t 2â— tract 1. cap. 1. which at the first time of copulation are wont to be broken and the blood run out Almansor wâ—iteth that in virgins the passage of the neck of the womb is very wrinkled or narrow and strait and those wrinkles to be woven or stayed together with many little veins and arteries which are broken at the first time of copulation These are the judgments of Physicians of this membrane The trifles of midwives abâ—ut the membrane called Hymen Midwives will certainly affirm that they know a virgin from one that is defloured by the breach or soundness of that membrane But by their report too credulous judges are soon brought to commit an error For that Midwives can speak nothing certainly of this membrane may be proved by this because that one saith that the situation thereof is in the very entrance of the privie parts others say it is in the midst of the neck of the womb and others say it is within at the inner orifice thereof and some are of an opinion that they say or suppose that it cannot be seen or perceived before the first birth But truly of a thing so rare and which is contrary to nature theâ—e cannot be any thing spoken for certainty Therefore the blood that commeth out at the first time of copulation comes not alwaies by the breaking of that membrane but by the breaking and violating of renting of the little veins which are woven and bespread
figure of a Colt with a Mans face At Verona Anno Dom. 1254. a Mare foaled a colt with the perfect face of a Man but all the rest of the body like an Horse a little after that the wars between the Florentines Pisans began by which all Italie was in a combustion The figure of a winged Monster About the time that Pope Julius the second raised up all Italie and the greatest part of Christendome against Lewis the twelfth the King of France in the year of our Lord 1512. in which year upon Easter day near Ravenna was sought that mortal battel in which the Popes forces were overthrown a monster was born in Ravenna having a Horn upon the crown of his head and besides two wings and one foot alone most like to the feet of birds of prey and in the knee thereof an eie the privities of male and female the rest of the body like a man as you see by this figure The third cause is an abundance of seed and overflowing matter The fourth the same in too little quantity and deficient The fift the force and efficacy of imagination The sixt the straightness of the womb The seventh the disorderly â—ire of the partie with childe and the position of the parts of the body The eight a fall strain or sâ—â—â—k especiall upon the belly of a woman with childe The ninth hereditary diseases or affects by any other accident The tenth the confusion and mingling together of the seed The eleventh the craft and wickedness of the deviâ— There are some others which are accounted for monsters because their original or essence full of admiration or do assume a certain prodigious form by the craft of some begging companions therefore we will speak briefly of them in their place in this our treatise of monsters CHAP. II. Of Monsters caused by too great abundance of seed SEeing we have already handled the two former and truly final causes of monsters we must now come to those which are material corporeal and efficient causes taking ouâ— beginning from that we call the too great abundance of the matter of seed It is the opinion of those Philosophers which have written of monsters that if at any time a creature bearing one at once as man shall cast forth more seed in copulation then is necessary to the generation of one body it cannot be that only one should be begot of all that therefore from thence either two or more must arise whereby it commeth to pass that these are rather judged wonders because they happen seldome and contrary to common custome Superfluous parts happen by the same cause that twins and many at one birth contrary to natures course do chance that is by a larger effusion of seed then is required for the framing of that part that so it exceeds either in number or else in greatness So Austin tells that in his time in the east an infant was born having all the parts from the belly upwards double but from thence downwards single and simple for it had two heads four eies two breasts four hands in all the rest like to another childe and it lived a littly while â—aliâ—s Rhodiginus saith he saw two monsters in Italie the oâ—e male the other female handsomely and neâ—rly made through all their bodies except their heads which were double the male died within a few daies after it was born but the female whose shape is here delineated lived twenty-five years which is contrary to the common custom of monsters for they for the most part are very short-liv'd because they both live and are born as it were against natures consent to which may be added they do not love themselves by reason they are made a scorn to others and that by that means lead a hated life But it is most remarkable which Lycosthenes telleth of a * Woman-monster for excepting her two heads she was framed in the rest of her body to an exact perfection her two heads had the like desire to eat and drink to sleep to speak and to do every thing she begged from dore to door every one giving to her freely Yet at length she was banisht Bavaria lest that by the frequent looking upon her the imagination of women with childe strongly moved should make the like impression in the infants they bare in their wombs The effigies of a * Maid with two heads The effigies of two a Girls whose backs grew together In the year of our Lord 1475. at Verona in Italie two a Girls were born with their backs sticking together from the lower part of the shoulders unto the very buttocks The novelty and strangeness of the thing moved their parents being but poor to carry them through all the chie towns in Italy to get mony of all such as came to see them The figure of a man with another growing out of him In the year 1530. There was a man to be seen at Paris out of whose belly another perfect in all his members except head hanged forth as if he had been grafted there The man was fortie years old and he carried the other implanted or growing out of him in his arms with such admiration to the beholders that many ran very earnestly to see him The effigies of a harned or hooded monster At Quiers a small village some ten miles from Turine in Savoy in the year 1578. upon the seventeenth day of January about eight a clock at night an honest matron brought forth a childe having five horns like to Rams horns set opposite to one another upon his head he had also a long piece of flesh like in some sort to a French hood which women use to wear hanging down from his forehead by the nape of his neck almost the length of his back two other pieces of flesh like the collar of a shirt were wrapped about his neck the fingers ends of both his hands somewhat resembled a Hawks talons and his knees seemed to be in his hams the right leg and the right foot were of a very red colour the rest of the body was of a tawnie color it is said he gave so terrible a scritch when he was brought forth that the Midwives and the rest of the women that were at her labor were so frighted that they presently left the house and ran away When the Duke of Savoy heard of this monster he commanded it should be brought to him which performed one would hardly think what various censures the Courtiers gave of it The monster you see here delineated was found in the middle and innermost part of an* Egg with the face of a man but hairs yielding a horrid representation of Snakes the chin had three other snakes stretched forth like a beard It was first seen at Autun at the house of one Bancheron a Lawyer a maid breaking many eggs to butter the white of this egg given a Cat presently killed her Lastly this monster comming to the hands of the Baron Senecy was
Sena at one time brought forth seven children of which four were baptized In our time betweeen Sarte and Main in the parish of Seaux not far from Chambellay there is a family and noble house called Maldemeure the wife of the Lord of Maldemure the first year she was married brought forth twins the second year she had three children the third year four the fourth year five the fifth year six and of that birth she died of those six one is yet alive and is Lord of Maldemeure In the valley of Beaufort in the countie of Anjou a young woman the daughter of Mace Channiere when at one perfect birth she had brought forth one childe the tenth day following she fell in labor of another but could not be delivered untill it was pulled from her by force and was the death of the mother The Picture of Dorithie great with childe with many children Martin Comerus the author of the Polish historie writeth that one Margaret The ninth Book of the Polish Historie a woman sprung from a noble and ancient familie neer Cracovia and wife to Count Virboslaus brought forth at one birth thirtie five live children upon the twentieth daie of Jan. in the year 1296. Franciscus Picus Mirandula writeth that one Dorothie an Italian had twentie children at two births at the first nine and at the second eleven and that she was so big that she was forced to bear up her bellie which lay upon her knees with a broad and large scarf tied about her neck as you may see by this figure And they are to be reprehended here again who affirm the cause of numerous births to consist in the variety of the cels of the womb for they feign a womans womb to have seven cels or partitions three on the right side for males three on the left side for females and one in the midst for Hermophrodites or Scrats and this untruth hath gone so far that there have been some that affirmed every of the seven cels to have been divided into ten partitions into which the seed dispersed doth bring forth a divers and numerous encrease according to the varietie of cels furnished with the matter of seed which though it may seem to have been the opinion of Hippocrates in his Book De natura Pueri notwithstanding it is repugnant to reason and to those things which are manifestly apparent to the eies and senses The opinion of Aristotle is more probable who saith twins and more at one birth Lib. 4. de gen anim cap. 4. are begot and brought forth by the same cause that the sixth finger groweth on the hand that is by the abundant plentie of the seed which is greater and more copious then can be all taken up in the natural framing of one bodie for if it all be forced into one it maketh one with the parts encreased more then is fit either in greatness or number but if it be as it weâ—e cloven into divers parts it causeth more then one at one birth CHAP. IV. Of Hermophrodites or Scrats ANd here also we must speak of Hermophrodites because they draw the cause of their generation and conformation from the abundance of seed and are called so because they are of both sexes the woman yeelding as much seed as the man For hereupon it commeth to pass that the forming facultie which alwaies endeavors to produce something like it self doth labor both the matters almost with equal force and is the cause that one bodie is of both sexes Yet some make four differences of Hermophrodites the first of which is the male Hermophrodite who is a perfect and absolute male and hath only a slit in the Perinaeum not perforated and from which neither urine nor seed doth flow The second is the female which besides her natural privitie hath a fleshie and skinnie similitude of a mans yard but unapt for erection and ejaculation of seed and wanteth the cod and stones the third difference is of those which albeit they bear the express figures of members belonging to both sexes commonly set the one against the other yet are found unapt for generation the one of them only serving for making of water the fourth difference is of those who are able in both sexes throughly perform the part of both man and woman because they have the genitals of both sexes complete and perfect and also the right brest like a man and the left like a woman the laws command those to chuse the sex which they will use and in which they will remain and live judgeing them to death if they be found to have departed from the sex they made choice of for some are thought to have abused both and promiscuously to have had their pleasure with men and women There are signs by which the Physicians may discern whether the Hermophrodites are able in the male or female sex or whether they are impotent in both these signs are most apparent in the privities and face for if the matrix be exact in all its demensions and so perforated that it may admit a mans yard if the courses flow that way if the hair of the head be long slender and soft and to conclude if to this tender habit of the body a timid and weak condition of the minde be added the female sex is predominant and they are plainly to be judged women But if they have the Perinaeum and fundament full of hairs the which in women are commonly without any if they have a a yard of a convenient largeness if it stand well and readily and yeeld seed the male sex hath the preheminence and they are to be judged men But if the conformation of both the genitals be alike in figure quantity and efficacy it is thought to be equally able in both sexes although by the opinion of Aristotle Lib. 4. de gener anim cap. 5. those who have double genitals the one of the male the other of the female the one of them is alwaies perfect the other imperfect The figure of Hermophrodite twins cleaving together with their backs Anno Dom. 1486. in the Palatinate at the village Robach near Heidelberg there were twins both Hermophrodites born with their backs sticking together The effigies of an Hermophrodite having four hands and feet The same day the Venetians and Geneses entred into league there was a monster born in Italy having four arms and feet and but one head it lived a little after it was baptized James Ruef a Helvetian Cirurgian saith he saw the like but which besides had the privities of both sexes whose figure I have therefore set forth Pag. 647. CHAP. V. Of the changing of Sex AMatus Lusitanus reports that in the village Esquina there was a maid named Maria Pateca who at the appointed age for her courses to flow had instead of them a mans yard laying before that time hid and covered so that of a woman she became a man and therefore laying
aside her womans habit was cloathed in mans and changing her name was called Emanuel who when he had got much wealth by many and great negotiations and commerce in India returned into his country and married a wife but Lusitanus saith he did not certainly know whether he had any children but that he was certain he remained alwaies beardless Anthony Loqueneux the Kings keeper or receiver of his rents of St. Quintain at Vermandois lately affirmed to me that he saw a man at Reimes at the Inn having the sign of the Swan the year 1560. who was taken for a woman until the fourteenth year of his age for then it happened as he played somewhat wantonly with a maid which lay in the same bed with him his members hitherto lying hid started forth and unfolded themselves which when his parents knew by help of the Ecclesiastick power they changed his name from Joan to John and put him in mans apparel Some years agone being in the train of King Charles the Ninth in the French Glass-house I was shewed a man called Germane Garnierus but by some Germane Maria because in former times when he was a woman he was called Marie he was of an indifferent stature and well set body with a thick and red beard he was taken for a giâ—l until the fifteenth year of his age because there was no sign of being a man seen in his body and for that amongst women he in like attire did those things which pertain to women in the fifteenth year of his age whilest he somewhat earnestly pursued hogs given into his charge to be kept who running into the corn he leaped violently over a ditch whereby it came to pass thar the stayes and foldings being broken his hidden members suddenly broke forth but not without pain going home he weeping complained to his mother that his guts came forth with which his mother amazed calling Physicians and Surgeons to counsel heard he was turned into a man therefore the whole business being brought to the Cardinal the Bishop of Lenuncure an assembly being called he received the name and habite of a man Pliny reports that the son of Cassinus of a girl became a boy living with his parents but by the command of the Sooth-sayers he was carried into a desert Isle because they thought such monsters did alwaies shew or portend some monstrous thing Certainly women have so many and like parts lying in their womb as men having hanging forth only a strong and lively heat seems to be wanting which may drive forth that which lies hid within therefore in process of time the heat being increased and flourishing and the humidity which is predominant in childehood overcome it is not impossible that the virile members which hitherto sluggish by defect of heat lay hid may be put forth especially if to that strength of the growing heat some vehemenâ— concussion or jactation of the body be joyned Therefore I think it manifest by these experiments and reasons that it is not fabulous that some women have been changed into men but you shall finde in no history men that have degenerated into women for nature alwaies intends and goes from the imperfect to the more perfect but not basely from the more perfect to the imperfect CHAP. VI. Of Monsters caused by the defect of Seed IF on the contrary the seed be any thing deficient in quantity for the conformation of the infants or infants some one or more members will be wanting or more short and decrepite Hereupon it happens that nature intending twins a childe is born with two heads and but one arm or altogether lame in the rest of his limbs The effigies of a monstrous childe by reason of the defect of the matter of seed Anno Dom. 1573. I saw at Saint Andrews Church in Paris a boy nine years old born in the village Parpavillae six miles from Gu se his fathers name was Peter Renard and his mother Marquete he had but two fingers on his right hand his arm was well proportioned from the top of his shoulder almost to his wrist but from thence to his two fingers ends it was very deformed he wanted his legs and thighs although from the right buttock a certain unperfect figure having only four toes seemed to put it self forth from the midst of the left buttock two toes sprung out the one of which was not much unlike a mans yard as you may see by the figure In the year 1562. in the Calends of November at Villa Franca in Gascony this monster a headless woman whose figure thou here seest was born which figure Dr. John Altinus the Physician gave to me when I went about this book of Monsters he having received it from Fontanus the Physician of Angolestre who seriously affirmed he saw it The figure of a Monstrous woman without a head before and behinde The effigies of a man without arms doing all that is usually done with hands The effigies of a monster with two heads two legs and but one arm A few years agone there was a man of forty years old to be seen at Paris who although he wanted his arms notwithstanding did indifferently perform all those things which are usually done with the hands for with the top of his shoulder head and neck he would strike an Axe or Hatchet with as sure and strong a blow into a post as any other man could do with his hand and he would lash a Coach-mans whip that he would make in give a great crack by the strong resraction of the air but he ate drank plaid at cards and such like with his feet But at last he was taken for a thief and murderer was hanged and fastened to a wheel Also not long ago there was a woman at Paris without arms which nevertheless did cut few and do many other things as if she had her hands We read in Hippocrates that Attagenis his wife brought forth a childe all of flesh without any bone and notwithstanding it had all the parts well formed CHAP. VII Of Monsters which take their cause and shape by imagination THe Antients having diligently sought into all the secrets of nature The force of imagination upon the body and humors have marked and observed other causes of the generation of Monsters for understanding the force of imagination to be so powerful in us as for the most part it may alter the body of them that imagine they soon perswaded themselves that the faculty which formeth the infant may be led and governed by the firm and strong cogitation of the Parents begetting them often deluded by nocturnal and deceitful apparitions or by the mother conceiving them and so that which is strongly conceived in the minde imprints the force into the infant conceived in the womb which thing many think to be confirmed by Moses because he tells that Jacob encreased and bettered the part of the sheep granted to him by Laban his wives father by putting rods Gen.
produce fat CHAP. XII Of Monsters by the confusion of seed of divers kindes THat which followeth is a horrid thing to be spoken but the chaste minde of the Reader will give me pardon and conceive that which not only the Stoicks but all Philosophers who are busied about the search of the causes of things must hold That there is nothing obscene or filthy to be spoken Those things that are accounted obscene may be spoken without blame but they cannot be acted or perpetrated without great wickedness fury and madness therefore that ill which in obscurity consists not in word but wholly in the act Therefore in times past there have been some who nothing fearing the Deity neither the Law not themselves that is their soul have so abjected and prostrated themselves that they have thought themselves nothing different from beasts wherefore Atheists Sodomites Out-laws forgetful of their own excellency and divinity and transformed by filthy lust have not doubted to have filthy and abominable copulation with beasts This so great so horrid a crime for whose expiation all the fires in the world are not sufficient though they too maliciously crafty have concealed and the conscious beasts could not utter yet the generated mis-shapen issue hath abundantly spoken and declared by the unspeakable power of God the revenger and punisher of such impious and horrible actions For of this various and promiscuous confusion of seeds of a different kinde Monsters have been generated and born who have been partly men and partly beasts The like deformity of issue is produced if beasts of a different species do copulate together nature alwayes affecting to generate something which may be like it self for wheat grows not but by sowing of wheat nor an apricock but by the setting or grafting of an apricock for nature is a most diligent preserver of the species of things The effigies of a Monster half man and half dog Anno Dom. 1493. there was generated of a woman and a dog an issue which from the navel upwards perfectly resembled the shape of the mother but therehence downwards the sire that is the dog This monster was sent to the Pope that then reigned as Volaterane writeth Cardan lib. 14. de var rerum cap 94. also Cardane mentions it wherefore I have given you the figure thereof The figure of a Monster in face resembling a man but a Goat in his other members Caelius Rhodoginus writes that at Sibaris a heards-man called Chrathis fell in love with a Goat and accompanyed with her and of this detestible and brutish copulation an infant was born which in legs resembling the dam but the face was like the fathers The figure of a Pig with a head face hands and feet of a man Anno Dom. 1110. in a certain town of Liege as saith Lycosthenes a Sow farrowed a pig with the head face hands and feet of a man but in the rest of the body resembling a swine Anno Dom. 1564. at Bruxels at the house of one Joest Dictzpeert in the street Warmoesbroects a Sow farrowed six pigs the first whereof was a monster representing a man in the head face fore-feet and shoulders but in the rest of the body another pig for it had the genitals of a sow pig and it sucked like other pigs But the second day after it was farrowed it was killed of the people together with the sow by reason of the monstrousness of the thing Here followeth the figure thereof The effigies of a Monster half man and half swine Anno Dom. 1571. at Antwerp the wise of one Michael a Printer dwelling with one John Molline a Graver or Carver at the sign of the Golcen Foot in the Camistrate on St. Thomas his day at ten of the clock in the morning brought forth a monster wholly like a dog but that it had a shotter neck and the head of a bird but without any feathers on it This Monster was not alive for that the mother was delivered before her time but she giving a great scritch in the instant of het deliverance the chimney of the house fell down yet hurt no body no not so much as any one of four little children that sate by the fire-side The figure of a monster like a dog but with a head like a bird The figure of a three headed Lamb. Anno Dom. 1577. in the town of Blandy three miles from Melon there was lambed a Lamb having three heads the middlemost of which was bigger then the rest when one bleated they all bleated John Bellanger the Chirurgian of Melo affirmed that he saw this monster and he got it drawn and sent the figure thereof to me with that humane monster that had the head of a Frog which we have formerly described There are some monsters in whose generation by this there may seem to be some divine cause for that their beginnings cannot be derived or drawn from the general cause of monsters that is nature or the errors thereof by reason of some of the fore mentioned particular causes such are these monsters that are wholly against all nature like that which we formerly mentioned of a Lion yeaned by an Ew Yet Astrologers lest there should seem to be any thing which they are ignorant of refer the causes of these to certain constellations and aspects of the Planets and Stars according to Aristotles saying in his Problems in confirmation whereof they tell us this tale It happened in the time of Albertus Magnus that in a certain village a Cow brought forth a Calf which was half a man the towns-men apprehended the herds-man and condemned him as guilty of such a crime to be presently burnt together with the Cow but by good luck Albertus was there to whom they gave credit by reason of his much and certain experience in Astrology that it was not occasioned by any humane wickedness but by the efficacy of a certain position of the stars that this monster was born CHAP. XIII Of Monsters occasioned by the craft and subtilty of the Devil IN treating of such Monsters as are occasioned by the craft of the Devil we crave pardon of the courteous Reader if peradventure going further from our purpose we may seem to speak more freely and largely of the existence nature and kindes of Devils There are sorcerers and how they com so to be Therefore first it is manifest that there are Conjurers Charmers and Witches which whatsoever they do perform it by an agreement and compact with the Devil to whom they have addicted themselves for none can be admitted into that society of Witches who hath not forsaken God the Creator and his Saviour and hath not transferred the worship due to him above upon the Devil to whom he hath obliged himself And assuredly What enduceth them thereto whosoever addicts himself to these Magical vanities and witch-crafts doth it either because he doubts of Gods power promises steady and great good will towards us or else for that he
is madded with an earnest desire of knowing things to come or else because disdaining poverty he affects and desires from a poor estate to become rich on the sudden It is the constant opinion of all both antient and modern as well Philosophers as Divines that there are some such men which when they have once addicted themselves to impious and divelish Arts can by the wondrous craft of the Devil do many strange things and change and corrupt bodies and the health life of them and the condition of all mundane things Also experience forceth us to confess the same for punishments are ordained by the laws against the professors and practisers of such Arts but there are no laws against those things which neither ever have been nor never came into the knowledg of men for such things are rightly judged and accounted for impossibilities which have never been seen nor heard of Beford the birth of Christ there have been many such people Exod. cap. 22. Levit. cap. 19. for you may finde in Exodus and Leviticus laws made against such persons by Moses by whom God gave the Law to his people The Lord gave the sentence of death to Ochawas by his Prophet for that he turned unto these kinde of people We are taught by the Scriptures that there are good and evil spirits and that the former are termed Angels but the later devils for the law is also said to be given by the ministry of Angels and it is said that our bodies shall rise again at the sound of a trumpet Hebr. 1.14 Gal 3 19. 1 Thes 4 16. and at the voice of an Arch-Angel Christ said that God would send his Angels to receive the Elect into the heavens The history of Job testifieth that the Devil sent fire from heaven and killed his sheep and cattel and raised windes that shook the four corners of the house and overwhelmed his children in the ruines thereof The history of Achab mentioneth a certain lying spirit in the mouth of the false Prophets Sathan entring into Judas moved him to betray Christ Job 13. Mar. 16 34. Devils who in a great number possessed the body of a man were called and obtained of Christ that they might enter into Swine whom they carried headlong into the Sea In the beginning God created a great number of Angels that those divine and incorporeal spirits might inhabit heaven and as messengers signifie Gods pleasure to men and as ministers or servants perform his commands who might be as over-seers and protectors of humane affairs Yet of this great number there were some who were blinded by pride and thereby also cast down from the presence and heavenly habitation of God the Creator The power of evil spirits over mankinde The differences of devils These harmful and crafry spirits delude mens mindes by divers jugling tricks and are alwaies contriving something to our harm and would in a short space destroy mankinde but that God restrains their fury for they can only do so much as is permitted them Expelled heaven some of them inhabit the air others the bowels of the earth there to remain until God shall come to judg the world and as you see the clouds in the air somewhiles to resemble centaures otherwhiles serpents rocks towers men birds fishes and other shapes so these spirits turn themselves into all the shapes and wondrous forms of things as oft-times into wilde-beasts into serpents toads owls lapwings crows or ravens goats asses dogs cats wolves buls and the like Moreover they oft-times assume and enter humane bodies as well dead as alive whom they torment and punish yea also they transform themselves into angels of light The delusions of devils They feign themselves to be shut up and forced by Magical rings but that is only their deceit and craft they wish fear love hate and oft-times as by the appointment and decree of God they punish malefactors for we read that God sent evil angels into Egypt there to destroy They houl on the night they murmure and rattle as if they were bound in chains they move benches tables counters props cupbords children in the cradles play at tables and chess turn over books rell mony walk up and down rooms and are heard to laugh to open windows and doors cast sounding vessels as brass and the like upon the ground break stone-pots and glasses and make other the like noises Yet none of all these things appear to us when as we arise in the morning neither finde we any thing out of its place or broken They are called by divers names as Devils Their titles and names evil Spirits Incubi Succubi Hobgoblins Fairies Robin-good-fellows evil-Angels Sathan Lucifer the father of lies Prince of darkness and of the world Legion and other names agreeable to their offices and natures CHAP. XIV Of the subterrene Devils and such as haunt Mines What the Devils in Mines do LEwis Lavater writes that by the certain report of such as work in Mines that in some Mines there are seen spirits who in the shape and habit of men work there and running up and down seem to do much work when notwithstanding they do nothing indeed But in the mean time they hurt none of the by-standers unless they be provoked thereto by words or laughter For then they will throw some heavy or hard thing upon him that hurt them or injure them some other way The same author affirms that there is a silver Mine in Rhetia out of which Peter Briot the Governour of the place did in his time get much silver In this Mine there was a Devil who chiefly on Friday when as the Miners put the Mineral they had digged into tubs kept a great quarter and made himself exceeding busie and poured the Mineral as he listed out of one tub into another It happened one day that he was more busie then it used to be so that one of the Miners reviled him and bad him be gone on a vengeance to the punishment appointed for him The Devil offended with his imprecation and scoff so wrested the Miner taking him by the head twining his neck about he set his face behinde him yet was not the workman killed therewith but lived and was known by divers for many years after CHAP. XV. By what means the Devils may deceive us Devils are spirits OUr mindes involved in the earthy habitation of our bodies may be deluded by the Devils divers waies fot they excel in purity and subtilty of essence in the much use of things besides they challenge a great preheminence as the Princes of this world over all sublunary bodies Whereof it is no marvel if they the teachers and parents of lyes should cast clouds and mists before our eyes from the beginning and turn themselves into a thousand shapes of things and bodies that by these juglings and tricks they may shadow and darken mens mindes CHAP. XVI Of Succubi and Incubi The reason
Pliny tells that the Emperor Nero in his time found magical arts most vain and false but what need we alledg profane writers when as those things that are recorded in Scripture of the Pythoniss of the woman speaking in her belly of King Nebuchodonozor of the Magicians of Pharoah and other such things not a few prove that there both is and hath been Magick Pliny tells of Denarchus that he tasting of the entrails of a sacrificed childe turned himself into a Wolf We reade in Homer that Circe in the long wandring of Vlysses changed his companions into beasts with an inchanted cup or potion and in Virgil that the growing corn may be spoiled or carried away by inchantments which things unless they were approved and witnessed by many mens credits the wisdome of Magistrates and lawyers would not have made so many Laws against Magicians neither would there have been a mulct imposed upon their heads by the law of the twelve tables who had inchanted other mens corn But as in magical arts the devil doth not exhibit things themselves as those which he cannot make but only certain shews or appearances of things so in these which are any waies accommodated to the use of Physick the cure is neither certain nor safe but deceitful captious and dangerous It is but a deceitful cure that is performed by the devil I have seen the Jaundise over the whole body cured in one night by a written scroul hanged about the neck also I have seen Agues chased away by words and such ceremonies but in a short while after they returned again and became much worse Now there are some vain things verily the fancies of old women which because they have long possessed the mindes of men weakned with too much superstition we term them superstitious These are such as we cannot truly say of them wherefore and whence they have the faculties ascribed to them for they neither arise from the temperament neither from the other manifest qualities neither from the whole substance neither from a divine or magical power from which two last mentioned all medicines beyond nature and which are consequently to be used to diseases whose essences are supernatural must proceed Such like old wives medicines and superstitious remedies are written figures and characters rings where neither the assistance of God or Spirits is implored Let me ask you is it not a superstitious medicine to heal the falling sickness to carry in writing the names of the three Kings Oâ—d wives superstitious medicines against divers diseases Gaspar Melchior and Balthasar who came to worship Christ To help the tooth-ache if one whilst Mass is in saying touch his teeth saying these words Os non comminuetis ex eo To stay vomiting with certain ceremonies and words which they absent pronounce thinking it suffiâ—ient if that they but only know the patients name I saw a certain fellow that with murmuring a few words and touching the part would stanch blood out of what part soever it flowed there be some who to that purpose say this De latere ejus exivit Sanguis Aqua How many prayers or charms are carried about to cure agues some taking hold of the patients hand say Aequè facilis tibi Febris haec sit atque Maria vigini Christi partus Another washeth his hands with the patient before the fit saying to himself that solemn Psalm Exaltabo te Deus meus Rex c. If one tell an Ass in his ear that he is stung by a Scorpion they say that the danger is immediately over As there are many superstitious words so there are many superstitious writings also To help sore eyes a paper wherein the two greek letters Γ and Α are written must be tied in a thread and hanged about the neck And for the tooth-ache this ridiculous saying Strigiles facilesque dentatae dentiumdolorem persanate Also oft-times there is no small superstition in things that are outwardly applyed Such is that of Apollonius in Pliny to scarifie the gums in the tooth-ach with the tooth of one that died a violent death to make pils of the skul of one hanged against the bitings of a mad dog to cure the falling sickness by eating the flesh of a wilde beast killed with the same iron wherewith a man was killed that he shall be freed from a quartain ague who shall drink the wine whereinto the sword that hath cut off a mans head shall be put and he the parings of whose nails shall be tied in a linnen cloth to the neck of a quick Eel and the Eel let go into the water again The pain of the Milt to be asswaged if a beasts Milt be laid upon it and the Physician say that he cures or makes a medicine for the Milt Any one to be freed from the cough who shall spit in the mouth of a Toad letting her go away alive The halter wherein one hath been hanged put about the temples to help the head-ach This word Abracadabra written on a paper after the manner described by Serenus and hanged about the neck to help agues or fevers especially semitertians What truth can be in that which sundry affirm that a leaf of Lathyris which is a kinde of Spurge if it be plucked upwards will cause vomit but broken downwards will move to stool You may also finde many other superstitious fictions concerning herbs such as Galen reports that Andreas and Pamphilus writ as incantations transformations Lib. 6. de simp and herbs dedicated to conjurers and devils I had thought never in this place to have mentioned these and the like but that there may be everywhere found such wicked persons who leaving the arts and means which are appointed by God to preserve the health of mans body fly to the superstitious and ridiculous remedies of sorcerers or rather of divels which notwithstanding the devil sometimes makes to perform their wisht for effects that so he may still keep them ensnared and addicted to his service Neither is it to be approved which many say that it is good to be healed by any art or means for that healing is a good work This saying is unworthy of a Christian and savors rather of him that trusts more to the devil then in God Those Empericks are not of the society of Sorcerers and Magitians who heal simple wounds with dry lint or lint dipt in water this cure is neither magical nor miraculous as many suppose but wholly natural proceeding from the healing fountains of nature wounds and fractures which the Surgeon may heal by only taking away the impediments that is pain defluxions inflammation an abscess and gangrene which retard and hinder the cure of such diseases The following examples will sufficiently make evident the devils maliciousness alwaies wickedly and craftily plotting against our safety and life A certain woman of Florence as Langius writes having a malign ulcer Lib. epâ—st 38. ep and being troubled with intolerable pain at the stomach
of the shape which you may see here set forth The figure of a fish resembling a Monk The figure of a fish in the habit or shape of a Bishop Anno Dom. 1531. there was seen a Sea-monster in the habit of a Bishop covered over with scails Rondoletius and Gesner have described it Gesner professeth that he received from Jerome Cardane this monster having the head of a Bear the feet and hands of an Ape The effigies of a Sea-monster headed like a Bear The effigies of a Lion-like scaly Sea-monster Anno Dom. 1523. the third day of November there was seen at Rome this sea-monster of the higness of a child of five years old like to a man even to the navel except the ears in the other parts it resembled a fish The effigies of a Sea-monster with a mans face Gesner makes mention of this Sea-Monster and saith that he had the figure thereof from a Painter who took it from the very fish which he saw at Antwerp The head looks very ghastly having two horns prick-ears and arms not much unlike a man but in the other parts it was like a fish It was taken in the Illyrian Sea as it came ashore out of the water to catch a little childe for being hurt by stones cast by fisher-men that saw it it returned a while after to the shore from whence it fled and there died The effigies of a Sea-Devil Gesner tells that a Sea-monster with the head mane and breast of a horse and the rest of his body like a fish was seen and taken in the ocean-Sea brought to Rome and presented to the Pope Oâ—aus Magnus tells that a Sea-monster taken at Bergen with the head and shape of a Calf was given him by a certain English Gentleman The like of which was presented lately to King Charls the ninth and was long kept living in the waters at Fountain-Bleau and it went oft-times a shore This is much different from the common Sea-calf or Seal The effigies of a monstrous * This here figuâ—ed is the sea-Morse taken commonly by our men in their Greenland voiages and I judg the Sea-Bo e and Elephant to be the same but that the Painter hath shewed his skill too much in the one and the other is an old Morse as this here figured is a young one Sea calf This great monster was seen in the Ocean-sea with the head of a Bore but longer tusks sharp and cutting with scales set in a wonderful order as you may see by this figure The effigies of a Sea-bore Olaus Magnus writes that this Monster was taken at Thyle an Island of the North Anno Dom. 1538. it was of a bigness almost incredible as that which was seventy two foot long and fourteen high and seven foot between the eyes now the liver was so large that there with they filled five hogssheads the head resembled a swine having as it were a half-Moon on the back and three eyes in the midst of his sides his whole body was scaly The effigies of a monstrous Sea Swine The Sea-Elephant as Hector Boetius writes in his description of Scotland it is a creature that lives both in the water and ashore having two teeth like to Elephants with which as oft as he desires to sleep he hangs himself upon a rock and then he sleeps so soundly that Mariners seeing him at sea have time to come ashore and to binde him by casting strong ropes about him But when as he is not awakened by this means they throw stones at him and make a great noise with which awakened he endeavors to leap back into the sea with his accustomed violence but finding himself fast he grows so gentle that they may deal with him as they please Wherefore they then kill him take out his fat and divide or cut his skin into thongs which because they are strong and do not rot are much esteemed of The effigies of a Sea-Elephant The Brabians of Mount Mazoven which runs alongst the Red Sea chiefly feed on a fish called Orobone which is very terrible and much feared by other fish being nine or ten foot long and of the breadth agreeable thereto and it is covered with scales like a Crocodile A Crocodile is a vast creature comming sometimes to be fifteen cubits long and seeing it is a creature that doth not bring forth young but eggs it useth at the most to lay some sixtie eggs no bigger then Goose eggs rising to such such bigness from so small beginnings for the hatched young one is proportionable to the egg she is very long lived It hath so small and useless a tongue that it may seem to have none at all Wherefore seeing it lives both on land and water as it lives on land it is to be taken for a tongue but as it lives part of the life in the water it hath no use of a tongue and therefore is not to be reputed one For fishes either wholly wane tongues or else have them so impedite and bound The Crocodile only moves the upper jaw that they serve for little use The Crocodile only of all other things moves the upper jaw the lower remaining unmovable for her feet they are neither good to take nor hold any thing she hath eyes not unlike those of swine long teeth standing forth of the mouth most sharp claws a scaly skin so hard that no weapon can pierce it Of the land-Crocodile resembling this both land and water one is made the medicine Crocodilea most singular for sore eyes Expende diligenter Plimi locum lib 28. c. 8. being annointed with the juice of leeks it is good against suffusions or dimness of the sight it takes away freckles pustles and spots the Gall annointed on the eyes helps Cataracts but the blood clears the sight Thevet saith they live in the fountains of the river Nilus Cosmograph tom 1. l 2. c 8. How they take Crorodiles or rather in a lake flowing from the same fountains and that he saw some that were six paces long and a yard cross the back so that their very looks were formidable They catch them thus when as the water of Nilus falls the Egyptians let down a line having thereto fastned an iron hook of some three pound weight made very large and strong upon this hook they put a piece of the flesh of a Camel or some other beast which when as he sees he presently falls upon it and devours it hook and all wherewith when he finds himself to be cruelly pulled and pinched it would delight you to see how he frets and leaps aloft then they draw him thus hooked by little and little to the shore and fasten the rope surely to the next tree lest he should fall upon them that are about him then with prongs and such things they so belabor his belly whereas his skin is soft and thin that at length they kill him and uncaseing him they make ready his flesh and eat it for
delicious food Cap. 10. John Lereus in his history of Brasil writes that the Salvages of that country willingly feed upon Crocodiles and that he saw some who brought into their houses young ones wherewith their children gathering about it would play without receiving any harm thereby True saith Pliny is that common opinion Lib. 9. cap. 2. Whatsoever is brought forth in any part of Nature that also is in the Sea and many other things over and above that are in no other place You may perceive that there are not only the resemblances of living creatures but also of other things if you look upon the sword saw cucumber like in smell and color to that of the earth that you may less wonder at the Sea-feather and grape whose figures I have here given you out of Rondoletius The sea-feather is like those feathers of birds which are worn in hats for ornament after they are trimmed and drest for that purpose The fishermen call them sea-pricks for that one end of them resembleth the end of a mans yard when the prepuce is drawn off it As long as it is alive it swells and becomes sometimes bigger and sometimes lesser but dead it becomes very flaccid and lank it shines bright on the night like a star You may by this gather that this which we here express is the Grape whereof Pliny makes mention because in the surface and upper part thereof it much resembles a fair bunch of Grapes it is somewhat longish like a mis-shapen club and hangs upon a long stalk the inner parts are nothing but confusion sometimes distinguished with little glandules like that we have here figured alone by itself The figure of the Sea-feather and Grape In the Sea near the Island Hispaniola in the West Indies there may be seen many monstrous fishes amonst which Thevet in his Cosmography thought this most rare and observâ—ble which in the vulgar language of the natives is termed Aloes For it is just like a goos with a long and strait neck with the head ending sharp or in a Cone not much unlike a sugar-pear it is no bigger than a goose it wanteth scales it hath four fins under the belly for swimming when it is above water you would say that it were a goos The Sarmatian or Eastern German Ocean contains fishes unknown to hot countries and very monstrous Such is that which resembling a snail equals a barbel in magnitude of body and a stag in the largeness and branches of her horns the ends of her horns are rounded as it were into little balls shining like unto pearls the neck is thick the eyes shining like unto little candles with a roundish nose set with hairs like to a cats the mouth wide whereunder hangs a piece of flesh very ugly to behold It goes on four legs with so many broad and crooked feet the which with a long tail and variegated like a Tiger serves her for fins to swim withall This creature is so timerous The blood of great Tortoises good for the leprosie Tom lib. 20. that though it be an Amphibium that is which lives both in the water and ashore yet usually it keeps it self in the sea neither doth it come ashore to feed unless in a very clear season The flesh thereof is very good and grateful meat and the blood medicinable for such as have their livers ill affected or their lungs ulcerated as the blood of great Tortoises is good for the Leprosie Thevet in his Cosmography affirmeth that he saw this in Denmark In a deep lake of fresh water upon which stands the great city or town of Themistitian in the Kingdom of Mexico which is built upon piles like as Venice is there is found a fish of the bigness of a calf called by the Southern Salvages Andura but by those of the place and the Spaniards the conquerors of that place Hoga It is headed and eared almost like a swine from the chaps hang five long bearded appendices of the length of some half a foot like the beard of a Barbel It hath flesh very grateful and good to eat It bringeth forth live young like as the Whale As it swims in waters it seems green yellow red and of many colours like a Chameleon it is most frequently conversant about the shore-sides of the lake and there it feeds upon the leavs of the tree called Hoga whence also the fish hath its name It is fearfully toothed and a fierce fish killing and devouring such as it meeteth withal though they be bigger then her self which is the reason why the Fishermen chiefly desire to kill her as Thevet affirmeth in his Cosmography The monstrous fish Hoga Andrew Thevet in his Cosmography writes that as he sailed to America he saw infinite store of flying fishes called by the salvages Bulampech who rising out of the water flie some fifty paces escaping by that means from other greater fish that think to devour them This kinde of flying fish exceeds not the bigness of a Mackrel is round headed with a blewish back two wings which equal the length of almost all their body They oft-times flie in such a multitude that they fall foul upon the sails of ships whilest they hinder one anothers flight and by this means they fall upon the decks and become a prey to the sailers which same thing we have read confirmed by John Lereus in his history of Bresil In the Venetian gulf between Venice and Ravenna two miles above Quioza Anno Dom. 1550. there was taken a flying fish very horrible and monstrous being four foot long it had a very great head with two eyes standing in a line and not one against another with two ears and a double mouth a snout very fleshy and green two wings five holes in her throat like those of a Lamprey a tail an ell long at the setting on whereof there were two little wings This monster was brought alive to Quioza and presented to the chief of the city as a thing whereof the like had not been formerly seen The figure of a monstrous flying Fish There are so many and different sorts of shels to be found in the Sea that it may be truly said that Nature the hand-maid of the Almighty disports it self in the framing of them In so great diversity I have chiefly made choice of three to treat of here as those that are worthy of the greatest admiration In these lie hid certain little fishes as snails in their shels 4. de hist anim cap. 4. which Aristotle calls Cancelli and he affirmeth them to be the common companions of the * By crusted is meant Crâ—bâ— Lobsters Shrimps and such like The description of the Hermite cray-fish crusted and shell fishes as those which in their species or kinde are like to Lobsters and use to be bred without shels but as they creep into shels and there inhabit they are like to shell fishes It is one of these that is termed the Hermite
for the stomach spleen reins bladder womb mesentery and also for the head from whence oftentimes by sharp glysters the hurtful matter is brought downwards as we see in Apoplexies Therefore there is no part of the body which receives not some benefit by glysters but more or less according to the vicinity they have with the belly and the strength of the glyster for there are divers sorts of glysters some emollients Differences of glysters other evacuating some anodynes some astringents some cleansing some sarcotick and epulotick and some may be said to nourish They may be all made of the parts of plants or beasts with compound medicines either solutive or altering and others according to the advice of the Physician The materials of glysters The parts of plants which are used to this purpose are roots seeds leavs flowers fruits shouts juices mucilages Parts of beasts are yolks of eggs and whites hony chickens capons old cocks well beaten heads and feet of sheep the intestines whey milk sewet axungia and such like in decoctions wherein we mingle and dissolve simple and compound medicines We sometimes use without any other medicament to make a glyster with oil alone as oil of nuts for the Colick of whey alone the decoction of the head and feet of the sheep alone and of the decoction of Cicers and barly do we prepare Glysters The quantity of a glyster is sometimes less according to the divers disposition of men and their diseases Their quantity for weak children the quantity is less for women with child and in the colick dysentery lyenterie or when much hardened excrement is within But when we would abundantly move the excrement and there is nothing that may hinder the dose of a glyster for the most part is half a pound one pound or three quarters of a pound The glyster must be injected warm or hot more or less according to the nature or condition of the sick for being cold it offends the intestines and the neighboring nervous parts which are cold of themselves It must be given by degrees for being injected suddenly the winde which is usually in the guts will beat it back again whence câ—mes intolerable pain But this will be more clear by that we shall teach concerning the differences of glysters whereof there shall be sufficient examples An emollient glyster â„ž malv. violar bismalv acanth an m.i. radic alth lilior an â„¥ .i. passul ficuum ping â„¥ ss fiat decoctio ap lb i. in qua dissolve cass butyr recent an â„¥ i. ol viol â„¥ iii. fiat Clyster Glysters that do evacuate are prepared by the counsel of the Physician and of divers Simples being boiled for several purposes A glyster to evacuate a cold phlegmatick humor Therefore if the humors be cold which are to be evacuated the Glyster shall be after this manner â„ž Salviae origani abrotoni chamaem melilot an m. ss seminum anisi foenic. cumini an Ê’ iii. semin carthar Ê’ii Make a decoction of them wherein dissolve Diaphon Hier. Simpl. an â„¥ ss ol aneth chamaem an â„¥ i. ss Mellis Antho. sacc rub an â„¥ i. fiat Clyster To evacuate Choleriëk matter prepare a Glyster after this manner â„ž quat remollient paret Cichor endi an m. ss Semen quat frigid Major an Ê’iii hordei integri p. i. Make a decoction of them and dissolve in it Cass â„¥ i. Ol. viol mellis viol an â„¥ ii fiat Clyster To evacuate melancholy this Glyster following will be useful â„ž Fumitor Centaur minoris Mercurialis an m. i. Polyp Qu. folicul sennae an Ê’ iii. seminis agni casti Thymi an Ê’ii Make a decoction and dissolve therein Confect Hamech â„¥ ss Cass recens extract Ê’ iii. olei violati lilior an â„¥ ss Sac. rub mellis viol an â„¥ i ss salis Ê’i And those Glysters do not only evacuate the humors that offend but also correct the distemper of the bowels and inward parts For the Glysters described against pituious and melancholick matter help the cold distemper but that which is for choler the hot distemper Purging medicines which are dissolved in the decoction of Glysters are very strong as Confect Hamech Benedicta Diaprun Solutivum Diaphaenicon being used from Ê’ vi to â„¥ i. at most but the weaker and more gentle are Catholicon Cassia Hiera simplex from Ê’vi to â„¥ ii at most An Anodyne Glyster is usually made without such things as purge or evacuate as An Anodyne Glyster â„ž Flor. Chamaem melil Aneth an p i. rad Bismal â„¥ i. boil them in Milk and to the decoction add Mucaginis seminis lini foenugraeci extractae in aqua Malvae â„¥ ii saccari albi olei anethi chamaemeli an â„¥ i. vitellos ovorum duos fiat Clyster These Glysters should be kept longer in the body that so they may more easily mitigate pain The example of an astringent Glyster â„ž Equiseti plantag polygami an m. i. boil them in lacte ustulato An Astringent Glyster to â„¥ â—ii to the decoction strained add Bol. armeni sanguinis draconis an Ê’ii olei rosati â„¥ ii album ovorum duorum fiat Clyster We use these kinde of Glysters in Dysenteries and in the immoderate flux of the Haemorrhoid v in s having first evacuated the usual excrements Glysters which be sarcotick epulotick and cleansers of the greater guts and fit for the curing of ulcers are to be prepared of such medicines as are described before in their proper Chapters Alimentary Glysters are made of the decoction of Chickens Capons Cocks Nourishing Glysters being boiled to a gelly and strongly prest forth They are also prepared of Mâ—rrow gelly which are not altogether so strong as those which are commonly taken by the mouth because the faculty of concoction in the guts is much weaker then that of the stomach Oftentimes also the matter of these kinde of Glysters is prepared in wine where there is no pain of the head or fever but more frequently in the decoction of Barly and in Milk adding the yolks of Eggs and some small quantity of where sugar lest by the cleansing faculty it move the guts to excretion And therefore Sugar of Roses is thought better which is conceived to be somewhat binding Here you may have examples of such Glysters â„ž Decoctionis Capi perfectè cocti lb. i. ss saccari albi â„¥ ss misce fiat Clyster â„ž Decocti Pâ—â—li Galatinae an lb. ss vini opt â„¥ iv fiat Clyster â„ž Decocti hordei mundati in cremorâ—m redacti lb. ss lactis boni lb i. Vitellos ovorum duos fiat Clyster Their use We use these kind of Glysters to strengthen children old and weak men and bodies which are in a Consumption But in the use of these there are three things to be observed First that the faeculent excrements may be taken away either by strength of nature or by art as by a Suppository or an emollient Glyster lest the alementary matter being mingled
into pieces the salt or that earthy matter which remains after the boiling away of the Capitellum with a knife or hot iron spatula form them into cauteries of such figure and magnitude as they think fitting and so they laye them up or keep them for use in a viol or glass closely stopped that the air get not in Or Take a bundle or sufficient quantity of Bean-stalks or husks of Colewort-stalks two little bundles of cuttings of Vines four handfuls burn them all to ashes which put into a vessel of river-water so let them infuse for a dayes space being stirred ever now and then to this add two pounds of unquencht Lime of Axungia vitri half a pound of calcined Tartar two pounds of Sal niter four ounces infuse all these being made into powder in the foresaid Lye for two or three daies space often stirring it then strain the Capitellum or liquor through a thick cloth until it become clear Put it into a bason and set it over the fire and when as the moisture is almost wholly spent let two or three ounces of vitriol be added when the moisture is sufficiently evaporated make cauteries of that which remains after the formerly mentioned manner Take of the ashes of sound knotty Old oke as much as you please make thereof a Lye pour this Lye again upon other fresh ashes of the same wood let this be done three or four times then quench some Lime in this Ley and of these two make a Capitellum whereof you may make most approved cauteries The sign of good Capitellum For such ashes are hot in the fourth degree and in like sort the stones whereof the Lime by burning becomes fiery and hot to the fourth degree Verily I have made Caureries of Oke-ashes only which have wrought quickly and powerfully The Capitellum or Lye is thought sufficiently strong if that an egg will swim therein without sinking Or Take of the ashes of bean-stalks three pounds of unquencht lime Argol of the ashes of Okewood being all well burnt of each two pounds Let them for two daies space be infused into a vessel full of Lye made of the ashes of Oke-wood and be often stirred up and down Let this Lye then be put into another vessel having many holes in the bottom thereof covered with strums or straw-pâ—pes that the Capitellum flowing thorough these strait passages may become more clear Let it be put twice or thrice upon the ashes that so it may the better extract the heat and caustick quality of the ashes Then putting it into a Barbers basin set it over the fire and when it shall begin to grow thick the fire must be increased and cauteries made of this concreting matter The following cauteries are the best that ever I made trial of The faculty of the silken cautery as those that applied to the arm in the bigness of a Pease in the space of half an hour without pain especially if the part of it self be painless and free from inflammation eat into the skin and flesh even to the bone and make an ulcer of the bigness of ones fingers end and they leave an eschar so moist and humid that within four or five daies space it will fall away of it self without any scarification The cause of the name I have thought good to call these cauteries Silken or Velvet ones not only for that they are like Silk gentle and without pain but chiefly because I obtained the description of them of a certain Chymist who kept it as a great secret for some Velvet and much entreaty Their description is this Take of the ashes of Bean-stalks of the ashes of Oke-wood well burnt of each three pounds Their description let them be infused in a pretty quantity of river-water and be often stirred up and down then add thereto of unquench't lime four pounds which being quench't stirr it now and then together for two daies space that the Capitellum may become the stronger then strain it through a thick and strong linnen-cloth and thus strained put it three or four times upon the ashes that so it may draw more of the caustick faculties from them then boil it in a Barbers basin or else an earthen one well leaded upon a good Char-cole-fire until it become thick But a great part of the secret or Art consists in the manner and limit of this boiling for this Capitellum becomming thick and concreting into salt must not be kept so long upon the fire until all the moisture shall be vanished and spent by the heat thereof for thus also the force of the foresaid medicines which also consists in a spirituous substance will be much dissipated and weakned therefore before it be come to extreme driness it shall be taken from off the fire to wit when as yet there shall some thick moisture remain which may not hinder the cauteries from being made up into a form The made up cauteries shall be put up into a glass most closely luted or stopped that the air may not dissolve them so they shall be laid up kept in a dry place Now becaus the powder of Mercury is neer to cauteries in the effect faculty thereof which therefore is termed pulvis Angelicus for the excellency therefore I have thought good to give you the description thereof which is thus â„ž auripigmenti citrini floris aeris an â„¥ ii salis nitri lbi ss alumin. rochae lbii. vitrioli lbiii The description of Mercury or Angelical powder Let them all be powdred and put into a Retort having a large receiver well luted put thereto Then set the Retort over a Furnace and let the distillation be made first with a gentle fire then encreased by little and little so that the receiver may wax a little reddish â„ž Argenti vivi lb ss aquae fortis lbi ponantur in phiala fiat pulvis ut sequitur Take a large earthen pot whereinto put the viol or bolt-bolt-head wherein the Argentum vivum and Aqua fortis are contained setting it in ashes up to the neck thereof then set the pot over a furnace or upon hot coles so that it may boil and evaporate away the Aqua fortis neither in the interim will the glass be in any danger of breaking when all the water is vanished away which you may know is done when as it leaves smoaking suffer it to become cold then take it forth of the ashes and you shall finde calcined Mercury in the bottom of the colour of red Lead separated from the white yellow or black excrement for the white that concretes in the top is called Sublimate which if it should remain with the calcified Mercury you shall make it into powder and put it in a brass vessel upon some coals stirring or turning it with a spatula for the space of an hour or two for thus it will lose a great part of the acrimony and biting whence it will
stricken with lightning fall on the contrary side only man falleth on the affected side if he be not turned with violence toward the coast or region from whence the lightning came If a man be stricken with lightning while he is asleep he will be found with eyes open contrariwise if he be stricken while he is awake his eyes will be closed as Pliny writeth Philip Commines writeth that those bodies that are stricken with lightning are not subject to corruption as others are Therefore in antient time it was their custom neither to burn nor bury them for the brimstone which the lightning bringeth with it was unto them in stead of salt for that by the driness and fiery heat thereof it did preserve them from putrefaction Signs of wounds given to a living or dead man Also it may be inquired in judgment Whether any that is dead and wounded received these wounds alive or dead Truly the wounds that ate made of a living man if he dye of them after his death will appear red and bloody with the sides or edges swoln or pale round about contrariwise those that are made in a dead man will be neither red bloody swoln nor puffed up For all the faculties and functions of life in the body do cease and fall together by death so that thenceforth no spirits nor blood can be sent or flow into the wounded place Therefore by these signs which shall appear it may be declared that he was wounded dead or alive Signs whether one be hanged alive or dead The like question may come in judgment when a man is found hanged whether he were dead or alive Therefore if he were hanged alive the impression or print of the rope will appear red pale or black and the skin round about it will bee contracted or wrinkled by reason of the compression which the cord hath made also oftentimes the head of the aspera arteria is rent and toâ—n and the second spondyl and the neck luxated or moved out of his place Also the arms and leggs will be pale by reason of the violent and sudden suffocation of the spirits moreover there will be a foam about his mouth and a foamy and filthy matter hanging out of his nostrils begin sent thither both by reason that the Lungs are suddenly heated and suffocated as also by the convulsion and concussion of the brain like as it were in the falling-sickness Contrariwise if he be hanged dead none of these signs appear for neither the print of the rope appears red or pale but of the same color as the other parts of the body are because in dead men the blood and spirits do not flow to the greived parts Whether one found dead in the water câ—me therein alive or dead Whosoever is found dead in the waters you shall know whether they were thrown into the water alive or dead For all the belly of him that was thrown in alive will be swollâ— and puffed up by reason of the water that is contained therein certain clammy excrements come out at his mouth and nostrils the ends of his fingers will be woâ—â— and excoriated because that he died striving and digging or scraping in the sand or bottom of the river seeking somewhat whereon he might take hold to save himself from drowning Contrarywise if he be thrown into the waters being dead before his belly will not be swoln because that in a dead man all the passages and conduits of the body do fall together and are stopped and closed and for that a dead man breaths not there appeareth no foam nor â—â—lthy matter about his mouth and nose and much less can the tops of his fingers be worn and excoriated for when a man is already dead he cannot strive against death But as concerning the bodies of those that are drowned those that swim on the upper part of the water being swoln or puffed up they are not so by reason of the water that is conteined in the belly but by reason of a certain vapor into which a great portion of the humors of the body are converted by the efficacy of the putrifying heat Therefore this swelling appeareth not in all men which do perish or else are cast out dead into the waters but only in them which are corrupted with the filthiness or muddiness of the water long time after they were drowned and cast on the shore But now I will declare the accidents that come to those that are suffocated and stifled or smothered with the vapor of kindled or burning charcoals Of such as are smothered by Charcoal and how you may fore-tel the causes thereof by the history following In the year of our Lord God 1575. the tenth day of May I with Robert Gleauline Doctor of Physick was sent for by Master Hamel an Advocate of the Court of Parliament of Paris to see and shew my opinion on two of his servants of whom the one was his Clerk and the other his Horse-keeper All his family supposed them dead because they could not perceive or feel their Arteries to beat all the extreme parts of their bodies were cold they could neither speak nor move their faces were pale and wan neither could they be raised up with any violent beating or plucking by the hair Therefore all men accounted them dead and the question was only of what kinde of death they died for their Master suspected that some body had strangled them others thought that each of them had stopped one anothers winde with their hands and others judged that they were taken with a sudden apoplexy But I presently inquired Whether there had been any fire made with coals in the house lately whereunto their master giving ear sought about all the corners of the chamber for the chamber was very little and close and at last found an earthen-pan with charcoal half burned which when we once saw we all affirmed with one voyce that it was the cause of all this misfortune and that it was the malign fume and venemous vapor which had smothered them as it were by stopping the passages of their breath Therefore I put my hand to the regions of their hearts where I might perceive that there was some life remaining by the heat and pulsation that I felt though it were very little wherefore we thought it convenient to augment and increase it Therefoâ—e first of all artificially opened their mouths which were very fast closed and sticking obstinately together and thereinto both with a spoon and also with a silver-pipe we put aqua vitae often distilled with dissolved hiera and triacle when we had injected these medicines often into their mouths they begâ—n to move and to stretch themselves and to cast up and expel many viscous excremental and filthy humors at their mouths and nostrils and their lungs seemed to be hot as it were in their throats Therefore then we gave them vomitories of a great quantity of Oxymel and beat them often
affirm that he is in danger of his life by reason of the malign symptoms that usually happen upon such wounds such as are great pain a fever inflammation abscess convulsion grangrene and the like Wherefore he stands in need of provident careful dressing by benefit whereof if he escape death without doubt he will continue lame during the remainder of his life by reason of the impotency of the wounded part And this I affirm under my hand Another in the hurts of divers parts We the Surgeons of Paris by the command of the Senate this twentieth day of March have visited Master Lewis Vertoman whom we found hurt with five wounds The first inflicted on his head in the middle of his fore-head-bone to the bigness of three fingers and it penetrates even to the second table so that we were forced to pluck away three splinters of the same bone The other was athwart his right cheek and reacheth from his ear to the midst of his nose wherefore we stiched it with four stitches The third is on the midst of his belly of the bigness of two fingers but so deep that it ascends into the capacity of the belly so that we were forced to cut away portion of the Kall comâ—ing out thereat to the bigness of a walnut because having lost its natural colour it grew black and putrified The fourth was upon the back of his left hand the bigness almost of four fingers with the cutting of the veins arteries nerves and part of the bones of that part whence it is that he will be lame of that hand howsoever carefully and diligently healed Now because by hurting the spinal marrow men become lame sometimes of a leg it is fit you know that the spinal marrow descends from the brain like a rivulet for the distribution of the nerves which might distribute sence and motion to all the parts under the head wherefore if by hâ—â—ing the spinal marrow the patients arms or hands are resolved or numb or wholly without sense it is a sign these nerves are hurt which come forth of the fifth sixth seventh vertebrae of the neck But if the same accidents happen to the thigh leg or foot with refrigeration so that the excrements flow voluntarily without the patients knowledg or else are totally supprest it is a sign that the sinews which proceed from the vertebrae of the loins and holy-bone are hurt or in fault so that the animal faculty bestowing sence â—nd motion upon the whole body and the benefit of opening and shutting of the sphincter-muscle of the bladder and fundament cannot shew its self in these parts by which means sudden death happens especially if there be difficulty of breathing therewith A caution in making report of a woman with chi de being killed Being tâ— make report of a childe killed with the mother have a care that you make a discreet report whether the childe were perfect in all the parts and members thereof that the Judge may equally punish the author thereof For he meriteth far greater punishment who hath killed a childe perfectly shaped and made in all the members that is he which hath killed a live-childe then he which hath killed an Embryon that is a certain concretion of the spermatick body For Moses punisheth the former with death as that he should give life for life but the other with a pecuniary mulct But I judg it fit to exemplifie this report by a President I. A. P. By the judges command visited Mistris Margaret Vlmargy whom I found sick in bed having a strong fever upon her with a convulsion and efflux of blood out of her womb by reason of a wound in her lower belly below her navel on the right side penetrating into the capacity of her belly and the wound therein whence it hath come to pass that she was delivered before her time of a male childe perfect in all his members but dead being killed by the same wound piercing through his scull into the marrow of the brain Which in a short time will be the death of the mother also In testimony whereof I have put my hand and seal The manner how to Embalm the dead I Had determined to finish this my tedious work with the precedent Treatise of Reports but a better thought came into my head which was to bring Man whose cure I had undertaken from his infancy to his End and even to his Grave so that nothing might be here defective which the Surgeon might by his proâ—ession perform about mans body either alive or dead Verily there hath scarce ever been a Nation so barbarous which hath not only been careful for the Burial but also for the Embalm ng or preserving of their dead bodies For the very Scythians who have seemed to exceed other Nations in barbarousness and inhumanity have done this for according to Heredâ—tus the Scythians bury not the corps of their King The caâ—e of the Sâ—â—â—ians in the Embalming their deâ—d The like care of the Ethiopians before that being emboweled stuffed full of beaten Cypress Frankinsence the seeds of Parsley and Aâ—ise he be also wrapped in sear-cloths The lâ—ke care hath also possessed the mindes of the Ethi pians for having disburdened the corps of their friends of their entrails and flesh they plastered them over and then having thus rough-cast them they painted them over with colors so to express the dead to the life they inclosed them thus adorned in a hollow pillar of glass that thus inclosed they might be seen and yet not annoy the spect tors with their smell Then were they kept for the space of a year in the hands of their next kindred who during this space offered and sacrificed to them The year ended they carried them forth of the city and placed them about the walls each in his proper vault Lib. 3. Oâ— the Egyptians as Herod tus affi ms But this pious care of the dead did far otherwise affect the Egyptians then it did other nations For they were so studious to preserve the memory of their ancestors that they Embalmed their whole body with aromatick ointments and set them in translucent Urns or glass-Cells in the more emâ—nent and honored part of their houses that so they might have them daily in their sight and might be as monuments and inciters to stir up them to imitate their Fathers and Grandsiâ—es virtues Besides also the bodies thus embalmed with aromatick and balsamick ointments were in â—â—eâ—d of a most sure pawn so that iâ— any Egyptian had need of a great sum of mony they might easily procure it of such as knew them and their neighbors by pawning the dead body of some of their dead parents For by this means the creditor was certain that he which pawned it would sooner lose his life then break his promise But if all th ngs so unhappily succeeded with any so that through poverty he could not fetch home his pawn again but
the Hollow-vein is first divided into two notable branches EE from which all those veins arise that run as well to the Head as to the Arms The division of the Hollow vein into the two Subclavian branches or to certain Muscles of the Abdomen Of these one goes to the right side and the other to the left which as long as they yet are in the Chest are called Subclavii Subclavian branches because they go under thâ— Claviculae or Collar-bones but as soon as they have gotten out of the Chest and attain to the Arm-hole they are named Axillares the Axillary-veins F From both of them very many propagations issue forth some of which arise from their upper part and some from their lower In our recital of them we will observe this order that they which are nearest to the Trunk shall be first mentioned by us and they last which are farthest from it The first propagation then issues out near the very root of the divarication or division of the Trunk and is called Intercostalis superior the upper intercostal-vein Propagations from the lower part of the Subclavian branches Intercostalis superior e there is of either side one which being very little and descending along by the roots of the ribs as far as to the third rib sends two twigs ff overthwart like the vena sine pari to the two distances of the upper ribs But if the vena sine pari send its propagations to all the distances as it sometimes happens then it is wanting not without cause Sometimes the same vein arises from the Trunk of the Hollow-vein before its division into the Subclavian-branches Another vein g sometimes arises from the fore-part of the Bifurcation sometimes from the root of the Subclavian-branch and is double of either side one sometimes also only one grows out of the middle of the Trunk before it be divided which at length when it has attained unto the Breast-bone is parted into a right and a left branch For Nature is wont to sport as sometimes in its other works so especially in the rise of veins so that they are not spread in all bodies after the same manner Mammary But this is called Mammaria the Mammary-vein which whensoever it arises going toward the fore-part strives to get up to the higher part of the Brest-bone and descends by the side of it and when it comes to the Breast-blade about its sides goes out of the Chest and runs on directly under the right Muscles of the Abdomen even to the Navil near to which it is joyned by Anastomosis or Inoculation 10 with an Epigastrick-vein 9 that ascends and meets it by the benefit whereof arises that notable sympathy betwixt the womb and Breasts of women of which we shall speak more hereafter in the eight Chapter when we shalâ— insist on that History of the Epigastrick vein But before it leave the Chest in its descent it distributes one branch a piece to the six distances betwixt the Gristles of the seven upper true ribs of either side which are terminated with the Gristles near to the end of the bony part of the ribs in which place we told you that the branches of the vein sine pari with the extremities of which these are joyned were ended From these veins which are distributed in this manner to the distances of the Gristles some others very worthy of our notice do arise which are disseminated both in the Muscles that lye upon the Breast and into the Paps Near to these a third h arises and sometimes also grows out of the Trunk Mediastina which is called Mediastina because it spreads it self into the Mediastinum or membrane that closes up the cavity of the Chest being extended all along by it Cervicalis with the left Nerve of the Midriff The fourth i commonly called Cervicalis or the Neck-vein is a large vein of both sides which running obliquely upward and backward to the Transverse processes of the Rack-bones of the Neck and climbing up through their holes from whence perhaps it might be better named Vertebralis affords sprigs to the Muscles that lye next upon the Rack-bones When this vein has got above the Transverse Process of the seven Rack-bones it derives a notable branch to the Sinus or Ganale in the Neck through the hole that is made for the outlet of the Nerves and then another when it comes above the Process of the sixth spondyl or Rack-bone and again another when it has left the fifth Spondyl until at last it comes to the Process of the first Rack-bone which notwithstanding it does not touch much less does it pass into the Skull as Vesalius would have it near which it goes partly to the same sinus or canale partly it is distributed into the hinder part of the Neck For there are two long sinus filled with blood which are made out of the hard membrane of the Brain one of each side being placed at the sides of the maâ—row of the Neck From these little branches are distributed which nourish the marrow of the Back-bone and the neighbouring parts they being about the Juncture of the head with the first Rack-bone and end near to the seventh Rack-bone of the Neck These two sinus of which one is of the right another on the Left-side have some communion betwixt themselves by a little pipe and that a short one which is derived overthwart from the one to the other for the most part about that region of the Neck which is betwixt the second and third Rack-bones At last there is a fift vein l which arises from the hinder part called Muscula imferior or the lower Muscle-vein which is distributed in many branches to the Muscles in the lower part of the Neck and so extending the Head and Neck from whence the vein might be rightlyer called Cervicalis or the Neck-vein and also to those in the higher part of the Chest near to the Rack-bones Propagations that arise from the upper part of the Subclavian branches Jugularis interna Externa From the upper part of the Subclavian branches whilest the Hollow-vein is yet in the Chest three propagations issue forth two of which do very well-deserve to be noted which take their way upward under the muscles that bend the Head The former of the two looks more inward and is called Jugularis interna the inner Jugular vein the other inclines to the outer parts and is commonly called Jugularis externa the outer Jugular vein For both of them arise near to the Jugulum or Hollow of the Neck and ascend by that to the Head The inner is greater and the outer less in a man but in Brutes t is contrary But when almost all Appellations are derived and that best not from the place through which the veins pass but from their insertion perhaps they might be rightlyer named Cephalicae or Capitales Head-veins The inner Jugular vein m takes its original near
its outer branch to the Chops and region of the Ear is joyned by the inner all the way to the Arteria carotis or slâ—â—py Aâ—iâ—â—y and is divided near to the skull into two branches called Encephalici or of the Brain by Spigelius of which the hindmost and greater n. n having entred into the skull through the second hole of the Nowl bone is inserted o o into the first 1 oo second 2 siâ—us of the thick membrane p. But the foremost and lesser p having entred through the seventh hole of the wedg-bone is scatered through the sides of the thick membrane The second is the outer Jugular vein q. q which getting up by the sides of the Neck is divided near to the Ears r. r into two branches of which the one called Profundus s s is variously disseminated into the Muscles of the Larinx or Throttle and the bone called hyoides as also into the Tongue the Palat and hollowness of the Nostrils and lastly into the skull with three propagations t. of which that which pâ—sses t out of the fore part of the eye through the second hole of the wedg-bone is very well delineated here The other called Subcutaneus u. u first of all spreads its fore-branch x into the Muscles and skin of the Face x. which joins with its fellow about the top of the nose and makes the Forehead vein y y. then it issues out another hinder branch which partly creeps upward along the temples z and partly is carried behinde the ears to the skin of the back part of the head α α The third Cervicalis Superior β the upper vein of the Neck β is propagated into the Muscles behinde on the backside of the neck There are three sinus or small chanels of the thick membrane of the brain the first or right one is marked with 1 1. the second or left one with 2 the third with 3. 2. The hinder part of this which is nearer to the Nowl of the Head 3. is shadowed but the forepart which is next to the Forehead is seen manifestly From this sinus many little veins which they call Ductus are reacht forth to both sides F. Here the subclavian vein takes on it the name of Axillaris or the vein of the Armpit and is divided into two branches the Cephalick G and the Basilick I. But before this division it scatters two twigs the first called scapularis interna or the inner vein of the shoulder blade γ. γ the other Scapularis externa the outer blade vein δ. δ. the Basilick vein also I before it enters the Arm propagates two one called Thoracica superior ε. the upper Chest-vein ε which is distributed through the inside of the Pectoral Muscle and in women through the Dugs the other called Thoracica inferior ζ. the lower Chest-vein ζ which descending along the side of the Chest goes to the Muscle called Aniscalptor G. The Cephalick vein which before its division sends away a sprig η. η into the Muscle deltoides and another θ into the Muscle of the Cubit θ. When the Cephalick vein comes to the joint of the Cubit at the outer bunching forth of the Arm it is cut into three branches H. H The first ι or deep and middle one goes to the Muscles arising from the said protuberation â— The second χ or inner goes to the making of the vein called Mediana λ. λ The third μ or outer is carried obliquely μ. ν by the radius or lesser bone of the Cubit to the out side of the Arm ν and so creeping on obliquely all the way when it is come to the root of the wrist it is joyned with a little branch of the Basilick-vein Ï„ Ï„. and makes the vein called Salvatella The basilick-vein which on the right hand is called Hepatica or of the Liver on the left Lienatis of the Spleen This before its division sends out a Surcle ο ο. to the heads of the muscles of the Cubit and then another notable one Ï€ Ï€. which being carried down obliquely bestows its Surcles upon the Muscles that arise from the outer protuberation of the Arm. K. The division of the Basilick-vein K into two branches the one called Profundus or the deep one the other Subcutaneus or branch under the skin The deep one L L. when it comes to the bending of the cubit is divided into two M. M one of which called Radieus N N. at the Radieus or lesser bone of the Cubit the other called cubiteus O. O at the greater bone of the Cubit goes to the hand P. Subcutaneus or the branch next under the skin P near to the inner protuberation of the arm is divided Q. Q R. into two other of which the inner R together with the inner branch of the Cephalick η makes up the vein mediana λ which it likewise divided into two branches Ï. the outer of which Ï is called by some Cephalica manus Ï‚. and goes to the Thumb the inner Ï‚ to the fore and middle fingers S. The outer S going to the wrist is joyned toward the little finger with the outer branch of the Cephalick-vein about Ï„. Ï„. The little valves which are found in the veins of the joynts are handsomely cut out here as it were to be seen through The descendent Trunk of the Hollow-vein which begins about the region of the Liver T T. and ends about the fifth Rack-bone of the loins V. V. There are four Twigs growing from this Ï…. The first Ï… called Adiposa or Fatty-vein distributed to the membrane of the Kidneys φ. The second φ the Emulgent going to the Kidney The third praeparans vas the preparing vessel χ. the right one χ arising out of the Trunk T.V. the left ψ out of the left Emulgent ψ. both afterward going into the Testicles ω. ω. The fourth is the three Lumres or lein-veins 444. 444. The division of the Descendent Trunk V into the two Iliacal branches XX XX. both which are again divided into two other Y. an inner one Y and an outer Z. But before this division two propagations are issued forth Z. Muscula lumbalis 5. or the Muscle vein of the loins 5 and Sacra or the holy vein 6. 6. Y. The inner Iliacal-vein before it goes out of the Peritoreum or rim of the belly shoots out two propagations the first called Glutaea 7 7. and the second Hypogastrica 8. 8. The remainder of it passing through the Peritoneum is spent upon the inside of the Thigh Z. The outer Iliacal vein likewise before its going forth of the Peritoneum scatters three propagations the first called Epigastrica 9 9. going into the Muscles of the Epigastrium and the strait ones of the Abdomen where they are
propagation of the third pair of the nerves it runs out through the middle of the said muscles returning from the hinder to the fore patts and so is distributed into all the skin of the head as far as to the top of the crown t. 2. f. 1. Η as also to the ears The other branch which is the slenderer is inserted into the great strait muscles and the lower oblique ones that extend the head Galen makes mention of these branches lib. 4. de locis affect which place we shall not think much to transcribe hither it making very much to the illustration of the use of this kinde of learning Not long since sayes he they ulcerated the head of a certain man by laying on medicines vehemently heating thinking by this means his sense that was greatly impaired might be recovered But we cured this very man having found out the seat of the disease as well from other accidents as from the primitive or procatarctick causes For we diligently examined him about every one of them and found that this was one when he had walked in much rain caused by a violent wind his cloak was wet about his neck so that he felt himself affected with a vehement cold in that part so then if you know that four nerves ascend from the first rack of the back-bone to the head from which the skin about it receives its sense you will easily find out the seat of the disease that therefore being healed the skin of the head was healed also as having no primary disease The third pair tab 1. 3. issues out of the common hole in the sides The third pair which is betwixt the second and third rack-bones and presently after it gets out is cleft into two branches of which the more forward one tab 1. l. is subdivided into four propagations The first t. 2. It s fore-branch Κ goes to the first bending muscle of the neck or the long one the second t. 1. L. runs down and being united with a sprig of the fourth pair tab 1. Q ends in the muscles that lye under the gullet The third tab 1. Μ. climbs up and joining with the thicker branch of the second pair but now mentioned tab 2 f. 1 F is spent upon the skin of the hinder part of the head The fourth tab 1. Πis imparted to the transverse muscles or to the first pair of the extenders of the neck and to that which lifts up the shoulder-blade of which two muscles that tends in the transverse processes of the neck this begins therein and at length it is digested into the square muscle that draws down the cheeks which is called by Galen 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 It s hinde◠branch The hinder branch tab 2. f 1. Ο is implanted into the second pair of muscles that extend the chest The fourth pair tab 1. numb †The fourth pair The fore-branch Its propagations issues out of the common hole of the third and fourth rack-bones and like the third pair is divided into two unequal branches The more forward and greater tab 1. Ρ is cleft into three other twigs of which the first tab 1. Q is joined with another branch of the third pair tab 1. L and goes to the first long pair of muscles that bend the neck Another tab 1. R goes to the transverse muscle or first of those which extend the neck and to the first of the shoulder-blade called Cucullaris the cowl-muscle The third tab 1. S being smaller then the other and joined with a surcle of the fifth pair and another branch of the sixth pair near to the mediastinum or membran that parts the chest in the middle and above the Pericardium passes on downward that out of these three principles the nerve of the midriff may be made up The hinder branch tab 2. f 1. Τ goes toward the spine or ridge under the muscles which are placed thereabout The hinder branch to which also it affords a good number of branches and from thence being led downward between the muscles on both sides of the neck it is carried to the square muscle that draws down the cheeks In this place it is worth our labour to inquire what may be the reason A question that they who are troubled with a Resolution or deprivation of motion in the whole body have nevertheless the motion of their midriff for a while free some make answer that this happens because although no spirits are sent over from the brain yet they may be diffused out of the marrow of the back But these men beg the question when we suppose that no spirits come from hence because we see that all the muscles of the whole body to which nerves are sent from the marrow of the back are resolved or deprived of motion Therefore I thought fit to seek out for another answer and to say that the midriff has two motions one that is voluntary which we use whilst we breath strongly another natural one when the fibres are extended and contracted of themselves A man therefore is preserved by this natural motion when we see that breathing is little and weak and as much as suffices that the lungs may be moved a little The fifth pair tab 1. numb 5. goes out betwixt the fourth and fifth rack-bones and The fifth nerve Its fore-branch like the two last fore-going is cleft into two branches The forwarder of them tab 1. U issues forth some propagations The first tab 1. betwixt U and 6 goes to the muscles that bend the neck Another tab 1. Χ together with propagations of the fourth and sixth pairs sometimes also of the seventh to wit then when the branch of the fourt is wanting descends near to the side of the gullet through the sore part of the rack-bones of the neck and is implanted into the midriff and so makes the midriff nerve The third t. 1. Υ is carried through the upper part and outside of the arm to the second muscle of the arm to wit that which lifts τ up called Deltoides from whence little branches are sent over to the first and second that is to the cowl-muscle the lifter up of the shoulder-blade The fourth propagation t. 1. b at the neck of the shoulder-blade is cleft into two of which the former tab 1. c goes into the muscle Deltoides at that part where it arises from the clavicle or canal-bone the latter and thicker tab 1. d is inserted into the fourth pair of muscles of the bone hyoides called coracohyoideum and from thence imparts a small branch to the upper muscle over the shoulder-blade called super scapularis and to the muscle Deltoides where it arises from the spine of the shoulder-blade The binder branch The sixth pair It s fore-branch The binder branch tab 2 f 1. e is writhen toward the back-bone and distributed in the same manner as the hinder branch of the fourth pair is The sixth pair
tab 1. numb 6 goes out under the fifth rack-bone and in like manner as the other pairs are is divided into two branches The forwarder and greater tab 1. f after it has propagated that sprig tab 1. g which we said is joyned with the fourth and fifth pair tab 1. S and Χ to the making up of the nerve of the midriff tab 1. i passing on farther is united with the two next following pairs the seventh of the neck and the first of the chest and is again separated from them and then again being joined with them it so weaves a certain net-like texture It s hinder branch The seventh pair The fore-branch The hinder from which nerves are issued forth that go to the arm The hinder tab 2. fig. 1. Ι is carried to the hind muscles which extend the head and neck The seventh pair tab 1. η. 7 is derived from the marrow of the neck and issues forth through the common hole of the sixth and seventh rack-bones The forwarder and greater branch thereof tab 1. m is joined presently after its egress with the sixth nerve of the neck and the first of the chest and for the greater part is carried with the rest to the arm The hinder lesser branch tab 2. fig. 1. n goes to the muscles that lye upon the neck and to the square one that draws down the cheeks CHAP. III. Concerning the Nerves of the marrow of the rack-bones of the Chest TWelve conjugations of nerves issue forth from the spinal marrow whilst it runs through the rack-bones of the back as the most learned Vesalius has rightly opinioned however there are but eleven holes bored in the twelve rack-bones thereof as Columbus objected because the first pair passes out between the last rack-bone of the neck and the first of the back wherefore it ought to be numbered rather among the pairs of the chest then those of the neck All these conjugations after their egress are divided into two and the one branch which is the greater alwayes bends forward the other which is the less is bent to the hinder parts and to the muscles that lie upon the back The first pair The first pair then tab 1. numb 8. of the nerves which issue forth from the marrow of the chest goes out of the common hole of the seventh rack-bone of the neck and the first of the chest in the same manner as the five pairs last mentioned do and in like sort also is forthwith divided into two branches It s fore-branch The forwarder and greater tab 1. ο is united tab 1. Ï partly with the seventh nerve of the neck partly with the second of the chest in that manner which we have before explained and so afterward is wholly consumed upon the arms excepting one propagation tab 1. q which arising at the beginning of it is joined with the said nerves and runs into the foreparts near the length of the first rib of the chest to the breast bone bestowing a sprig upon the subclavian muscle after that being reflected upward it is spent upon the muscles which take their original from the top of the brest-bone such are the muscle that bends the head called Mastoideus that which draws down the bone hyoides or sternohuoideus and the first of them which extend the buckler-like gristle of the throttle called thyroides or the muscle sternothyroideus But to the two last sometimes branches are sent over from the sixt conjugation of the brain and the third of the chest The same branch also when it has past the arm-pit being ready to go to the arm issues forth a certain other propagation from its hinder part which goes to the muscles seated in the hollowness of the shoulder-blade It s hinder branch The hinder and less branch ta 2. fig. 1. r lies hid under the muscles which grow to the rack-bones and imparts some propagations to the second bending muscle of the neck and to them which extend the head and neck but when it has attained to the spine of the seventh rack-bone it goes overthwart to the lower side and distributes surcles into the first muscle of the shoulder-blade or that like a Monk's cowl and in the third of the same called Rhomboides as also into the upper of the hindmost saw-muscles The second pair ta 1. num 9. The second pair The fore-branch breaks out betwixt the first and second rack-bones of the chest and is cleft likewise into two branches The forewarder t. 1. s. is united with the first pair of the chest and thus the first and second pairs of the chest are united by turns with the fifth sixth and seventh of the neck that the one are not discerned from the other but make a net not unlike to those things which hang at Cardinals hats from which afterward all the nerves that go to the arms issue forth and take their original This spreads out a branch t. 1. t. which goes forward through the first distance betwixt the ribs according to the course of the first rim as far as to the breast-bone making the first Intercostal nerve from which surcles t. 1. The hinder one u are distributed into the muscles that lye upon the chest The hinder branch t. 2. f. 1. x has the same dissemination with that of the foregoing pair The other ten pairs tab 1. numb 10 11 12. and so on to 19 inclusively of the nerves of the chest observe the same manner both of their rise and distribution The other ten pairs For they all issue out of the common holes of the rack-bones at the sides and presently after their egress are cleft into two branches of unequal bigness one of which is the forwarder and greater the other the inner and less The forward branches ta 1. y. Their fore-branches which make the nerves between the ribs are carried into the fore-side and each of them affords a little branch in order according to its length to the inner branch of the sixth pair which descends under the pleura to the roots of the rib These branches are joined with the Intercostal veins and arteries together with which they pass along the rib of the forepart through the sinus or channel which is cut out on the lower and inside of the ribs But they which belong to the true ribs go on as far as to the breast-bone but they which belong to the bastard ones are carried into the forepart of the Abdomen above the peritoneum or rim of the belly From these nerves many branches are disseminated into the muscles between the ribs not only in the inner but the outer ones also as wel into the other ta 1. z which lye upon the chest such as are the fourth and fifth muscles of the shoulder blade or the two formost saw-muscles as also to the broad one called Latissimus tab 1. β that moves the arm backward from the breast In like manner a propagation goes
to the sole of the foot and distributes propagations into both the sides of the lower part of the toes An Explanation of the two Tables of the Nerves THe thirty pairs of the nerves of the marrow of the brain whilest it is carried through the spine or ridge are exprest in these two Tables the present and the following one We have inscribed common characters on both of them though many also be peculiar to one after which we have presently set the number of the Table But the first shews the rack-bones of the spine and the nerves that issue from thence on the foreside the second on the backside nu 1. t. 1 c. 8 as far as 20 as far as 25 as far as as far as to 7. The seven rack-bones of the neck to 19. The twelve rack-bones of the chest to 24. The five rack-bones of the loins to 30. The six bones of the Os sacrum These same figures do stand for the pairs of the spinal marrow A ta 1. 2. The seat of the spinal marrow where it first enters into the rack-bones 1. 1. The first pair of the neck whose forwarder propagations is B B 1. C 2. the hinder C. The second pair whose fore-propagation is D 2. 1. D. E 2. its hinder E from this two branches grow out the slender one marked with the letter E E 2. F. the other thick one with F which is mixed with a branch of the third pair M G about G. But the course thereof to the skin of the crown and back side of the head is marked with the letter H. H 3.1 The third pair of the neck whose fore-branch I is divided into four propagations I. 1. The first K is implanted into the muscles K. 1. that bend the neck M. 1. The second L is mixt with a twig of the fourth pair Q. The third M is mixt with the thicker propagation of the hinder branch of the second pair F. The fourth N is inserted into the muscles that are joined to the trans-verse processes of the rack-bones N. O 2. The hinder branch O. 4.1 The fourth pair of the neck whose fore-branch P is cleft into three propagations P. The first Q joins with the second propagation of the third pair L. Q 1. R 1. The second R goes into the transverse muscle of the neck S 1. The third S. T 2. The hinder branch T. 5.1 The fifth pair of the neck whose fore-branch V issues out some surcles V 1. The first goes to the muscles that bend the neck being to be seen in the first table between V and the number 6. X 1. The second X making the greatest part of the nerve of the midriff Y. The third Y goes to the muscle Deltoides of which there is a propagation a 1. a which goes to the skin that covers the muscles Deltoides â— 1. and Biceps The fourth b at the neck of the shoulder-blade is cleft into two branches c 1. one of which c enters into the muscle Deltoides at what part it grows out of the Collar-bone d 1. the other d is implanted into the same in the place where it grows out of the spine of the shoulder-blade e 2. The hinder branch e. 6. 1 The sixth pair of the neck whose fore-branch f f 1. when it has propagated that surcle g g 1. which with the fourth and fifth pair S and X makes the nerve of the midriff is joined with the two following h 1. h and thus it makes up the nerve of the midriff i i 1. so that this arises out of three surcles S X and g. The hinder branch l. I 2. 7. 1. The seventh pair of the neck whose fore-branch is m m 1. n 2. its hinder one n. 8â— The first pair of the chest whose fore-branch o o 1. p 2. it united p with the seventh pair of the neck and second of the chest spreading a propagation q q 1. through the upper side of the first rib r 2. The hinder branch r. 9 1. The second pair of the chest whose fore-branch sends forth a surcle t t 1. running out through the first space betwixt the ribs and sending surcles u to the muscles of the chest u. 1. x 2. The hinder branch x. 10 11 12. The pairs of nerves from the ninth to the twentieth which have the same series of propagations c. to 19 inclusively 1. and especially to the distances of the ribs The fore-branches of those fig. 1. are scattered into the muscles seated on the forepart of the chest and partly into their upper region as y y 1 z 1. partly in their lower z which in women go also to the breasts and then they send other surcles into the heads of the oblique descending muscles of the abdomen α α 1. and into that which leads the arm from the breast β β 1. another goes to the nipple of the breast γ. γ 1. δ 1. The hinder branches δ. â— 1. The first nerve that goes to the arm which is scattered into the skin of the outside of the arm ζ â— The second nerve that goes to the arm whose two first propagations η η goe to the two heads of the muscle Biceps η η 1. then it joins with the third nerve by a surcle †◠Thirdly it carries a propagation to the longer muscle that turns the palm of the hand downward θ. θ 1. But about the bending of the cubit it is divided into two branches â— 1. an outer and an inner one χ. χ 1. That descending along the radius or wand is inserted at the out side of the seond joint of the the thumb λ. λ 1. This χ is by and by subdivided intr an outer μ μ 1. and an inner branch ν. ν 1. This ν is again cleft in the region of the cubit into an outer branch ο ο 1. and an inner one Ï€. Ï€ 1. Ï The third nerve entring the armâ— before it attains to the arm scatters a sprig betwixt the Pectoral muscle σ 1. and Deltoides σ. By and by having entred the arm Ï„ 1. it distributes another Ï„ into the second muscle that bends the cubit After that discending it receives a branch from the second nerve Ï… 1. when it is past the bought of the arm φ 1. it is distributed into many surcles φ φ. 1. Χ. 1. Ψ 2. at length about the palm of the hand it is divided into three branches Χ. The fourth nerve entring the arm which is the greatest of all them that go to the arm is not marked with any letters in the second table but in the third only lest the second should be too much blurred with Letters This sodainly after it has
entred the arm ο. reaches out small sprigs ο into the muscles that extend the cubit then another into the inner skin upwards and downward Γ Γ. Δ. Τ. Λ Ξ. Π. Σ. Φ. Ψ. Ο. and another into the lower part Δ and another Τ which goes as far as to the wrist After this near to the bought of the arm it is divided into two branches an outer one Λ and an inner ΠThat Λ about the transverse ligament is again divided into two Ξ. This Πreaching all along the cubit sends forth more propagations the first Σ the second Φ the third Ψ. Then another in its progress Ο. The remainder ends in the wrist 31. 3 1. 32. 1. The fifth that enters the arm which about the inner protuberation of the arm is disseminated like to the third Its first surcle 33 33. 34. 35. 36. 1. 37. 38. 20. 21. 22 23 24. 1. 39.1 its second 34. its third 35. The sixth nerve of the arm which goes under the skin imparting many sprigs to it 37 37 37. The end of it is 38. The five pairs of the nerves of the loins the first 20 the second 21 the third 22 the fourth 23 the fifth 24. A certain branch arising from the first pair of the loins 20 and descending for the most part with the preparing artery to the testicle The course of the nerves through the muscles of the Abdomen from which branches 41 goes into the muscle that leads the arm outward from the breast 40. 1. 41. 1. The hinder branches of the nerves of the loins 42. 2. The six pairs of the nerves of the great bone 25 26. 27 28 29 30. 1. Of these the first is 25 the second 26 the third 27 the fourth 28 the fifth 29 the sixth 30. 43. 1. 44. 2. A surcle reacht out from the fore-branch of the first nerve of the great bone to the inside of the hanch bone and so to the muscles of the abdomen 45. 1. that arise from that bone Then another spreading out from the hinder-branch to the muscles seated on the back of Os Ilium or the hanch bone The termination of the spinal marrow passing on without a mate and undivided 46. 1. 47. 48. 1. 49. 1. The first nerve entring the crus This arises where the third nerve of the loins meets with the fourth 47. A branch of this 48 goes to the skin but 49 it is entangled among the muscles that are seated on the outside of the thigh The second crural nerve a notable propagation whereof 51 runs out into the same course with the vein Saphena to the end of the foot 50. 1. 51. 1. and there ends about 52. In the mean time it proffers another notable surcle 53 to the foreside of the knee 52. 1. But the remainder of the trunk 54 enters deep into the thigh 53. 1. 54. 1. 55. 1. and gives out a small branch 55 but without question the chief The third crural nerve whose propagation 57 goes to the muscles called Obturatores 56. 1. 57. 1. 58. 1. 59. 1. 69. 1. and another 58 to the skin The remainder 59 lies deep intangled in the muscles whose chief propagation is 60 which is implanted in the second and third muscles that bend the Leg. The fourth and that the thickest of all the nerves of the crus 61. 1. whose first branch is 62 which is inserted into the skin of the buttocks 62. 1. 63. 1. another 63 is distributed into the heads of the muscles that arise from the appendix of the Hip. 64. 1. a third 64 is given to the fifth muscle that bends the leg and others 65 go into the outer calf muscle 65. 1. and that of the sole of the foot But about the lower heads of the thigh it is divided 66 into two branches 66. 1. 67. 1. to wit an outer one 67 and an inner 72. 68. 1. The outer branch a propagation whereof 68 is sent under the skin that covers the outer part of the leg and the outside of the foot 69. 1. But the branch it self 69 goes to the connnexion of the lesser bone of the leg with the greater 70. 1. sending forth another surcle 70 to the forepart of the leg under the skin the remainder of it 71 reaches along the fibula or lesser bone of the leg 71. 1. 72. 1. The inner branch a propagation whereof 73. 1. 73 goes through the inside of the leg toward the calf and inside of the foot under the skin 74. 1. and then another 74 is scattered into the skin especially that which covers the calf 75. 75. 1. Another also 75 75 goes into the fore-part of the leg through the ligament that joins the lesser bone of the leg to the greater 76. 1. and afterward is spent on the upper side of the foot 77. 1. The last propagation 76 runs out betwixt the inner and outer calf muscle The remainder of the trunk goes by the inner ankle to the lower part of the foot distributing two surcles a piece to the lower part of all the toes The second and third figures of the second Table These two figures do exhibit the nerves of the arm and leg in a larger form then the first table does so that all which concerns those nerves may be shewn more accurately herein But they have common characters and the same explanation of the same serves for both A General Table of all the chief things treated of in this Work A ABortions why frequent in a pestilent season 8. their causes c. 615 Abauctores musculi 57 169 Abscesses how to be opened 184 Aconite the symptoms caused thereby and their cure 519 Actual cauteries preferred before potential 480. Their formes and use ibid. Their force against venemous bites 503 Action the definition and division thereof 15 voluntary action 16 Adders their bitings the symptoms thereon ensuing together with the cure 507 Adiposa vena 80 Adductores musculi 157 Adjuncts of things natural 15 Adnata sive conjunctiva one of the coats of the eye 142 Agilops what the differences thereof and the cure 407 Aegyptiacum the force thereof against purrefaction 305. a cleanser and a not suppurative 306. descriptions thereof 298. 320. the praise thereof 553 After-birth see Secundine 496 After-tongue 137 After-wrist 17 Age what the division thereof Ages compared to the four seasons of the year Agony what 27 Agues see quotidian quartain tertian Bastard agues how cured 203 Agglutinative medicines 231. their nature and use 699 Air an Element the prime qualities thereof 61. the necessity thereof for life 19 which hurtful 20 What understood thereby ibid. How it changes our bodies ibid. Though in Summer colder then the brain 253. How it becomes hurtful 293. How to be corrected 303. Of what force in breeding diseases 306. What force the Stars have upon it ibid. How that which is corrupt or
muscles 83 Cridones what disease and the cure 227 Crocodiles may be tamed 51 Crookedness how helped 568 Crural vein 159. Artery 160 Crureus musculus 165 Crus how taken 158 Crystallinus humor 129 Cubit the bones and muscles thereof 153 Cubit-bones the fractures of them 357 Cuboides os 118 Cupping glasses and their use 442 443. Their use and the cure of a Bubo 551 Cures accidental and strange 33 34. deceitful ibid. Custom how forcible 21 Cuticle the matter quantity figure c. thereof 60 Cuttel-fish his craft 45 Cysticae gemellae 77 D. DArtos 83 Death the inevitable cause thereof 27. How suddain to many 499 Definition of Surgery 1 Definition how dâ—fferent from a description 54 Defluxion of humors how diverted 182 Delirium the causes thereof 237. The cure ibid. Deliverance in childe-birth how furthered 601. Which difficult 602. Which easie ibid. Deltoides musculus 153 Dentifrices their differences matter and form 716 Depilatories Derma 60 Detersives 185 697. their use ibid. Devils and their differences 659. Their titles and names 660. They are terrified and angred by divers things 662 Devil of the Sea 671 Diabete what the causes signs and cure 438 Diaphoretick medicines 109 Diaphragma See Midriff why called Phrenes 98 Diaphysis what 164 Diary fever the causes and signs 185. the cure ibid. Diarthrosis 173 Die-bone 167 Diet hath power to alter or preserve the temperament 19 Diet convenient for such as have the Gout 451. For such as fear the stone 422. In prevention of the Plague 529. In the cure thereof 541 Differences of muscles 65 Digitum flexores musculi 156 157 168 169 Digitum tensores musculi 156 157 168 160 Diploe what 114 Disease the definition and division thereof 30. causes ibid. Diseases strange and monstrous 33 Diseases incident to sanguine cholerick phlegmatick and melancholick persons 11. wherefore some are hereditary 590. supernatural 661. Monstrous accidents in them 666 Dislocations their kindes and manner 348. their differences 349. causes ibid. Signs ibid prognosticks 371. The general cure Symptoms that may befall a dislocated member Dislocation of the jaw 373. The cure 374. ibid. Of the Collar bone ibid. Of the spine 375. Of the head ibid. Of the neck 378. Of the Rump ibid Of the ribs ibid. Of the shoulder ibid. Of the elbow 396. Of the Styliformis processus 397. Of the wrist 398. Of the afterwrist 398. Of the fingers ibid. Of the thigh or hip ibid. Of the whirlbone 394. Of the knee forwards 395. Of the greater and lesser Focile 396. Of the heel ibid. Of the Pastern or ankle-bone 397. Of the instep and back of the foot ibid. Of the toes ibid. Dismembring See Amputation Distemperature and the diversity thereof 28 Distillation and the kindes thereof 725. Fornaces and the vessels therefore 726. What to be considered therein 727. How to prepare the materials therefore 728. How to distill waters 729. How Aqua vitae 730. How to rectifie them ibid. To distil in the Sun ibid. By filtring ibid. Of Oils 732. Of Spirits 733. Of Oils of Gums ibid. Of Oil of Vitriol 735 Docility of Beasts 45 Dogs their love to their masters 40. Their docility 45. Why they become mad sooner then other creatures 504. How their bites may be known ibid. Prognosticks 505. The cure of such as are bitten by them 506 Dorvenium the poysonous quality thereof and the cure 518 Doves free from adultery 40 Draco marinus the sea-Dragon his poysonous puncture the symptoms and cure 515 Dracunculus what 224. The cure ibid. Dragons their craft 45 Dreams of the sanguine cholerick phlegmatick and melancholick persons 11. Not to be neglected 24 Dropsie what 213. The differences Symptoms and causes 214. Signs and Prognosticks ibid. The cure ibid. Following upon a tumor of the mesentery 621 Dugs their substance magnitude c. 95. What to be done to drie up milk 612 Duodenum the magnitude c. 72 Dura mater what 114. The hurts thereof by Trepanning and how helped 265 Remedies for the inflammation and Apostumation thereof ibid. Why it easily endures acrid medicines 289 E. EArs their parts and composure 132. Their wounds and cure 273. To supply their defects 567. Their ulcers 336. Their stoppâ—ng and things falling into them how helped 412 Ears of the heart 101 Ear wax for what use it serves 133 Earth a cold and drye element 3 Earthquakes their cause 293 Ecchomosis what and how cured 243 Echo the cause thereof 133 Effects of Phlegm 9. Of choler and melancholy ibid. Ejaculatory vessels in men 94. In women 89 Elbow the dislocation thereof 386. how to restore it dislocated outwardly 386. To the inside 387. Why most subject to the anchyliosis ibid. Elements how understood and their principal qualities 3. What those of generation are 4. What those of mixt bodies are ibid. The cause of their transmutation 292 Elephants their strength piety c 40. Where bred and their qualities 681 Embalming the dead 748. The manner how 789 Embryon when it takes that name 566 Embrocation what and how performed 711 Emollient and resolving medicines 195 Emplasters what their differences 708. Signs they are perfectly boyled 708. Their use 710. Cautions in their application 191 Emplastrum de Vigo cum Mercurio 708. De gratia Dei ibid. De Bâ—tonica sive de fanua ibid. Oxycrotium 709. De cerusa ibid. Tripharmâ—cum seu nigrum 110. Diacalma seu Diacalcitheos ibid. Contra Rupâ—uriâ—â— ibid. De Mucilaginibus ibid. De nunio ibid. Diachylum magnum ibid. Empyema what 212. The cure thereof ibid. Emptiness 25 Emulgens Arteria 78. Vena 80 Enarâ—hrosis a kinde of Articulation 172 Enterocele a kinde of Rupture 216 Ephemera febris 185. The causes and signs thereof ibid The cure ibid. Epidermis 60 Epidydemis 83 Epigastrium what 59. The conteining parts thereof ibid. Epigastrica vena 81 Epiglottis what 15 Epiploon what 69 Epiâ—lois vena 78 Epiplocele 216 Epithemes to strengthen the principal parts 691. their composition and use 711 Epomis musculus 153 Epulis what the symptoms and cure 207 Epulotick or skinning medicines their kindes and use 699 Errhines their differences description and use 714 Erysipelas what 187. what tumor referred thereto 180. the differences thereof 180. Prognosticks 238. Their cure ibid. Erythrois tunica 83 Eschar how to hasten the falling away thereof 553. Medicines causing it 700 Escharotticks 700. Why used to spread ulcers 283 Estridg between a bird and a beast 778. The sceleton of one ibid. Evacuation and the kindes thereof 25. What to be observed therein 26 Eunuches assimilated to women 11 Excrements of the fi st second and third concoction what 598 Exercise the use and best time for it 23. The quality thereof ibid. Exomphalos or standing forth of the navel 216 Exostosis in Lue Venerea 478 Experience without reason of what account 30 Eye brows 142 Eye-lids ibid. To stay them being too lax 402. To open them fastned together 404. To help their itching ibid. Eyes their sight and quickneâ—s 127. Figure composure
c. ibid. Their muscles coats and humors 129. their wounds 130. to hide the loss or defect of them ibid. their ulcers 333. their cure 334. their effects 402. c. their inflammation 403 F FAce discloser of affections and passions 26. the wounds thereof 267. How to help the redness thereof 723 Faculties what 15. their division 14 Falling down of the Fundament the causes and cure thereof 223. Fat the substance and cause c. thereof 61. Why not generated under the skull 267. How to be distinguished from the brain ibid. the cure thereof being wounded 181 Fauces what 136 Faulcon her sight with the Hern. 47 Faults of conformation must be speedily helped 504. Of the first concoction nor helped in the after 451 Fear and the effects thereof 26 Fever sometimes a symptom otherwise a disease Fevers accompanying Flegmons and their cure 185 Happening upon Erysipelous tumors 208. Upon Oedematous tumors 189. Upon Schiâ—thous tumors 202. The cure of bastard intermitting Fevers 208 Feet and their bones 165. Their twofold use 168 Fierce Clare a fish 516 Females of what seed generated 591 Fiâ—ra curis what 132 Fibula 164 Figures in Anatomy and the first of the forepart of man 58. Of the backparts thereof 59. Of the lower belly and parts thereof 68 69. Of the stomach 71. of the vessels of seed and urine 81. Of the bladder and yard 86. Of the womb 89. Of some parts in women different from those of men 91. Of the hollow vein 104. Of the Arteries 105. Of the rough Artery or weazon 109. First and second of the brain 125. Third of the Cerebellum 130. Fourth and fifth of the brain 118. The sixth of the brain ibid. Seventh shewing the Nerves of the brain 120. The eighth of the brain 121. Of the spinal marrow 123 Of the eye 128. Of the chief muscles of the face 131. Of the lower jaw 132. Of the ears 133. Of the back-bone 139. Of the muscles in sundry parts of the body 140 141 142 143. 144 145. Of the nerves 119 Of the bones in the hands 155. Of the thigh bone 162. Of the bones in the feet 165. Of the Sceleton 171 172 Figures of instruments used in Surgery See Instruments Figures of divers sorts of javelins and arrow-arrow-heads 310 Figures of monsters 64. 643 c. Of divers beasts c. as of Succarath 39. Of the Elephant 47 685. Rhinoceros 43. Of the Camel 46. Of the Crocodile 51. Of the Crab 199. Of the Scorpion c. 488. Of the Serpent Hemorrhous 508. Of the Serpent Seps ibid. Of the Basilisk 509. Of the Salamander ibid. Torpedo 510. Of the Sting Ray 516. Of the Sea-hare ibid. Of the Monk and Bishop-fish 670. Of the Sea-devil 671. Of the Sea-Mors ibid. Of the Sea-Bore 672. Of the fish Hoga 674. Of a Monstrous flying-fish 675. Of Bernard the Hermit 676. Of the sailing-fish ibid. Of the Whale 677. Of an Estridg 678. Of the bird of Paradice 680. Of a Giraffa 681. Of a beast called Thanacth 687. Of the beast Haiit and a Monstrous African-beast 684. Of a Cameleon 686 Figures of Fornaces and other things fit for distillation 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735. Figure of a fractured arm with a wound in a fit posture 358. Of a Leg fractured with a wound and bound up 363. Of Ligature for extention 372. How to restore the dislocated spine 377. Of putting the shoulder into joint 380 381 382 383 384 385. Of the Ambi and the use thereof 385. Of restoring the dislocated elbow 387. Of the thigh-bone dislocated inwards 393. Outwards 394. Of restoring a knee dislocated forwards 395 Figure of a Semicupium 424. Of a Barrel to be used in the cure of a Caruncle 476. Of the Helmet-flour 519. Of the situation of the Childe in the womb 600. Of leaden nipples 609. Of a glass to suck the breasts with 614 Figures of Artificial Eyes 562. Of noses 564. Of teeth 565. Palats ibid. How to supply the defect of the tongue 566. Of the Ears 567. Iron Breast-plates 568. Of an urin basin and Artificial-yard 583. Of an iron finger-stall ibid. Of an Erector of the hand 584. Of boots for such as are crook-legged 585. Of an artificial-hand 586. Of an arm and leg 587 588. Of a crutch 589 Filings of lead their harm taken inwardly and cure 521 Filtration the manner and use thereof Fingers and their parts c. 155. their dislocation why easily restored 156. how to take away such as be superfluous and help those that stick together 417. How to supply their defects 583 Fire and the qualities thereof 3. The force thereof against the Plague 529 Fishes their industry 44. They may be tamed 42 Fisherman a fish so called 45 Flatulent tumors their causes signs and cures 191 192 Flatulencies about the joints counterfeiting the Gout 59 Fistula lacrymosa see Aegilops Fistulas what their differences signs c. 340. Their cure 341. In the Fundament ibid. The cure ibid. Upon the wounds of the chest and the cure 276 Fleshly Pannicle the History thereof 61 Flesh quickly putrifies in maritime parts 293 Flexores musculi 163. Superior 618 Flux of blood in wounds how helped 232 Flux of the belly how to be stopped 559 560 Flying fish of a Monstrous shape 675 Focile what 164. How to cure the separation of the greater and lesser 627. The separation from the pastern-bone 628 Fomentations and their use 711. For broken bones 368. They hurt plethorick bodies ibid. What to be observed in their use ibid. Fornaces their matter and form 725 727 728 c. Fornix 117 Foxes and their crafts 44 Fracture what and the differences thereof 348. Their causes ibid. Signs and Prognosticks ibid. 349. Their general cure 350. How to help the symptoms 351 Why deadly in the joynt of the shoulder 354. why near a joint more dangerous 361. Fractures of the skull their differences 238 Of the causes and signs 240. Signs manifest to Sense 241. A fâ—â—ure the first kind of fracture ibid. How to finde it being less manifest ibid A contusion the second kinde of fracture 243. An estracture the third kinde 245 A Seat the fourth kinde 247 Resonitus the fifth kinde ibid. The prognosticks 250. general cure of them and their symptoms 353. They are hurt by Venery 255. By noise ibid. The particular cure 257. Why trepanned 258 Fractures more particularly and first of the nose 352. Of the lower jaw ibid. Of the Collar-bone 353. Of the shoulder-blade 354. Of the breast-bone ibid. Of the Ribs 355. Of the vertebrae or Rack-bones 356. Of the Holy-bone 357. Of the Rump ibid. Of the Hip ibid. Of the shoulder or arm-bone ibid. Of the cubit or Ell a Wand 358. Of the Hand 359. Of the Thigh ibid. Of the Thigh near the joynt 361. Of the patella or whirl-bone 362. Of the leg ibid. Of the bones of the feet 368 Fractures associated with wounds how to be bound up 345 363 French Pox see Lues Venerea
faculties 689. their second third and fourth faculties 690 691. the preparation 693 the composition necessary and use thereof 701 Megtim the causes c. thereof 401 Melancholy the tempers thereof 7. the nature consistence c 8. the effects thereof 9. of it corrupted 10 Melancholick persons their complexions c. 11. why they hurt themselves 504 Meliceris what kinde of tumor 193 Membranosus musculus 164 Memory what 598 Menstrual flux signs of the fitst approach thereof 635. See Courses Meninges their number c. 114 Mercury sublimate its caustick force 521. the cure ibid. Meremaid 669 Mesentery its substance c. 74. the tumors thereof 621. the sink of the body ibid. Midriff its substance c. 98. signs of the wounds thereof 274 Milk soon corrupts in a Phlegmatick stomach 605. the choice thereof ibid. how to drive it downwards 613 Millipes cast forth by urine 488 Milt See Spleen Mola the reason of the name and how bred 618. how to be discerned from a true conception ibid. a history and description of a strange one 619. the figure thereof ibid. what cure to be used thereto 620 Mollifying medicines 796 Monk's hood the poyson and cure 517 Monstrous creatures bred in man 488 Monsters what 642. their causes and descriptions ibid. c. caused by defect of seed 651. by imagination 653. by straitness of the womb 654. by the site of the mother by a stroak c. ibid. by confusion of the seed of divers kindes by the craft of the devil of the Sea 669 c. Morse Sea-calf or Elephant 671 672 Mortification and the signs thereof 321 Mother See Womb. Mothers fittest to nurse their own Children 605. their milk most familiar to them ibid. Motion which voluntary 16. taken for all manner of exercise 23 Mouth and the parts thereof 135. the ulcers and their cure 335. how to prevent and heal them in cure of the Lues Venerea 407 Mummy frequently used in contusions 314. not good therein 315 Mundificatives 697 Muscles what 63. their differences and whence taken ibid. and 64. c. their parts 65. a further inquiry into the parts of them ibid. Muscles of the Epigastrium 66. of the fundament 73. of the testicles 83. of the bladder 86. of the yard 87. the broad muscle 126. that open and shut the eye ibid. of the eye 127 of the nose 130. of the face 131. of the lower jaw ibid. of the bone Hyoides 134. of the tongue ibid. of the Larinx 136. of the Epiglottis 137. of the neck 140. of the chest and loins 146 146. of the shoulder-blade 147. of the arm 151. of the cubit 153. moving the hand 156. of the inside of the hand 157. moving the thigh 163. of the leg 164. moving the foot 168. of the toes 169. an epitome or brief recital of all the muscles 173 c Musculous skin of the head 111. the wounds thereof and their cure 255 Musculosae vene 81. Arteriae 107 Mushroms their hurtful and deadly quality and the cure 518 Musick the power thereof 33 Mudriasis a disease of the eye the cause and cure 408 N NAils why added to the fingers 148. why grow continually ibid. whence generated 156 Napellus the poysonous quality and cure 517 Narcoticks 183. cautions in their use 188. improperly termed Anodynes 701 Nata what 193 Nates 117 Nature oft doth strange things in curing diseases 272 Natural parts and their division 56 Natural See Things Faculties Actions Navel what the figure and composure 94. the generation thereof 594. the relaxation thereof in children 641. the swelling or standing forth thereof 216. the cure ibid. Nautilus or sailing-fish 676 Neck and the parts thereof 137. the wounds thereof 273. the dislocation thereof 376 Necrosis or mortification 321 Nerves what 65. their distribution to the natural parts 79. of the sixth conjugation and their distribution 106. Ramus costalis ibid. recurrens ibid. stomachicus ibid. their seven conjugations 119 Nerves of the neck back and arms 150. of the loins holy-bone and thigh 160 Nerves and nervous parts their wounds 282. their cure ibid. Night-shade the deadly night-shade his poysonous quality and the cure 518 Nightingals sing excellently 47 Nipples 96. how to help their soreness 608 Nodus what 193 Nodules their form and use 715 Nothern people how tempered 12 13 Nose and the parts thereof 130. the wounds thereof 272. their cure ibid. how to supply the defects thereof 564. the ulcers thereof 335. theit cure ibid. the fracture 352 Nurses their cerror in binding lacing of children 378. they may infect children with the Lues Venerea and be infected by them 463. participate their diseases to their children 605. the choice of them ibid c. of their diet and other circumstances 607. c. Nutrition what 14 15 Nymphae 91 O OBlique descendent muscles 66. ascendent muscles 67 Obliquator externus musculus 156 Obturatores musculi 163 Oedema what 190. which tumors referred thereto 181. the differences thereof 190. the causes ibid. signs prognosticks cure ibid. 191 Oesophagus or gullet the substance Attractive force c. thereof 110. the magnitude figure site temper and action ibid. Oil of whelps the description and use thereof 286. it helps forward the scaling of bones 482 Oils and the several making of them 705 731. by distillation 732. out of gums 733 734 Ointments their differences descriptions and use 706 c. Old-age and the division thereof 5. it is a disease 21 Old wives medicines 663 Olecranum what 154 Omentum or the Kall the substance magnitude figure and composure thereof 69 70. the connexion tempet and two-fold use ibid. it sometimes hinders conception ibid. Operations of Surgery of what nature 1. why some which are mentioned by the Antients are omitted by the Author 753 Opium why not used in poysoning 518. the symptoms caused by it and their cure 519 Order to be observed in eating our meat c. 22. in lying to sleep 24 Organical parts which 54. what observable in each of them ibid. Orifices of the heart 102 Orpiment the poysonous quality thereof and the cure 521 Os ossa occipitis 113. Basiliare ibid. Coronale ibid Bregmatis sive parietalia ibid. Petrosa ibid Cuniforme sive phenoides ibid. Ethmoides cribrosum seu spongiosum ibid. Zygoma sive jugale 124. Hyoides hypsiloides c. 134. c. Sesamoida 156. Ilium 161. Ischium ibid. Pubis ibid. Innominata 167. See Bones Ozaena a filthy ulcer of the nose the cause and cure 335 P PAin and the â—ouses thereof 178 It must be asswaged 333 The d iscommodities thereof ibid. In wounds how helped ibid. Palat the nerves holes and coat thereof c. 135 How to supply the defects thereof 567 Palmaris musculus 157 Palsie the differences causes c. thereof 236. The cure ibid. Follows upon wounds of the neck 273 Pancreas the substance site c. thereof 75 c. The tumors thereof 621 Pannicle See fleshy Pap how to be made for children 608. and the condition
thereof 422. what to be done when the stone falls into the ureter 423. signs it is faln out of the ureter into the bladder 424. what to be done when it is in the neck of the bladder or the passage of the yard ibid. how to cut for the stone in the bladder 427 428. c. how to cure the wound 431. to help the ulcer when the urine flows out by it 433. how to cut women for the stone ibid. divers strange ones mentioned 667 c. Storks their piety 40 Stoves how to be made 721 Strangury the causes c. thereof 438. a virulent one what 472. the causes and differences thereof ibid. prognosticks 473. from what part the matter thereof flows ibid. the general cure 474. the proper cure ibid. why it succeedeth immoderate copulation 591 Strangulation of the mother or womb 628. signs of the approach thereof 629 the causes and cure 630 Strengthening medicines See Corroborating Strumae See Kings-evil Sublimate See Mercury Subclavian See Artery and Vein Subclavius musculus 146 Succarath a Beast of the West Indies 40 Suffusio See Cataract Suggillations See Contusions Summer the temper thereof 6 Supinatores musculi 156 Suppuration the signs thereof 179. caused by natural heat 195 Suppuratives 183 195. an effectual one 305. their differences c. 696. how they differ from emollients ibid. Superfoetation what 617. the reason thereof ibid. Suppositories their difference form and use 704 Suppression of Urine See Urine Surgery what 1. the operation thereof ibid Surgeons what necessary for them 1. their office 2. the choice of such as shall have a care of those sick of the Plague 535 they must be careful in making Reports 742. how long in some cases they must suspend their judgements ibid. they must have a care lest they bring Magistrates into an error 747. how to Report or make Certificates in divers cases ibid. c. Sutures of the scull their number c. 112. want in some ibid. why not to be trepaned 113 201. Sutures in wounds their sorts and manner how to be performed 231 232 Sweating sickness 531 Sweet-bread 75 Sweet waters 724 Swine assist their fellows 44 Symptms their definition and division 28 Sympathy and Antipathy of living creatures 48 Symphysis a kinde of articulation 173 Synarcosis Synarthrosis Synchondrosis Syneurosis 172 173 Synochus putrida its cause and cure 186 T. TAsparia what 193 Tarentulas poysonous bite and cure 33 Tarsus what 127 Tastes what their differences 591 692 their several denominations and natures ibid. 693 Tasteing what 16 Teeth their number division and use 125. wherein they differ from other bones ibid. pain of them how helped 283. their affects 414. how to draw them 415. to cleanse them 417. how to supply their defect 564. to help the pain in breeding them 641 Temporal muscle 131. what ensues the cutting thereof 262 Temperament what the division thereof 4. ad pondus ibid ad justitiam ibid. Of a bone ligament gristle tendon vein artery 5. of ages ibid. of humors 7 Temper of the four seasons of the year 6. native temper how changed 12 Temperatures in particular as of the southern northern c. people ibid. Tensores musculi 163 Tentigo 29 Tertian agues or fevers their causes c. 189. their cure ibid. c. Testicles their substance 83. in women 87. their wounds 281 Testudo what 193 Tettars their kindes and causes 188. their cure ibid. c. 723. occasioned by the Lues venerea 483. their cure ibid. Thanacth a strange beast 683 Thenar musculus 158 169 Thigh the nerves thereof 160. its proper parts 161. and wounds thereof 282 Thigh-bone the appendices and processes thereof 161. the fracture and cure 359. nigh to the joint 361. its dislocation 393 394. See Hip. Things natural 2. not natural 19. why so called ibid. against nature 27 Thorax the chest and parts thereof 94 Thoracea arteria 107 Throat how to get out bones such like things that stick therein 413 Throttle and the parts thereof 136 Throws and their cause 602 Thumus what 109 Tibia 164 Tibiaeus anticus musculus 168. posticus 169 Tinea what 399 Toad his bite and cure 511 Tongue its quantity c. 135. its wounds its cure 172. its impediments and contraction and the cure 417. to supply its defects 566. Tonsillae 220. their inflammations and their cure ibid. Tooth ach the causes signs c. 413 Tophi or knots at the joints in some that have the gout how caused 458. the Lues venerea how helped 478 Torpedo his craft and stupefying force 510 Touching how performed 16 Touca a strange bird 680 Trapezius musculus 147 Transverse muscles of the Epigastrium 68 Triacle how useful in the gout 451. how it dulls the force of simple poysons 502 Trepan when to be applyed 242 their description 260. where to be applied 262 Trepaning why used 258. how performed 259. a caution in performance hereof ibid. Triangulus musculus 146 Triton 669 Transversarius musculus 143 Trusses their form and use 218 Tumors their differences 177. their general causes signs 178. general cure 180. which hardest to be be cured ibid. the four principall ibid. flatulent and watrish their signs and cure 191. of the gums 207. of the almonds of the throat 208. of the navel 216. of the groin and cods ihid of the knees 224 Turtles 40. Tympany See Dropsie V VAlves of the heart their action site c. 102 Varicous bodies 83 Varices what their causes signs and cure 339 Vas breve seu venosum 78 Vasa ejaculatoria 84 Vasti musculi 165 Vein what 66. Gate-vein and its distribution 77. descendent hollow vein and its distribution 80. ascendent â—o low vein and its distribution 103. they are more then arteries 106. those of the eyes 130. which to be opened in the inflammation of the eyes ibid. the cephalick 148. Median ibid. distribution of the subclavian vein ibid. of the axillary 149. of the crural 159 Vena porta 77. cava 80. arteriosa 102. phrenicae coronales azygos intercostalis mammariae 103. cervicalis musculosa ibid. axillaris humeralis jugulaâ—is interna externa 104. recta pubis 148. cephalica humeraria mediana 106. salvatella splenica 149. sapheia vel saphena ischiadica 159. muscula poplitea suralis ischiadica major ibid. Venery its discommodities in wounds of the head 255 Venemous bites and stings how to be cured 503 Venom of a mad dog outwardly applyed causeth madness 505 Ventoses their form and use 442 Ventricle See Stomach Ventricles of the brain 122 Verdegrease its poysonous quality and cure 521 Vertebrae and their processes 138. of the neck 137. of the holy-bonâ— 140. how differ nt from those of the loins 145. Tenth of the back how to the middle of the spine 145. their dislocation 376. See Spine Vertigo its causes and signs 401. the cure ibid. Vessels for distillation 726 c. Vesicatories why better then cauteries in cure of a pestilent bubo 551 whereof made 700. their
description and use 713 Viper See Adder Virginity the signs thereof 747 Vital parts which 56 their division ibid. Vitreus humor 130 Viver or as some term it the Weaver a fish his poysonous prick and the cure 515 Ulcers conjoyned with tumors how cured 188. in what bodies not easily cured 294. their nature causes c. 327. signs 328. prognosticks 329. their general cure 330. signs of a distempered one and the cure ibid. a painful one and the cure 321. with proud flesh in them ibid. putrid and breeding worms 332. a sordid one ibid. a malign virulent and eating one 333. advertisements concerning the time of dressing ulcers ibid. how to binde them up 334. such as run are good in time of the plague 328. Ulcers in particular and first of the eyes 334. of the nose 335. of the mouth ibid. of the ears 336. of the windepipe weazon stomach and guts 337. of the kidnies and bladder ibid. of the womb 338. that happen upon the fracture of the leg rump and heel 365. how to prevent them ibid. they must be seldome drest when the Callus is breeding 366 Umbilical vessels how many and what 594 Unction to be used in the Lues Venerea 467. their use 468. cautions in their use ibid. and the inconveniences following the immoderate use 469 Ungula or the web on the eye the causes prognosticks and cure 406 Unguentum adstringens 706. nutritum ibid. reum ibld. basilicum sive tetrapharmacum ibid diapompholigos 707. desiccativum rub ib. enulatum ib. Album Rhasis ib. Altheae ib. populeon ib. apostolorum ib. comitissae ib pro stomacho ib. ad morsus rabiosos ibid. Unicorn if any such beast what the name imports 523. what the ordinary horns are 524. not effectual against poyson ibid. effectual onely to dry ibid. in what cases good 525. Voices whence so various 136 Vomits their force 25. their description 197 Vomiting why it happens in the Colick 73. the fittest time therefore 450. to make it easie ibid. Voyages and other employments wherein the Author was present of Thurin 756. of Morolle and Low Britain 757. of Perpignan 758. of Landresie 759. of Bologn ibid. of Germany ibid. of Danvillers 760. of Castle of Compt 761. Of Mets ibid. of Hedin 765. Battel of St. Quintin 771. Voyage of Amiens of Harbor of Grace 772 to Roven ibid. battel of Dreux 773. of Moncontour ibid. Voyaâ—e of Flanders 774. of Burges 777 battel of St. Dennis ibid. voyage of Baion ibid. Urachus 93 Ureters their substance c. 85 Urine stopt by dislocation of the thigh-bone 391. suppression thereof how deadly 421. how it happens by internal causes 434. by external 435. prognosticks ibid. things unprofitable in the whole body purged thereby ibid. bloody the differences and causes thereof 436. the cure 437. scalding thereof how helped 474. a receptacle for such as cannot keep it 568. Urines of such as have the Plague sometimes like those that are in health 536 Utelif a strange fish 45. Vvea tunica 142 Vulnerary potions their use 482. the names of the simples whereof they are composed ibid. their form and when chiefly to be used 483 Uvula the site and use thereof 136 the inflammation and relaxation thereof 209. the cure ibid. W. WAlnut tree and the malignity thereof 519 Warts of the neck of the womb 638. their cure ibid. Washes to beautifie the skin 721 Wasps their stinging how helped 513 Watching and the discommodities thereof 24 Water its qualities 3. best in time of plague 530 Waters how to be distilled 729 Watrsh tumors their signs and cure 191 192 Weapons of the Antients compared with those of the moderm times 287 Weazon the substance c. thereof 109. how to be opened in extreme diseases 208. the wounds thereof 273. the ulcers thereof 337 Weakness two causes thereof 178 Web on the eye which curable and which not 406. the cure ibid. Wedge-bone 121 Weights and measures with their notes 702 Wen their causes and cure 193. c. how to distinguish them in the brest from a Cancer 194 Whale why reckoned among monsters 676. they bring forth young and suckle them 677. how caught ibid. Whalebone ibid. Whirl-bone the fracture and the cure 362. dislocation thereof 394 White lime 69 Whites the reason of the name differences c. 636. causes 637. their cure ibid. Whitlows 223 Wine which not good in the gout 452 Windes their tempers and qualities 13 20 Winter and the temper thereof 6. how it increaseth the native heat ibid. Wisdom the daughter of memory and experience 598 Witches hurt by the Divels assistance 661 Wolves their deceits and ambushes 44 Womb the substance magnitude c. thereof 89. the coats thereof 92 signs of the wounds thereof 280. ulcers thereof and their cure 338. when it hath received the seed it is shut up 593. the falling down thereof how caused 604. it is not distinguished into cells 617. a scirrhus thereof 622. signs of the distemper thereof 623. which meet for conception ibid. of the falling down preversion or turning thereof 624. the cure thereof 625. it must be cut away when it is putrified 626. the strangulation or suffocation thereof 628. See Strangulation Women their nature 18. how to know whether they have conceived 593. their travel in childebirth and the cause thereof 599. what must be done to them presently after their deliverance 602. bearing many children at a birth 648 Wonderful net 120 Wondrous original of some creatures 669. nature of some marine things ibid. Worms in the teeth their causes and how killed 415. bred in the head 488. cast forth by urine 489. how generated and their differences 490. of monstrous length ibid. signs 491. the cure 492 Wounds may be cured only with lint and water 35 Wounds termed great in three respects 229 742 Wounds poysoned how cured 500 Wounds of the head at Paris and of the legs at Avignon why hard to be cured 301 Wounds what the divers appellation and division of them 227. their causes 228. and signs 229. prognosticks ibid. small ones sometimes mortal 230. their cure in general ibid. to stay their bleeding 232. to help pain 223. why some die of small ones and others recover of great 249. whether better to cure in children or in old people 250. wounds of the head See fractures Of the musculous skin thereof 255. their cure 256. of the face 267. of the eye-brows ibid. of the eyes 268. of the cheek 170. of the nose 272. of the tongue ibid. of the ears 273. of the neck and throat ibid. of the weazon and gullet ibid. of the chest 274. of the heart lungs and midriff ibid. of the spine 275. what wounds of the lungs curable 277. of the Epigastrium or lower belly 280. their cure 281. of the Kall ibid. of the fat ibid. of the groins yard and testicles ibid. of the thighs and legs 282. of the nerves and nervous parts ibid. of the joints 284. of the ligaments 286 Wounds contused must be brought to suppuration 294 Wounds made by gun-shot are not burnt neither must they be cauterized 288. they may be dressed with suppuratives 289 why hard to cure ibid. why they look black 291. they have no Eschar ibid. why so deadly 292. in what bodies not easily cured 294. their division ibid. signs 295. how to be drest at the first ibid. how the second time 299. they all are contused 305 Wounds made by arrows how different from those made by gunshot 308 Wrist and the bones thereof 155. the dislocation thereof and the cure 388 Y. YArd and the parts thereof 87. the wounds thereof 281. to help the cord thereof 419. the malign ulcers thereof 471. to supply the defect thereof for making water 569 Yew-tree its malignity 519 Z. Zirbus the Kall the substance c. thereof 69 70 FINIS
to the inhabitants by the beating of Drums and ringing a Bell which sign once given they all run forthwith as to extinguish the City if it were on fire being furnished with weapons and all things fitting for that purpose For the people of that country are very diligent and expert in catching the Whale Wherefore in each of the boats furnished with all things either to assail or flie there are put ten lustie rowers and divers others furnished with harping irons to strike the Whale which being cast and fastned in her they loose out huge long ropes fastned to them untill such time as he be dead then together with the ropes and assisted by the waves of the Sea they draw the Whale wearied with running and laboring and fainting by reason of the magnitude and multitude of his wounds being in the time of their conflict diligently chased and driven toward the shore a land and merrily part the prey each whereof hath his share according to the number of the irons thrown the magnitude of the wound and the necessity and excellency of the wounded part for life each of their harping-irons are known by their peculiar marks In the heat of the skirmish many stand up and down in boats only for this purpose to take up such as chance to fall into the Sea lest they should be drowned The males are caught with more difficulty the females more easily especially if their young ones be with them Why the females are more easily caught then the males for whilst they linger to help and succour them they lose the occasion of escaping The flesh is of no esteem the tongue only is commendable for being very large and of a very lax substance it is powdered and by most Gentlemen accounted for a dainty The lard is dispersed over many countries to be boiled and eaten with fish in the time of Lent that Gourmandizers may have somthing to serve them in stead of flesh which is then forbidden There is great store of fat in them in the parts under the skin and belly which melted concretes not again by reason of the subtilty they keep it to burn in lamps and to use about their ships The houses of the fish-eaters are builded with their bones also orchards in the coast of Aquitane are fenced with these bones Whale-bone The sins that stand forth of their mouths which are commonly called Whale-bones being dried and polished serve to make busks for women whip-staves and little staves as also to stiffen garments Many make seats or stools of the vertebrae or spondilsor the back bone The manner of cutting up the Whale In the river Scalde ten miles from Antwerp Anno Dom. 1477. the second day of July there was a Whale taken of a blackish blue color she had a spout hole in the top of her head out of which she cast great store of water she was fifty eight foot long and sixteen foot high her tails was fourteen foot broad from the eye to the end of her nose was some sixteen foot Her lower jaw was six foot on each side she had twenty five teeth which she could hide in her upper jaw there being holes for them it being wholly toothless for which one thing this Whale may be judged monstrous for that nature hath denied them teeth and for that in creatures that are not horned it is so ordained by nature that when they have teeth in their lower jaw they should have others also in the upper to answer to them so to chaw their meat The longest of these teeth exceed not six inches Lib. 9. cap. 25. lib. 32. cap. 1. The wondrous power of the Remora There is as Pliny reports a very small fish accustomed to live upon rocks it is called Echeneis never exceeding the length of a foot it is thought that ships go more slowly if this stick to them wherefore the Latines have also given it a name of Remora for that a ship being under sail with a good wind may by the Echeneis seizing on her as if she would devour her be stayed against the Sailers wills and stand still as if she were in a safe harbor Wherefor she is said in the Actian fight to have staied the ship of Marcus Antonius hastening to go about and encourage his souldiers so that he was forced to enter into another ship and thereupon Cesars navie came upon them too hastily and before they were provided She also staid the ship of of the Emperor Caius comming from Astura to Antes his ship of all the navy making no way neither did they long wonder at this stay the cause being presently known some forthwith leaping into the Sea to find the cause thereof there found her about the ship even sticking to the Rudder and they shewed her to Caius being wroth that this so small a thing should stop him and countermand the endevour of forty Rowers Therefore this little fish tames and infringes the violence and madness of the world and that with no labor not without holding or any other way but only by sticking thereto Certainly however it comes to pass who from this example of holding of ships can doubt of any power or effect of nature in medicines which grow naturally Yea and without this example the Torpedo out of the sea also may be sufficient who a far off and at a distance if it be touched with a a spear or rod The wondrous force of the Torpedo will benumb even the strongest arms and retard the feet how ever nimble to run away CHAP. XXII Of the admirable nature of Birds and of soms Beasts THat there be divers things not only in the Sea but also in the air and earth which by the wonderful condition of their own nature may equal that of Monsters the only Estrich may serve for a witness It is the biggest of Birds though indeed it partly resembles a bird and partly a beast and it is familiar to Africa and Aethiopia as which contrary to the nature of beasts hath feathers The Estrich is between a bird and a beast and against the custom of birds cannot flie aloft for it hath not feathers fit to flie but like unto hairs yet will it out-run a horse The natural force of the stomach in concoctings is miraculous The wondrous force of her stomach as to which nothing is untameable she laies eggs of a wondrous largeness so that they may be framed into cups their feathers are most beautiful as you may perceive by this following figure The figure of an Estrich Any one may easily gather of what a prodigious magnitude an Estrich is by the greatness of his bones Three of these birds were kept at the Kings charge by the Mareschalde Rets one whereof dying it was bestowed upon me whereof I have with great diligence made a Sceleton The delineation of the Sceleton of an Estrich A. Shews the head which was somewhat thicker then the head of a Crane